Home

Getting Started with LibreOffice 3.3

1. dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args1 end sub The macro in Listing 4 is not as complicated as it first appears Learning a few things helps significantly in understanding the generated macros The discussion starts with features near the top of the macro listing and describes them If you like to avoid details then simply change the text Andrew Pitonyak in the macro above to what you want to insert at the current cursor position Comments start with REM The keyword REM short for remark starts a macro comment All text after REM on the same line is ignored As a short cut the single quote character can also be used to start a comment LibreOffice Basic is not case sensitive for keywords so REM Rem and rem all start a comment If you use symbolic constants defined by the API it is safer to assume that the names are case sensitive symbolic constants are an advanced topic not usually needed by people that use the macro recorder Defining subroutines with SUB Individual macros are stored in subroutines defined with the keyword SUB The end of a subroutine is indicated by the words END SUB The code starts by defining the subroutine named Main which is empty and does nothing The next subroutine EnterMyName contains the generat
2. Control double click here to float Click to hide or show Gallery S eee Figure 285 Icon view of one theme in the Gallery 282 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 By default the Gallery is docked above the workspace To expand the Gallery position the pointer over the line that divides it from the top of the workspace When the pointer changes to parallel lines with arrows click and drag downward The workspace resizes in response As for other docked windows you can float the Gallery by moving the mouse pointer over an edge of the Gallery window holding down the Control key and double clicking Repeat this procedure to dock the Gallery again The default themes are locked no items can be added to or deleted from these themes The locked themes are easily recognizable by right clicking on them the only available option in the pop up menu is Properties In a default installation only the My themes theme is customizable although new themes can be added as explained in Adding a new theme to the Gallery on page 284 Adding objects to the Gallery You may wish to add to the Gallery any images that you use frequently for example a company logo You can then very easily insert these graphics into a document later You can add images only to My Theme or to any other theme that you have created these are indicated by a green icon in the list of themes You cannot add
3. ql Native Tablefields Figure 199 Type of list contents dropdown list Type the following exactly as it is in the List contents box SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Ge neral Data Events Data eid eee IBPayment Type of list contents Sal_ vl List content Bound field 04 SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Figure 200 List content for payment type fields What you wrote is called an SQL command The words SELECT and FROM are written in capital letters because they are commands When the command SELECT is used it requires a field name within quotation marks and then the field s alias also within quotation marks In this case the field and its alias are the same The FROM command requires the name of the table which contains the field Single word table names do not require quotation marks but multiple word table names do Repeat these steps for the payment fields for Lunch Supper Motel Snacks and Misc The main form should look like Figure 201 as far as where the controls are located It also shows what the Note control should look like Those changes are explained in the next step Close the Properties window 212 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Figure 201 Position of controls in main form Step 7 Change the Misc Notes field We want the Misc Notes control which has a field type of Memo to have a ve
4. To have LibreOffice save documents by default in the Microsoft Word file format go to Tools Options Load Save See Choosing options for loading and saving documents in Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice Working with text Working with text selecting copying pasting moving in Writer is similar to working with text in any other program LibreOffice also has some convenient ways to select items that are not next to each other select a vertical block of text and paste unformatted text Selecting items that are not consecutive To select nonconsecutive items as shown in Figure 68 using the mouse 1 Select the first piece of text 2 Hold down the Control key and use the mouse to select the next piece of text 3 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text copy it delete it change the style or whatever Macintosh users substitute the Command key when instructions in this chapter say to use the Control key Around the World in 80 Days Jules Verne RO yp is eyes raised his PEREN held up his hands and seemed about to collapse so overcome was he with stupefied astonishment Round the world he murmured In eighty days responded M gi But the trunks gasped Passepartout unconsciously s sil da his head from ae to left and the same for you Well our ari on he way Bring down my mackintosh and traveling cloak and some stout shoes t
5. Custom Animation IN amp Slide Transition Slide1 1 Default e _ _ 46 Figure 127 Main window of Impress ovals indicate the Hide Show markers You can remove the Slides pane or Tasks pane from view by clicking the X in the upper right corner You can also show or hide these panes using View Slide Pane or View Tasks Pane You can also hide these panes in order to maximize the Workspace area by clicking the Hide Show marker in the middle of the vertical separator line and restore them by clicking again on the same area Slides pane The Slides pane contains thumbnail pictures of the slides in your presentation in the order they will be shown unless you change the slide show order Clicking a slide in this pane selects it and places it in the Workspace When a slide is in the Workspace you can apply to it any changes desired Several additional operations can be performed on one or more slides simultaneously in the Slides pane Add new slides to the presentation Mark a slide as hidden so that it will not be shown as part of the presentation Delete a slide from the presentation if it is no longer needed Rename a slide Duplicate a slide copy and paste or move it to a different position in the presentation cut and paste Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 139 It is also po
6. _ Link Preview Figure 282 Insert picture dialog Linking an image file If the Link option in the Insert picture dialog is selected LibreOffice creates a link to the file containing the image instead of saving a copy of the image in the document The result is that the image is displayed in the document but when the document is saved it contains only a reference to the image file not the image itself The document and the image remain as two separate files and they are merged together only when you open the document again Linking an image has two advantages and one disadvantage e Advantage Linking can reduce the size of the document when it is saved because the image file itself is not included File size is usually not a problem on a modern computer with a reasonable amount of memory unless the document includes many large graphics files LibreOffice can handle quite large files e Advantage You can modify the image file separately without changing the document because the link to the file remains valid and the modified image will appear when you next open the document This can be a big advantage if you or someone else perhaps a graphic artist is updating images e Disadvantage If you send the document to someone else or move it to a different computer you must also send the image files or the receiver will not be able to see the linked images You need to keep track of the location of the images and
7. 338 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Assigning shortcut keys In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in Appendix A you can define your own You can assign shortcuts to standard LibreOffice functions or your own macros and save them for use with the entire LibreOffice suite A To adapt shortcut keys to your needs use the Customize dialog as described below 1 2 Be careful when reassigning your operating system s or LibreOffice s predefined shortcut keys Many key assignments are universally understood shortcuts such as F1 for Help and are always expected to provide certain results Although you can easily reset the shortcut key assignments to the LibreOffice defaults changing some common shortcut keys can cause confusion especially if other users share your computer Select Tools Customize Keyboard The Customize dialog opens To have the shortcut key assignment available in all components of LibreOffice select the LibreOffice radio button Next select the required function from the Category and Function lists Now select the desired shortcut keys in the Shortcut keys list and click the Modify button at the upper right Click OK to accept the change Now the chosen shortcut keys will execute the function chosen in step 3 above whenever they are pressed All existing shortcut keys for the currently selected Function are listed in the Keys selection box If the Keys list is empt
8. What is open source The four essential rights of open source software are embodied within the Free Software Foundation s General Public License GPL e The right to use the software for any purpose e Freedom to redistribute the software for free or for a fee e Access to the complete source code of the program that is the blueprints e The right to modify any part of the source or use portions of it in other programs The basic idea behind open source is very simple When programmers can read redistribute and modify the source code for a piece of software the software evolves People improve it people adapt it people fix bugs For more information on Free and Open Source software visit these websites Open Source Initiative OSI http Awww opensource org Free Software Foundation FSF http www gnu org What are open standards An open standard provides a means of doing something that is independent of manufacturer or vendor thus enabling competing software programs to freely use the same file formats HTML XML and ODF are examples of open standards for documents An open standard meets the following requirements e It is well documented with the complete specification publically available either free or ata nominal charge e It can be freely copied distributed and used The intellectual property of the standard is made irrevocably available on a royalty free basis e It is standardized
9. _ 100 Figure 87 Parts of the Calc window Toolbars Three toolbars are located under the Menu bar by default the Standard toolbar the Formatting toolbar and the Formula Bar The icons buttons on these toolbars provide a wide range of common commands and functions You can also modify these toolbars as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice In the Formatting toolbar the three boxes on the left are the Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists They show the current setting for the selected cell or area The Apply Style list may not be visible by default Click the down arrow to the right of each box to open the list v 10 J Bs U Default Arial Apply style Figure 88 Apply Style Font Name and Font Size lists Formula bar On the left hand side of the Formula bar is a small text box called the Name Box with a letter and number combination in it such as D7 This combination called the cell reference is the column letter and row number of the selected cell To the right of the Name box are the the Function Wizard Sum and Function buttons Clicking the Function Wizard button opens a dialog from which you can search through a list of available functions This can be very useful because it also shows how the functions are formatted Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 101 Al v Fe Input line sa pe e Figure 89 Formula Bar In a spr
10. All pages Back sides left pages Front sides right pages 7 Click the Print button 8 Take the printed pages out of the printer turn the pages over and put them back into the printer in the correct orientation to print on the blank side You may need to experiment a bit to find out what the correct arrangement is for your printer 8 On the Print dialog in the Page sides section select Front sides right pages option from the Include drop down box 9 Click the Print button Tip If your printer can print double sided automatically choose All pages Printing envelopes labels business cards Printing envelopes labels or business cards using Writer involves two steps setup and printing For details of how to set these up see Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide To print 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog under Ranges and copies choose Pages and type 1 in the box Click the Print button Printing in black and white on a color printer You may wish to print documents in black and white on a color printer Several choices are available Please note that some color printers may print in color regardless of the settings you choose Change the printer settings to print in black and white or grayscale 1 Choose File Print to open the Print dialog Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 263 2 Click Properties to open the Properties dialog f
11. Creating reports Reports provide information found in the database in a useful way In this they are similar to queries Reports are generated from the database s tables or queries They can contain all of the fields of the table or query or just a selected group of fields Reports can be static or dynamic Static reports contain the data in the selected fields at the time the report was created Dynamic reports can be updated to show the latest data For example a report on expenses for a vacation in the past should probably be a static report because it is based upon specific data that does not change However a report on the fuel data should probably be a dynamic report because this report depends upon data that does change Dynamic reports update only the data that is changed or added to a table or query They do not show any modifications made to the table or query itself For example after creating the report below open the fuel economy query created in the previous A section For the End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer column change the number 1 to the number 3 The report will be identical before and after you make the change All reports are based upon a single table or query So you need first to decide what fields you want to use in the report If you want to use fields from different tables you must first combine these fields in a single query Then you can create a report on this query For example a r
12. LibreOffice Writer Web with LibreOffice Figure 39 Language Setting Options Language Settings On the right hand side of the Language Settings Languages page change the User interface Locale setting Default currency and Default languages for documents as required In the example English USA has been chosen for all the appropriate settings Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 45 If you want the language dictionary setting to apply to the current document only instead of being the default for all new documents select the option labelled For the current document only Language of User interface Default English USA Locale setting Default English USA Decimal separator key W Same as locale setting Default currency Default USD Default languages for documents Western aip English USA Asian Mone CIL For the current document only Enhanced language support Enabled for Asian languages Enabled for complex text layout CTL Figure 40 Choosing language options If necessary select the options to enable support for Asian languages Chinese Japanese Korean and support for CTL complex text layout languages such as Urdu Thai Hebrew and Arabic If you choose either of these options the next time you open this dialog you will see some extra choices under Language Settings as shown below These choices Searching in Japanese Asian Layout and Complex Text Layout
13. We want to replace the PaymentType field with a List Box Then we can choose the type of payment from the Payment Type table rather than having to manually enter the type In my case each of my payment types begins with a different letter If enter the first letter of the payment type the rest of the word automatically appears can then go to the next field 1 Control click the Payment field for Breakfast The green handles appear around the field but not around the Label Breakfast Payment er o o Figure 197 Selecting a field of a control 2 Right click within the green handles and select Replace with List Box 3 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Properties List Box dialog 4 On the General tab scroll down to the Dropdown selection Change the No to Yes General Data Events Alignment 0 0 c 00 Left o Background color SE e OxO0DDDDDD Ca Border iicicsccccetesccitiank 3Dlook look Dropdown Line count Multiselection Default A eee E Additional information Help POX cieceseeeeeeseeenes Help Te DEO ter sescl Figure 198 Dropdown list open to reveal choices 5 Click the Data tab e Type of list contents is a dropdown list Change it to Sql Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 211 Gene ral Data Events Data Tfield 0 05 Type of list contents List content
14. Accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools See Java options below The Support assistive technology tools option is not shown on all LibreOffice installations See Assistive Tools in LibreOffice in the Help for other requirements and information Select or deselect the options as required Miscellaneous options Support assistive technology tools program restart required Use text selection cursor in read only text documents Allow animated graphics Allow animated text Help tips disappear after 4 seconds Options for high contrast appearance Automatically detect high contrast mode of operating system C Use automatic font color for screen display Use system colors for page previews Figure 32 Choosing accessibility options Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 39 Java options If you install or update a Java Runtime Environment JRE after you install LibreOffice or if you have more than one JRE installed on your computer you can use the LibreOffice Java options page to choose the JRE for LibreOffice to use If you are a system administrator programmer or other person who customizes JRE installations you can use the Parameters and Class Path pages reached from the Java page to specify this information If you do not see anything listed in the middle of the page wait a few minutes while LibreOffice searches for JREs on the hard d
15. Creating a new database To create a new database choose File New Database from the menu bar or click the arrow next to the New icon on the Standard toolbar and select Database from the dropdown menu Both methods open the Database Wizard Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 193 On the first page of the Database Wizard select Create a new database and then click Next The second page has two questions Make sure the choice for the first question is Yes register the database for me and the choice for the second question is Open the database for editing Click Finish If the database is not registered it will not be accessible to the other LibreOffice components such as Writer and Calc If the database is registered other components can access it Save the new database with the name Automobile This opens the Automobile LibreOffice Base window Figure 175 shows part of this window Create Table in Design View Description Use Wizard to Create Table j Create View Form Reports Figure 175 Creating database tables Every time the Automobile database is opened the Automobile LibreOffice Base window opens Changes can then be made to the database The title for this window is always lt database name gt LibreOffice Base As you create a database you should save your work regularly This means more than saving what you have just created You must save the whole database as w
16. E Export comments Export automatically inserted blank pages Embed standard fonts Figure 271 General page of PDF Options dialog Range section e All Exports the entire document to PDF e Pages To export a range of pages use the format 3 6 pages 3 to 6 To export single pages use the format 7 9 11 pages 7 9 and 11 You can also export a combination of page ranges and single pages by using a format like 3 6 8 10 12 e Selection Exports all the selected material Images section e Lossless compression Images are stored without any loss of quality Tends to make large files when used with photographs Recommended for other kinds of images or graphics e JPEG compression Allows for varying degrees of quality A setting of 90 works well with photographs small file size little perceptible loss of quality 266 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Reduce image resolution Lower DPI dots per inch images have lower quality For viewing on a computer screen generally a resolution of 72dpi for Windows or 96dpi GNU Linux is sufficient while for printing it is generally preferable to use at least 300 or 600 dpi depending on the capability of the printer Higher dpi settings greatly increase the size of the exported file EPS Encapsulated PostScript images with embedded previews are exported only as previews EPS images without embedded previews are exported as empty placeholders General section PDF A
17. Export and select Macromedia Flash for the file type You can also convert presentations into a series of web pages as described below Note Saving as web pages HTML format does not retain animation and slide transitions 1 To begin choose File Export and select HTML Document as the file type 2 Create a folder for the files supply a name for the resulting HTML file and click Save The HTML Export Wizard opens Depending on the size of your presentation and the number of graphics it contains the HTML export function may create many HTML JPG and GIF files If you simply save to your desktop not in a specific folder these separate HTML and graphics files will be all over your desktop So be sure to create a folder to hold all the files 3 Choose the design for all of the pages either from an existing design or by creating a new one If you have not previously saved a design the Existing Design choice is not available Assign design New design Existing Design L armie lec Select an existing design or create a new one 4 Click Next to select the type of web pages to create e Standard HTML one page for each slide with navigation links to move from slide to slide e Standard HTML with frames one page with a navigation bar on the left hand side uses slide title as navigation links Click on links to display pages in right hand side e Automatic one page for each slide with each page set
18. If the contents of cells falls into a regular pattern such as four cells followed by a total then you can use Data Group and Outline AutoOutline to have Calc add outline controls based on the pattern Otherwise you can set outline groups manually by selecting the cells for grouping then choosing Data Group and Outline Group On the Group dialog you can choose whether to group the selected cells by rows or columns When you close the dialog the outline group controls are visible between either the row or column headers and the edges of the editing window The controls resemble the tree structure of a file manager in appearance and can be hidden by selecting Data Outline Hide Details They are Strictly for on screen use and do not print Figure 121 Outline group controls The basic outline controls have plus or minus signs at the start of the group to show or hide hidden cells However if outline groups are nested the controls have numbered buttons for hiding different levels If you no longer need a group place the mouse cursor in any cell in it and select Data Group and Outline Ungroup To remove all groups on a sheet select Data Group and Outline Remove 128 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Filtering which cells are visible A filter is a list of conditions that each entry has to meet in order to be displayed You can set three types of filters from the Data Filter sub menu Au
19. Steps Select a document type 1 Select starting document what type oF document do you wank to create 2 Select document type Letter 3 Select address list E mail message 4 Create salutation TEN ages to a group of recipients The e mail messag e mail messages can be personalized For each recipient Figure 278 Select document type 272 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 On the third page click the Select Address List button Select the required address list even if only one is shown and then click OK If the address list you need is not shown here you can click Add to find it and add it to the list Steps Insert address block 1 Select starting document 1 Select the address list containing the address data Select Address List vou want ta use This data is needed to create the 2 Select document type address block 3 Select address list 4 Create salutation Select Address List Select an address list Click Add to select recipients From a different list IF you do not have an address list you can create one by clicking Create 6 Edit document 7 Personalize document Your recipients are currently selected From 6 Save print or send taddress test address test Addresses Figure 279 Selecting an address list 4 Back on the Select address list page click Next On the Create salutation page deselect This document should contain a salutation Mail Merge Wiza
20. The picture will resize itself to fill the area of the contents box Follow the directions in the Caution note below when resizing it by hand You can easily add a picture to a slide outside a contents box Just select from the main menu Insert Picture From File and follow the same procedure as above You will also need to move the picture to the desired location When resizing a graphic right click the picture Select Position and Size from the context menu and make sure that Keep ratio is selected Then adjust the height or width to the size you need As you adjust one dimension both dimensions will change Failure to do so will cause the picture to become distorted Remember also that resizing a bitmap image will reduce its quality better by far to create an image of the desired size outside of Impress A Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 155 Adding tables For displaying tabular data you can insert basic tables directly into your slides by choosing the Table contents type It is also possible to add a table outside a contents box in a number of ways e Choose Insert Table from the menu bar e With the Table button on the main toolbar EH 7 e With the Table Design button on the table toolbar e Select a Style option from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane Each method opens the Insert Table dialog Alternatively clicking on the black arrow next to the Table button displays a graphic that you can
21. e Insert Slide e Right click on the present slide and select Slide New Slide from the pop up menu e Click the Slide icon in the Presentation toolbar Presentation x Slide ill Slide Design fl Slide Show Sometimes rather than starting from a new slide you want to duplicate a slide you have already inserted To do so select the slide you want to duplicate from the Slides pane and then choose Insert Duplicate Slide Selecting a layout In the Tasks pane select the Layout drawer to display the available layouts The Layouts differ in the number of elements a slide will contain spanning from the empty slide Blank Slide to a slide with 6 contents boxes and a title Title 6 contents Layouts Figure 141 Available slide layouts Text and graphic elements can be readjusted at any time during the preparation of the presentation but changing the layout of a slide that already contains some contents can have a dramatic effect It is therefore recommended that you pay particular attention to the layout you select If you do need to change the layout after contents have been added the contents are not lost though they may need to be reformatted The Title Slide which also contains a section for a subtitle or Title Only are suitable layouts for the first slide while for most of the slides you will probably use the Title Contents layout Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 149 If you do not know the
22. 2 Use this sentence On date our breakfast cost amount paid by name our lunch cost amount paid by name and our supper cost amount paid by name But only type On our breakfast cost paid by our lunch cost paid by and our supper cost paid by 3 To replace date click the field name Date in the data source window and drag it to the right of the word On The result On lt Date gt If you have Field shadings turned on View gt Field shading lt Date gt has a gray background Otherwise it does not 4 To replace first amount click the Breakfast field name and drag it to the right of our breakfast cost Make sure you have the proper spacing between the field names and the words before and after them Result breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt 5 To replace the first name click the Boayment field name and drag it to the right of paid by Result paid by lt Bpayment gt 6 Inthe same way fill in the rest of the fields in the sentence Use lt Lunch gt and lt LPayment gt for the second set of amount and name in the sentence Use lt Supper gt and lt SPayment gt for the third set of amount and name in the sentence 7 Final result On lt Date gt our breakfast cost lt Breakfast gt paid by lt BPayment gt our lunch cost lt Lunch gt paid by lt LPayment gt and our supper cost lt Supper gt paid by lt SPayment gt 8 Add data to the fields of the sentence e Click the gr
23. Defining a different first page for a document Many documents such as letters and reports have a first page that is different from the other pages in the document For example the first page of a letterhead typically has a different header or the first page of a report might have no header or footer while the other pages do With LibreOffice you can define the page style for the first page and specify the style for the following pages to be applied automatically As an example we can use the First Page and Default page styles that come with LibreOffice Figure 58 shows what we want to happen the first page is to be followed by the default page and all the following pages are to be in the Default page style Details are in Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide 68 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Default Figure 58 Flow of page styles Dividing a document into chapters In a similar way you can divide a document into chapters Each chapter might start with the First Page style with the following pages using the Default page style as above At the end of the chapter insert a manual page break and specify the next page to have the First Page style to start the next chapter as shown in Figure 59 Default Default Figure 59 Dividing a document into chapters using page styles Changing page orientation within a document A Writer document can contain pages in more than one orientation Acommon scenari
24. Figure 224 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 218 The information we want is what albums are by a certain musical group or individual the album s author We can include when each album was bought When working with a query more than one table can be used Since different tables may contain the same field names the format for naming fields in a query is Table name field name with a period between the table name and the field name For example The Lunch field of the Vacation table used in a query has the name Vacation Lunch Step 1 Select the fields 1 Select the CD Collection table from the dropdown list of tables 2 Select fields from the CD Collection table in the Available fields list a Click Artist and use the gt button to move it to the Fields in the Query list b Move the AlbumTitle and DatePurchased fields in the same manner c Click Next To change the order of the fields select the field you want to move and click the up or down arrow Select the fields columns for your query Tables Table CD Collection Available fields Fields in the Query CollectionID CD Collection Artist Format CD Collection AlbumTitle Notes CD Collection DatePurchased Numberoflracks Photo A Y Figure 218 First page of the Query Wizard Step 2 Select the sorting order Up to four fields can be used to sort the information of our query A little simple logic helps at this point
25. Figure 237 Selecting fields for grouping data Step 4 Sort options We do not want to do any additional sorting Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 233 Step 5 Choose layout Use default settings for the layout Click Next Step 6 Create report Label the report Vacation Expenses e Select Static report e Click Finish If you feel adventurous try selecting some of the other layout choices After selecting a choice drag the Report Wizard window out of the way so that you can see what you have selected Move the cursor over the Title Bar of the window and then drag and drop Vacation fuel report 1 Create a query containing only fuel bought on the days of the vacation a Open a query in Design View b Follow the steps for adding tables in Add tables on page 227 to add the Fuel table c Inthe Fuel table double click Date and Fue Cost to enter them in the table at the bottom of the query d Inthe Criterion cell of the Date field type the following BETWEEN 5 25 2007 AND 5 26 2007 Field Date I FuelCost Table Fuel Fuel Sort x x Criterion BETWEEN 05 25 200 AND 05 26 200 7 Figure 238 Setting the criterion for a query 2 Save name and close the query Suggestion Vacation Fuel Purchases When using dates in a query enter them in numerical form MM DD YYYY or DD MM YYYY depending upon your language s default setting for dates my default settin
26. Macro Selector dialog 323 Macromedia Flash 305 macros 310 assigning to events 341 Calc 319 comments 313 creating 315 DIM 314 dispatch framework 318 dispatch helper 314 downloading 323 editing 313 event handling 325 example 315 functions 319 IDE 313 318 library container 312 library containers 319 menu items 324 module 312 modules 319 organization 319 recording 311 REM 313 resources 328 running 312 323 storage 321 subroutines 313 319 variables 314 viewing 313 writing 328 mail merge 94 Mail Merge Wizard e mailing Writer document 272 Mantovani Paolo 319 margins 167 margins Writer 92 Master Pages 158 master slides 157 Math formulas inserting 157 mathematical equations 242 mathematical markup 245 mathematical symbols 243 matrix markup Math 251 measurement unit 81 media clips adding to slides 157 memory options 31 menu bar 15 menus adding commands 334 creating 333 customizing 332 modifying 334 modifying entries 334 Microsoft Office file conversion 43 Microsoft Windows file associations 13 Quickstarter 14 system requirements 11 Microsoft Word 76 middle mouse button function 33 mirror copies 186 mouse positioning 33 MySQL 192 N navigation cell to cell in Calc 106 sheet to sheet in Calc 107 Navigation icons 75 Navigation toolbar 24 75 Navigator 23 141 Navigator Calc 105 new document 20 non breaking hyphen 80 non breaking spaces 80 nonconsecutive items selecting 77 Normal view Impres
27. Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Right click the header of the column or row 3 Choose Insert Rows or Insert Columns 110 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be inserted at once rather than inserting them one at a time 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for inserting a single column or row above Deleting columns and rows Columns and rows can be deleted individually or in groups Single column or row A single column or row can only be deleted by using the mouse 1 Select the column or row to be deleted 2 Right click on the column or row header 3 Select Delete Columns or Delete Rows from the pop up menu Multiple columns or rows Multiple columns or rows can be deleted at once rather than deleting them one at atime 1 Highlight the required number of columns or rows by holding down the left mouse button on the first one and then dragging across the required number of identifiers 2 Proceed as for deleting a single column or row above Working with sheets Like any other Calc element sheets can be inserted deleted and renamed Inserting new sheets There are several ways to insert a new sheet The fastest method is to click on the Add Sheet button CJ This inserts one
28. To place a slide in the slide design area Normal view click the slide thumbnail in the Slides pane or double click it in the Navigator Outline view Outline view contains all the slides of the presentation in their numbered sequence It shows topic titles bulleted lists and numbered lists for each slide in outline format Only the text contained in the default text boxes in each slide is shown so if your slide includes other text boxes or drawing objects the text in these objects is not displayed Slide names are also not included Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter ai January iF ebruary sal arch ha Figure 132 Outline view Use Outline view for the following purposes 1 Making changes in the text of a slide e Add and delete the text in a slide just as in the Normal view Move the paragraphs of text in the selected slide up or down by using the up and down arrow buttons Move Up or Move Down e gt T on the Text Formatting toolbar Change the outline level for any of the paragraphs in a slide using the left and right arrow buttons Promote or Demote Both move a paragraph and change its outline level using a combination of these four arrow buttons 2 Comparing the slides with your outline if you have prepared one in advance If you notice from your outline that another slide is needed you can create it directly in the Outline view or you can return to the Normal view to create i
29. Use the Backspace key to erase the date 2 Insert Fields Date This places today s date where the original date was 3 Change the date formatting a Double click the date field you just inserted The Edit Fields Document window opens Edit Fields Document Type Select Format Date 12 31 1999 Dec 31 99 Dec 31 1999 31 Dec 1999 Figure 242 Modifying a date field b Since this is a dynamic report change the Select field from Date fixed to Date c Change the Format to what you desire I use the Friday December 31 1999 choice Click OK Step 2 Change the column widths The column widths can be changed by moving the cursor over the right border of each column so that it becomes a double headed arrow Then drag and drop it to where you want it This has to be done for each column in each table in the report This can also be done with the last column on the right even though there is no black border It should now look something like Figure 243 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 237 Figure 243 Realigned columns in a report Step 3 Change the number formatting in the cells The fuel quantity should have three decimal places The Begin End and Distance should have one decimal place Fuel Cost should be currency and have two decimal places and Cost per mile should have three decimal places 1 2 3 4 Right click the cell below Quantity and select Number format T
30. Which field is most important In our query the artist is most important The album title is less important and the date purchased is of least importance Of course if we were interested in what music we bought on a given day the date purchased would be the most important Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 225 Sort by Ascending C Descending Then by Ascending C Descending Figure 219 Sorting order page 1 Click the first Sort by dropdown list Click CD Collection Artist to select it e To list the artists in alphabetical order a z select Ascending on the right 2 Click the second Sort by dropdown list e Click CD Collection ArtistTitle and select Ascending 3 Repeat this process for CD Collection DatePurchased 4 Click Next Step 3 Select the search conditions The search conditions allow us to compare the name we entered with the names of the artist in our database and decide whether to include a particular artist in our query or not e IS equal to the same as e is not equal to not the same as e is smaller than comes before e is greater than comes after e IS equal or less than the same as or comes before e is equal or greater than the same as or comes after e like similar to in some way Note These conditions apply to numbers letters using the alphabetical order and dates 1 Since we are only searching for one thing we will use the default setting of Match a
31. Z Show logo Figure 140 Selecting a slide design e Choose the desired slide transition from the Effect drop down menu Select the desired speed for the transition between the different slides in the presentation from the Speed drop down menu Medium is a good choice for now 6 Click Create A new presentation is created You might want to accept the default values for both Effect and Speed unless you are skilled at doing this Both of these values can be changed later while working with Slide transitions and animations These two features are explained in more detail in Chapter 9 of the Impress Guide If you selected From template on step 1 of the Wizard the Next button will be active on step 3 and other pages will be available These pages are not described here Remember to save frequently while working on the presentation to prevent any loss of information should something unexpected occur You might also want to activate the AutoRecovery function Tools Options Load Save General Make sure Save AutoRecovery information every is selected and that you have entered a recovery frequency 148 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Formatting a presentation A new presentation contains only one empty slide In this section we will start adding new slides and preparing them for the intended contents Inserting slides This can be done in a variety of ways take your pick
32. are not discussed here Options Language Settings LibreOffice Load Save Languages Writing Aids Searching in Japanese This is where you make settings concerning language Asian Layout with LibreOffice Complex Text Layout Figure 41 Extra pages available when enhanced language support options are selected O Language Settings Choose spelling options To choose the options for checking spelling click Language Settings Writing Aids In the Options section of the page Figure 42 choose the settings that are useful for you Some considerations e If you do not want spelling checked while you type deselect Check spelling as you type and select Do not mark errors To find the second item scroll down in the Options list e If you use a custom dictionary that includes words in all upper case and words with numbers for example AS 400 select Check uppercase words and Check words with numbers 46 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 e Check special regions includes headers footers frames and tables when checking spelling Writing ards Available language modules User defined dictionaries Fa standard All oracle All soffice All IgnoreAllList AII Check grammar as you type Check uppercase words Check words with numbers Check capitalization ee eae Figure 42 Choosing languages dictionaries and options for checking spelling Here you can also check which user de
33. the arrow on the Drawing toolbar 5 You can now change the properties fill color line type and weight anchoring and others of the drawing object using either the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 288 or the choices and dialogs reached by right clicking on the drawing object Set or change properties for drawing objects To set the properties for a drawing object before you draw it 1 On the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 click the Select tool 2 On the Drawing Object Properties toolbar Figure 288 click on the icon for each property and select the value you want for that property 3 For more control or to define new attributes you can click on the Area or Line icons on the toolbar to display detailed dialogs 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Line 5 Line Color 9 To Foreground 13 Alignment 2 Arrow Style 6 Area 10 To Background 14 Change Anchor 3 Line Style 7 Area Style Filling 11 Bring to Front 15 Ungroup 4 Line Width 8 Rotate 12 Send to Back 16 Group Figure 288 Drawing Object Properties toolbar The default you set applies to the current document and session It is not retained when you close the document or close Writer and it does not apply to any other document you open The defaults apply to all the drawing objects except text objects To change the properties for an existing drawing object 1 Select the object 2 Continue as described above You can also specify the position and size
34. to send the entire document to the default printer defined for your computer You can change the action of the Print File Directly icon to send the document to the printer defined for the document instead of the default printer for the computer Go to Tools Options Load Save General and select the Load printer settings with the document option Controlling printing For more control over printing use the Print dialog File Print or Ctrl P LibreOffice Tae Tg an e Pa aiei Seng Slated Sude Chapter 20 Printing Expornine and E mailing Help Figure 263 The Print dialog General LibreOffice Writer Page Layout Printer Brother HL 5040 Fax Lexmark 1200 Series Microsoft XPS Document Writer POF Creator Details Range and copies All pages orgesis Comments None document only Number of copies 1 7 Collate A r 256 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The Print dialog has four tabs from which you can choose a range of options as described in the following sections The options selected on the Print dialog apply to this printing of this document only To specify default printing settings for LibreOffice go to Tools Options LibreOffice Print and Tools Options LibreOffice Writer Print See Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice for more details The different components of LibreOffice have different available print settin
35. you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View Comments Choose Tools Options User Data to enter the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color 190 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 gt LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter amp Getting Started with Base LibreOffice s Database Component Introduction A data source or database is a collection of pieces of information that can be accessed or managed by LibreOffice For example a list of names and addresses is a data source that could be used for producing a mail merge letter A shop stock list could be a data source managed through LibreOffice LibreOffice uses the terms Data Source and Database to refer to the same thing which could be a database such as MySQL or dBase or a spreadsheet or text document holding data This chapter covers creating a database showing what is contained in a database and how the different parts are used by LibreOffice It also covers using the Base component of LibreOffice to register other data sources A dat
36. zier curves This chapter introduces some of Draw s features but it does not attempt to cover all of them See the Draw Guide and the application Help for more information The Draw workspace The main components of the Draw workspace are shown in Figure 149 You can surround the drawing area with toolbars and information areas The number and position of the visible tools vary with the task in hand and user preferences Therefore your setup may look different For example many users put the main Drawing toolbar on the left hand side of the workspace not at the bottom as shown here You can split drawings in Draw over several pages Multipage drawings are used mainly for presentations The Pages pane on the left side of the Draw window in Figure 149 gives an overview of the pages that you create If the Pages pane is not visible on your setup you can enable it from the View menu View Page Pane 166 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 File Edit jgew Insert Format Tools Modify Window Help See O Blbe 2 828 4B x2G7 9 e 8O G Q Og Ba S Podm Mm sack c amp Colour isues _ c my Pages seres 4321 12345678 4 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 1 1 a i A7 16 15 141312111039 J e Li el mi m uw AO o m Fan fat DCA Layout Controls Dimension Lines f YJ o DB SO BeT e ur p e 0 H m MAARA G tz 9 03 10 20 o 00x0 00 S
37. 3 3 Creating a slide master Creating a new slide master is similar to modifying the default slide master To start enable editing of slide masters by View Master Slide Master Master View pall E Close Master View On the Master View toolbar click the New Master icon a A second slide master appears in the Slides pane Modify this slide master to suit your requirements It is also recommended that you rename this new slide master right click on the Slide in the Slides pane and select Rename master from the pop up menu When you are done close the Master View toolbar to return to normal slide editing mode Applying a slide master In the Tasks Pane be sure the Master Pages section is showing To apply one of the slide masters to all slides in your presentation click on it in the list To apply a different slide master to one or more selected slides 1 Inthe Slide Pane select the slides you want to change 2 Inthe Tasks Pane right click on the slide master you want to apply to the selected slides and click Apply to Selected Slides on the pop up menu Loading additional slide masters Sometimes in the same set of slides you may need to mix multiple slide masters that may belong to different templates For example you may need a completely different layout for the first slide of the presentation or you may want to add to your presentation a slide from a different presentation based on a template available on
38. Brackets Formats Others Figure 251 Right click menu Markup a a a b a b a cdot b a times b a b It a over b a div b ajb a cire b a wideslash b a widebslash b nega aandb aorb You can type the markup directly in the equation editor For example you can type 5 times 4 to obtain 5X4 If you know the markup this can be the fastest way to enter a formula Tip The formula markup resembles the way the formula reads in English Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 245 Below is a short list of common equations and their corresponding markup Display Command Display Command a b a b Ja sqrt a q a 2 a an J f x Ax int f x dx gt a suman a lt b a lt b o0 infinity axb a times b Xy x cdot y Greek characters Greek characters P y 0 and so on are common in mathematical formulas These characters are not available in the Elements window or on the right click menu Fortunately the markup for Greek characters is simple Type a sign followed the name of the character in English In localized versions of LibreOffice these names are localized e To write a lowercase character type the name of the character in lowercase e To write an uppercase character type the name of the character in uppercase See the table below for some examples Lowercase Uppercase alpha gt ALPHA JA beta Bf BETA gt B ga
39. Calc 101 F formula editor fax icon adding to toolbar 337 See equation editor 248 FDF 267 formula files opening 356 features formula layout 250 Calc 100 Free Software Foundation FSF 353 freeform line Draw 176 Index 361 function key shortcuts 349 Function Wizard Calc 101 G Gallery adding objects 283 creating anew theme 284 deleting images 283 deleting objects 283 hide show 282 inserting object as background 282 location 284 Opening 281 themes 282 views icon detailed 282 general options 29 geometric shapes Draw 178 gluepoints 177 GNU Linux system requirements 11 gradients 186 grammar checker 82 graphic files Opening 356 saving 358 graphic styles description 158 formatting text 153 graphics adding from file 278 adding to slides 157 linking 279 grid options 171 grid points 170 guiding lines 172 H handouts Impress 143 header different on right and left pages 69 headers and footers Calc 134 Help Agent 29 Help system 12 Help Tips 29 hidden objects 180 hiding and showing data Calc 127 high contrast 30 history of LibreOffice 352 HTML compatibility 43 HTML export 44 HTML Export Wizard 305 manual 88 icon size and style user interface 31 icons in menus 32 IDE 313 ignore font settings when importing HTML 44 image map 284 images adding from file 278 linking 279 scanned 281 importing files 355 importing numbers from an HTML page 44 Impress content boxes 150 features 138 font resizing 1
40. Charts Internet Sending documents as e mail attachments qvvvvvv yv epanneanenencanssennanee Secccscccccsscccssesees Browser Plug in MediaWiki Figure 43 Internet options showing E mail page available to Linux users MediaWiki Server URL Account Username Password M Save password Figure 44 Specifying a MediaWiki server account Controlling LibreOffice s AutoCorrect functions Some people find some or all of the items in LibreOffice s AutoCorrect function annoying because they change what you type when you do not want it changed Many people find some of the AutoCorrect functions quite helpful if you do then select the relevant options But if you find unexplained changes appearing in your document this is a good place to look to find the cause To open the AutoCorrect dialog click Tools AutoCorrect Options You need to have a document open for this menu item to appear In Writer this dialog has five tabs as shown in Figure 45 In other components of LibreOffice the dialog has only four tabs 48 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 AutoCorrect e A 4 Use replacement table i Correct TWo INitial CApitals Capitalize first letter of every sentence Automatic bold and _underline_ URL Recognition Replace dashes Delete spaces and tabs at beginning and end of paragraph Delete spaces and tabs at end and start of line Ignore double spaces Correct accidental use of cAPS LOC
41. Delete or use Save As and save the file with a different name Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 2 5 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork Introduction You can add graphic and image files including photos drawings scanned images and others to LibreOffice documents LibreOffice can import various vector line drawing and raster bitmap file formats The most commonly used graphic formats are GIF JPG PNG and BMP See Appendix B for a full list of the graphic formats LibreOffice can import Graphics in LibreOffice are of three basic types e Image files such as photos drawings and scanned images e Diagrams created using LibreOffice s drawing tools e Charts created using LibreOffice s Chart component This chapter covers images and diagrams More detailed descriptions on working with drawing tools can be found in the Draw Guide and Impress Guide Instructions on how to create charts are given in the Calc Guide Adding images to a document Images can be added to a document in several ways by inserting an image file directly from a graphics program or a scanner or from the LibreOffice Gallery Inserting an image file When the image is in a file stored on the computer you can insert it into an LibreOffice document using either of the following methods Drag and drop 1 Open a file browser window and locate the image you want to insert 2 Drag th
42. Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Importing a template If the template that you want to use is in a different location you must import it into an LibreOffice template folder To import a template into a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder into which you want to import the template 2 Click the Commands button and choose Import Template from the drop down menu A standard file browser window opens 3 Find and select the template that you want to import and click Open The file browser window closes and the template appears in the selected folder 4 If you want type a new name for the template and then press Enter Exporting a template To export a template from a template folder to another location 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to export A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to export 3 Click the Commands button and choose Export Template from the drop down menu The Save As window opens 4 Find the folder into which you want to export the template and click Save Examples of style use The following examples of common use of page and paragraph styles are taken from Writer There are many other ways to use styles see the guides for the various components for details
43. E EEE AAE E iE 265 Exporing O Oher TOMA sssaaa ar i iiien Tani 271 EANN GCU e e aaee en een ee Re eevee een eee ee ee ee rice er een ar eee eee 271 BIST NESTS C16 O dO UMO Snai 274 TO PET Oa 8 r ee ath eee ee ene ee nr oy eee On tee oer ere eee ee eer eee ee ee 275 Chapter 11 Graphics he Galery and FONONWOFK arses secsenccdeseaneccacaaeeessehastdsasineeemeesestapeieesiavienucdess 277 TEE EE E 118 ec eet EEA eee OEA A N AAEE AENA E E E A AE E ET 278 Adding images l0 dOCUMON l sserisiirssidisreinironsiridniarirnianis riiai diranai siriu dinini eaaa 278 Modifying and positioning graphiCsS e aaanenneanennnnnennennrnrnnnnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrrrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrrnrnrrrrrnrne 282 Managing the LibreOffice Gall fY irsisirsrisiisniian cennin kinna nEaN a ert oe en 282 a A WNT e E OEE T 284 LSI ONONE S Grawn TOOS sssi riaa En R ES E EAEI 286 Pea 9 i IE N TEA E IE EEE A OANA I S EE EEE EIES A IOA AAE AE 288 Chapter 12 erearnd VEF O Sre ee one een E E ee ee EE E EE 295 O e E E E E EE E ee Cerne ee reer 296 Relative and absolute hyperlinkS 00 n00000n00n0annannannnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnrnnrnnrnrrnrrnrrnnrnnrnnrnrnrnrrnrnrnrnrnene 296 ce T aE A E eter eee ene 296 Saving Writer documents as web DAU CS neg cco apsste cs ietz ecient ase isl sent diversidens aes 300 Creating web pages using GV IZAl Os sageiose cece tsteescauseenl eases sh agaiscaaekeasedapeesaadesededenteansessenieede 301 Saving Calc spreadsheets as WED PQQGeOS cscccscccc
44. Figure 246 Equation Editor Elements window and location of resulting equation Entering a formula The equation editor uses a markup language to represent formulas For example beta creates the Greek character beta This markup is designed to read similar to English whenever a possible For example a over b produces a fraction 5 242 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 You can enter a formula in three ways e Select a symbol from the Elements window e Right click on the equation editor and select the symbol from the context menu e Type markup in the equation editor The context menu and the Elements window insert the markup corresponding to a symbol This provides a convenient way to learn the Math markup Click on the document body to exit the formula editor Double click on a formula to enter the formula editor again The Elements window The simplest method for entering a formula is to use the Elements window Elements Ed ea asb aeA ffx 2a i 2 Ay gt Categories 4 a ta Fa na a b a b axb asb aab Symbols a b T a b a b avb Figure 247 Symbols are divided into categories The Elements window is divided into two main parts e The top shows the symbol categories Click on these to change the list of symbols e The bottom shows the symbols available in the current category Tip You can hide or show the Elements window with View Elements Example 1 5x4 For this example we wil
45. Gallery the files are not moved or copied only the location of each new object is added as a reference In a workgroup situation you may have access to a shared Gallery where you cannot change the contents unless authorized to do so and a user Gallery where you can add change or delete objects The location of the user Gallery is specified in Tools Options LibreOffice Paths You can change this location and you can copy your gallery files sdv to other computers Gallery contents provided with LibreOffice are stored in a different location You cannot change this location Creating an image map An image map defines areas of an image called hotspots with hyperlinks to web addresses other files on the computer or parts of the same document Hotspots are the graphic equivalent of text hyperlinks described in Chapter 12 Clicking on a hotspot causes LibreOffice to open the linked page in the appropriate program for example the default browser for an HTML page LibreOffice Calc for a ODS file a PDF viewer for a PDF file You can create hotspots of various shapes and include several hotspots in the same image To use the image map editor 1 In your LibreOffice document select the picture where you want to define the hotspots 2 Choose Edit ImageMap from the menu bar The ImageMap Editor Figure 286 opens 3 Use the tools and fields in the dialog described on the next page to define the hotspots and l
46. Guide for details Exporting graphics To save a Draw image in a format other than odg use File Export Draw can save to many graphic file formats as listed in Appendix B Background Information of this book You can export the entire file or selected objects You can also export Draw files to HTML PDF or Flash PDF export is the same as for any part of LibreOffice as described in Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing of this book Flash export creates a swf file HTML export uses a conversion wizard that creates as many web pages as there are pages in your Draw document You can optionally choose to display the pages in frames with a navigator and can set an index page For more information see Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files of this book Adding comments to a drawing Draw supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc Choose Insert Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the Draw page with a larger text box beside it Draw has automatically added your name and the date at the bottom of this text box Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 189 l 2 3 4 3 6 7 BE g 10 Il Jean Hollis Weber Today 03 44 Type or paste your comment into the text box You can optionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu
47. Guide regarding rotation when Edit Points mode is active To rotate an object or a group of objects drag the red corner handle point of the selection with the mouse The mouse cursor takes the shape of an arc of a circle with an arrow at each end A faded version of the object being rotated appears and the current angle of rotation is dynamically shown in the status bar Rotations are made around an axis which is displayed as a small symbol as shown in Figure 169 You can move the axis of rotation with the mouse If you hold down the Shift key during the rotation the operation will be carried out in increments of 157 i Figure 169 Rotating an object 182 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Inclination and perspective To slant or shear objects use the red handles located at the midpoint of an edge of the selected objects The mouse pointer changes to a when the pointer hovers over one of these midpoint handles Not every object can be slanted basic shapes can be rotated but not slanted The slant axis is the point directly opposite the midpoint handle to be used for shearing the object This point stays fixed in location the other sides and edges move in relation to it as the mouse is dragged make sure that the handle icon is showing before dragging As with rotation you can set the inclination slanting to occur in steps of 15 by pressing the Shift key while moving the handle Editing objects To chan
48. HAAA S ale E PitonyakUtil Cancel Readability RemoveFormatting Help Schedule ScriptBindingLibrar F Standard 0 Modulel Eg Recorded Template a Tools XrayDyn Description el HAE Figure 302 Select your macro and click Run There are other methods to run a macro For example use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the macro organizer which contains a Run button as well Another method is to use the macro organizer the dialog usually opens faster but the selection process may be slightly slower 312 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Viewing and editing the macro You can view and edit the macro that was just created Use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog See Figure 302 Select the new macro and click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Integrated Development Environment Listing 4 Generated EnterMyname macro Sub Main End Sub sub EnterMyName rem rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem
49. HSB Hue Saturation and Brightness values The upper right color window is linked directly with the color input fields in the lower area as you choose a color in the upper window the numbers change accordingly The two color fields at the lower right show the value of the selected color on the left and the currently set value from the color value fields on the right Modify the color components as required and click OK to exit the dialog The newly defined color now appears in the lower of the color preview boxes shown in Figure 26 Type a name for this color in the Name box then click the Add button A small box showing the new color is added to the Color table Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 35 Cyan Magenta E R H Hue Yellow Green 204 gt Saturation e Key nF Blue 355 H Brightness Figure 27 Editing colors Another way to define or alter colors is through the Colors page of the Area dialog where you can also save and load palettes a feature that is not possible here In Calc draw a temporary draw object and use the context menu of this object to open the Area dialog If you load a palette in one component of LibreOffice it is only active in that component the other components keep their own palettes Font options You can define replacements for any fonts that might appear in your documents If you receive from someone else a document containing fonts that you do not
50. Internet When you rest the mouse pointer on a hyperlink a help tip displays the absolute reference since LibreOffice uses absolute path names internally The complete path and address can only be seen when you view the result of the HTML export saving the spreadsheet as an HTML file by loading the HTML file as Text or by opening it with a text editor Creating hyperlinks When you type text Such as a website addresses or URL that can be used as a hyperlink and then press the spacebar or the Enter key LibreOffice automatically creates the hyperlink and applies formatting to the text usually a color and underlining If this does not happen you can 296 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 enable this feature using Tools AutoCorrect Options Options and selecting the URL Recognition option If you do not want LibreOffice to convert a specific URL to a hyperlink choose Edit Undo Insert from the menu bar or press Contro Z immediately after the formatting has been applied To change the color of hyperlinks go to Tools Options LibreOffice Appearance scroll to Unvisited links and or Visited links pick the new colors and click OK Caution this will change the color for all hyperlinks in all components of LibreOffice this may not be what you want In Writer and Calc but not Draw or Impress you can also change the Internet link character style or define and apply new styles to selected links You
51. Shift key and click in the last cell you want to fill and then choose Edit Fill and the direction in which you want to copy Up Down Left or Right Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 117 Choices that are not available are grayed out but you can still choose the opposite direction from what you intend which could cause you to overwrite cells accidentally A shortcut way to fill cells is to grab the handle in the lower right hand corner of the cell and drag it in the direction you want to fill If the cell contains a number the number will fill in series If the cell contains text the same text will fill in the direction you chose A Ciriginal A Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal 1 2 3 Al 5 Original 6 i 8 9 Ciriginal Ciriginal Ciriginal Original Figure 107 Using the Fill tool Using a fill series A more complex use of the Fill tool is to use a fill series December The default lists are for the full and abbreviated days of IT January the week and the months of the year but you can create 9 February your own lists as well 3 March To add a fill series to a spreadsheet select the cells to 4 April I fill choose Edit Fill Series In the Fill Series dialog 5 May E Figure 109 select AutoFill as the Series type and 6 June enter as the Start value an item from any defined series 7 duly The selected cells then fill in the other i
52. Style list After you have used a style at least once in a document the style name appears on the Apply Style list at the left hand end of the Formatting toolbar next to the Styles and Formatting icon You can open this list and click once on the style you want or you can use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list and then press Enter to apply the highlighted style Tp Select More at the bottom of the Apply Style list to open the Styles and Formatting window 54 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 File Edit View Insert Format fe om B Clear formatting Figure 47 The Apply Style list on the Formatting toolbar Using keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts for applying styles are predefined For example in Writer Contro 0O applies the Text body style Contro 1 applies the Heading 1 style and Contro 2 applies the Heading 2 style You can modify these shortcuts and create your own see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for instructions Modifying styles LibreOffice provides several ways to modify styles both the predefined styles and custom styles that you create e Changing a style using the Style dialog e Updating a style from a selection e Use AutoUpdate paragraph and frame styles only e Load or copy styles from another document or template Any changes you make to a style are effective only in the current document To change styles in more than one document you need to chan
53. The following items can be changed on a slide master e Background color gradient hatching or bitmap e Background objects for example add a logo or decorative graphics e Size placement and contents of header and footer elements to appear on every slide e Size and placement of default frames for slide titles and content Before working on the slide master make sure that the Styles and Formatting window is open To select the slide master for modification 1 Select View Master Slide Master from the menu bar This unlocks the properties of the slide master so you can edit it 2 Click Master Pages in the Tasks pane This gives you access to the pre packaged slide masters 3 Click on the slide master you want to modify among the ones available Figure 145 4 Make changes as required then click the Close Master View icon on the Master View toolbar For details see Chapter 2 of the Impress Guide 5 Save the file before continuing Any changes made to one slide when in Master View mode will appear on all slides using this slide master Always make sure you close Master View and return to Normal view before working on any of the presentation slides Select View A Normal from the menu bar or click Close Master View in the Master View toolbar to return to the normal slide view The changes made to one of the slides in Normal view for example changes to the bullet point style or the color of the title area and so o
54. You cannot delete template folders supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete template folders that you have created To delete a template folder that you have created 1 Inthe Template Management dialog select the folder that you want to delete 2 Click the Commands button and choose Delete from the drop down menu A message box appears and asks you to confirm the deletion Click Yes Moving a template To move a template from one template folder to another template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to move A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to move and drag it to the desired folder If you do not have the authority to delete templates from the source folder this action copies the template instead of moving it Deleting a template You cannot delete templates supplied with LibreOffice or installed using the Extension Manager you can only delete templates that you have created or imported To delete a template 1 Inthe Template Management dialog double click the folder that contains the template you want to delete A list of the templates contained in that folder appears underneath the folder name 2 Click the template that you want to delete Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 67 3 Click the Commands button and choose
55. an outline by using the buttons on the Bullets and Numbering toolbar Figure 77 You can move items up or down the list or create sub points and even change the style of bullets Use View Toolbars Bullets and Numbering to see the toolbar The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools Options LibreOffice View 86 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Bullets and Numbering a ee ae ee 1 3 45 67 8 1 Bullets On Off 6 Promote One Level with 2 Numbering On Off Subpoints 3 Numbering Off 7 Demote One Level with Subpoints 4 Promote One Level 5 Demote One Level Figure 77 Bullets and Numbering toolbar 9 Move Up Hyphenating words 8 Insert Unnumbered Entry 10 Move Down 11 Move Up with Subpoints 12 Move Down with Subpoints 13 Restart Numbering 14 Bullets and Numbering You have several choices regarding hyphenation let Writer do it automatically using its hyphenation dictionaries insert conditional hyohens manually where necessary or don t hyphenate at all Automatic hyphenation To turn automatic hyphenation of words on or off 1 Press F11 T on Mac to open the Styles and Formatting window 2 On the Paragraph Styles page Figure 78 right click on Default and select Modify 3 On the Paragraph Style dialog Figure 79 go to the Text Flow page 4 Under Hyphenation select or deselect the Automatically option
56. and close the query Since this query contains the ending odometer reading for our calculations name it End Reading when saving it Then close the query Step 6 Create the query to calculate the fuel economy 1 Click Create Query in Design View to open a new query 2 Add the Fuel table to the query just as you did in step 2 Add tables But do not close the Add Tables window 3 Add the End Reading query to this query a Click Queries to get the list of queries in the database Figure 225 b Click End Reading c Click Add and then click Close 228 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Add Table or Query C Tables Queries Figure 225 Selecting queries to add to another query Query _CD Collection Step 7 Add fields to the table at the bottom of the query We are going to calculate the fuel economy To do this we need the FuelQuantity and distance traveled Since the FuelQuantity we want to use is at the ending odometer reading we will use the End Reading query to get it We will also use the Odometer field from the Fuel table and End Reading query Fuel End Reading dr r FuellD FuellD Date Odometer FuelCost FuelQuantity Coal nannti Figure 226 Tables in this query 1 Double click Fue Quantity in the End Reading query 2 Double click Odometer in the End Reading query 3 Double click Odometer in the Fuel table IFuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End R
57. and maintained in an independent open forum also called standards organization using an open process What is OpenDocument OpenDocument ODF is an XML based file format for office documents text documents spreadsheets drawings presentations and more developed at OASIS http www oasis open org who an independent international standards group Unlike other file formats ODF is an open standard It is publicly available royalty free and without legal or other restrictions therefore ODF files are not tied to a specific office suite and anybody can build a program that interprets these files For this reason ODF Is quickly becoming the preferred file format for government agencies schools and other companies who prefer not to be too dependent on any one software supplier Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 353 LibreOffice saves documents in Open Document Format by default LibreOffice 3 has adopted version 1 2 of the OpenDocument standard LibreOffice can also open and save many other file formats see File formats LibreOffice can open on page 355 File formats LibreOffice can save to on page 357 and Exporting to other formats on page 358 OpenDocument filename extensions The most common filename extensions used for OpenDocument documents are odt for word processing text documents ods for spreadsheets odp for presentations odb for databases odg for graphics v
58. as extra cost add ins in other office suites like PDF export are free with LibreOffice There are no hidden charges now or in the future Open source You can distribute copy and modify the software as much as you wish in accordance with either of LibreOffice s Open Source licenses Cross platform LibreOffice runs on several hardware architectures and under multiple operating systems such as Microsoft Windows Mac OS X and Linux Extensive language support LibreOffice s user interface is available in over 40 languages and the LibreOffice project provides spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries in over 70 languages and dialects LibreOffice also provides support for both Complex Text Layout CTL and Right to Left RTL layout languages such as Urdu Hebrew and Arabic Consistent user interface All the components have a similar look and feel making them easy to use and master Integration The components of LibreOffice are well integrated with one another All the components share a common spelling checker and other tools which are used consistently across the suite For example the drawing tools available in Writer are also found in Calc with similar but enhanced versions in Impress and Draw You do not need to know which application was used to create a particular file For example you can open a Draw file from Writer Granularity Usually if you change an option it affects all components How
59. asb Figure 253 Tooltip indicates the a b asb a b Relations button Figure 254 After selecting Relations Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 247 Step 4 Click on the a b symbol The equation editor now shows the markup pi lt gt simeq lt gt Step 5 Delete the lt gt text and add 3 14159 at the end of the equation We end up with the markup pi simeq 3 14159 The result is shown in Figure 255 3 14159 asia Le e Figure 255 Final result Customizations Formula editor as a floating window The formula editor can cover a large part of the Writer window To turn the formula editor into a floating window do this 1 Hover the mouse over the editor frame as shown in Figure 256 2 Hold down the Control key and double click e Figure 256 Hold down the Control key and double click on the border of the formula editor to turn it into a floating window Figure 257 shows the result You can dock the floating window again by using the same steps Hold down the Control key and double click the window frame Commands Figure 257 Formula editor as a floating window 248 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 How can I make a formula bigger This is one of the most common questions people ask about Math The answer is simple 1 Start the formula editor and choose Format Font size Untitled 1 OpenOffice org Writer File Edit V
60. ators nE EEEE EAE E E E i asa 345 EEPE E 118 E AEII E E AA O E E AEAEE PAE O OA E VE A AEE eee A 346 General keyboard SOM CUTS estates tencican asnscccensesecemuddadoceanteesseunaeaienidetecanwesseuendaudeasantearbeneaetaace 347 Delning keyboard cs 6 0 4 5 0 ae ee eee ene ae eee ere ene em E ae aetna eee eee eee eee ener 349 E ULE E mente ene eee eee eet an nee een A A vette eee Coes ee Tne ete ener eee V ee eee 349 Appendix B Open Source Open Standards ONC HDO CUM GN isinisiceninsasranncnnnstanseniawebstansaeaenainvessieaweesaeraeree 354 E a E E E E E R 352 A Short history of MM 6 oO o a re eae ne ee men eee eee eke mee ea a meyer erica tert eee ree Mee eee 352 THe ODEON COMITI 1k Seem ee i n ee ee eee ar a ira aa 352 How is LibreOffice licensed erisir ee tee mer een ner E ree nE eee rene nee aes eae erie eee 353 Wa O OCE one Ee 353 W A a a EES 353 Anan S OPEN DOC CUME ii E E ey Oey ee heer 353 Freouoniy asked QUES TON S oreta eer Se ae eee eee ene eer 2 eee er eterna ere nee eRe reer 354 File formats LibreOffice can ODO apes caccwsscriemnepinnacanentnigntunsniabedseesaarinhessamegnoeieenahaigeaiaeddvanseswests 355 File formats LibreOffice can save 10 ss dacinansessanesstncaniadesesadannsancsteasentasssiehicudetdussaedactacaneseanaaadans 357 ExpOrn DO TO Olid m6 les tr ca ee eee een EAT EE EE E E DEE EERE EE EER eee 358 E E E AEEA EE EAA E AE E ean 359 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 7 Note for Mac users Some ke
61. available options by default only a subset of these options is shown On the Formatting toolbar you have a large choice of options for customizing your object These choices are the same as the ones for other drawing objects For more information see the Draw Guide Line options Line icon Opens a dialog with three tabs Line Line Styles Arrow Styles Use the Line tab to edit the most common properties of the line around the selected Fontwork object by choosing from previously defined attributes including line style line color and arrow styles Use the Lines Styles and Arrow Styles tabs to edit the properties of line and arrow styles and define new styles Arrow Style icon Choose from the different arrow styles Line Style box Choose from the available line styles Line Width box Set the width of the line Line Color box Select the color of the line Area options Area icon Opens a dialog with seven tabs Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps e Area tab Choose from the predefined list a color bitmap gradient or hatching pattern to fill the selected object e Shadow tab Set the shadow properties of the selected object e Transparency tab Set the transparency properties of the selected object e Colors tab Modify the available colors or add new ones to appear on the Area tab Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 291 e Gradients tab Modify the available gradients or add new one
62. circle was made transparent in order to see the square Arranging objects In a complex drawing several objects may be stacked on top of one another To rearrange the stacking order move an object to the front or to the back of the stack select the object choose Modify Arrange and choose Bring Forward or Send Backward Or right click the object choose Arrange from the context menu then choose Bring Forward or Send Backward These options are also available from the Arrange tear off toolbar from the it button on the Drawing toolbar A keyboard shortcut is Shift Ctrl plus sign to bring an object to the top and Shift Ctrl minus to send an object to the bottom Draw also provides tools for aligning multiple objects details are given in the Draw Guide Selecting several objects To select or deselect several objects one by one press the Shift key and click on the various objects to be selected or deselected One click on an object selects it a second click on the same object deselects it Moving and dynamically adjusting an object s size There are several ways of moving or changing the size of an object The dynamic method described here uses the mouse When you dynamically change an object remember to check the left hand area of the status bar at the bottom of the Draw window This area shows detailed information about the ongoing manipulation This information changes when the mouse is moved Dynamic movement of obj
63. document If you are working on a previously unsaved file the shortcut launches the Save As dialog Ctrl N Creates a new document Shift Ctrl N Opens the Templates and Documents dialog Ctrl P Opens the Print dialog to print the document Ctrl Q Closes the application Del In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or folders Items can be retrieved from the Recycle Bin Trash In the Save and Open dialogs deletes the selected files or folders Shift Del Items are permanently deleted they can not be retrieved from the Recycle Bin In the Save and Open dialogs shows contents of the current Backspace directory s parent folder Navigating across LibreOffice Shortcut Keys Result F6 Selects next subwindow for example Menu bar Standard toolbar document view and so on Shift F6 Selects previous subwindow F10 Selects the first menu typically the File menu Shift F10 Opens the context menu Editing Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl X Cuts selected items Ctrl C Copies selected items Ctrl V Pastes copied or cut items from the clipboard Ctrl Shift V Opens the Paste Special dialog Ctrl A Selects all Ctrl Z Undoes last action Ctrl Y Redoes last action Ctrl Shift Y Repeats last command 348 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl F Opens the Find amp Replace dialog Ctrl Shift F Searches for the last entered search term Ct
64. drag and select the number of rows and columns for your table Insert Table Number of columns Number of rows Help OR Cancel i a Figure 144 Creating a table with the Insert Table dialog Selecting from any of the styles in the Table Design section of the Tasks pane creates a table based on that style If you create a table by another method you can still apply a style of your choice later With the table selected the Table toolbar should appear If it does not you can access it by selecting View Toolbars Table The Table toolbar offers many of the same buttons as the table toolbar in Writer with the exception of functions like Sort and Sum for performing calculations For those functions you need to use a spreadsheet inserted from Calc discussed below After the table is created you can modify it in much the same ways as you would modify a table in Writer adding and deleting rows and columns adjusting width and spacing adding borders background colors and so on Detailed information on working with tables and the Table Properties dialog can be found in Chapter 9 of the Writer Guide By modifying the style of the table from the Table Design section of the Tasks pane you can quickly change the appearance of the table or any newly created tables based on the Style options you select You can choose to add emphasis to a header and total row as well as the first and last columns of the table and appl
65. files It also connects to your email client Calc spreadsheet Calc has all of the advanced analysis charting and decision making features expected froma high end spreadsheet It includes over 300 functions for financial statistical and mathematical operations among others The Scenario Manager provides what if analysis Calc generates 2 D and 3 D charts which can be integrated into other LibreOffice documents You can also open and work with Microsoft Excel workbooks and save them in Excel format Calc can export spreadsheets to Adobe s PDF and to HTML Impress presentations Impress provides all the common multimedia presentation tools such as special effects animation and drawing tools It is integrated with the advanced graphics capabilities of LibreOffice s Draw and Math components Slide shows can be further enhanced with Fontwork s special effects text as well as sound and video clips Impress is compatible with Microsofts PowerPoint file format and can also save your work in numerous graphics formats including Macromedia Flash SWF Draw vector graphics Draw is a vector drawing tool that can produce everything from simple diagrams or flowcharts to 3 D artwork Its Smart Connectors feature allows you to define your own connection points You can use Draw to create drawings for use in any of LibreOffice s other components and you can create your own clip art and add it to the Gallery Draw can import graphi
66. font resizing Impress has convenient buttons on the Formatting toolbar to increase or decrease font size of selected text A Ua The amount by which the font size changes depends on the standard sizes available for the font in use Pasting text You can insert text into a text box by copying it from another document and pasting it into Impress However the pasted text will probably not match the formatting of the surrounding text or that of the other slides in the presentation This may be what you want on some occasions however in most cases you want to make sure that the presentation does not become a patchwork of different paragraph styles font types bullet points and so on There are several ways to ensure consistency these methods are explained below Pasting unformatted text It is normally good practice to paste text without formatting and apply the formatting later To paste without formatting either press Control Shift V and then select Unformatted text from the dialog that appears or click on the small black triangle next to the paste symbol in the standard toolbar GS and select Unformatted text The unformatted text will be formatted with the outline style at the cursor position in an AutoLayout text box or with the default graphic style in a normal text box Formatting pasted text If you are pasting the text into an AutoLayout area you need to apply the appropriate outline style to the text to give it the same look and fee
67. for saving the template The default location is your user templates directory but you can choose a different location if you prefer 4 Finally you have the option of creating a new document from your template immediately or manually changing the template For future documents you can re use the template created by the wizard just as you would use any other template 62 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 EA Edit View Inset Format Table Tools Extensions A New Jan Sx Open Ctrl 0 5 i Liberation Sans A Recent Documents Wizards H Save Cis fo Agenda Fe SaveAs Ctrl Shift S 3 Presentation Save All E fo Web Page os Reload TER i Document Converter i Euro Converter ee Export Export as PDF i Address Data Source Figure 55 Creating a template using a wizard Editing a template You can edit a template s styles and content and then if you wish you can reapply the template s styles to documents that were created from that template Note that you can only reapply styles You cannot reapply content To edit a template 1 From the main menu choose File Templates Edit A standard file browser window opens 2 Select the template that you want to edit 3 Edit the template just as you would any other document To save your changes choose File Save from the main menu Updating a document from a changed template The next time you open a document that
68. form click either the Next Record icon or the New Record icon The number in the Record box is the number of the record whose data Is shown in the form If you know the number of the record you want you can enter it into the record box and then press Enter to take you to that record Figure 217 is arecord with data inserted in its fields Friday May 25 2007 16 00 14 692 704 2 Kevin Friday May 25 2007 7 00 6 428 778 7 Dan Figure 217 Sample record of the Vacation form and subform Creating queries Queries are used to get specific information from a database Query results are special tables within the database To demonstrate the use of queries we will use two different methods e Using our CD Collection table we will create a list of albums by a particular artist We will do this using the Wizard e The information we might want from the Fuel table includes what our fuel economy is We will do this using the Design View Queries that require calculations are best created with the Design view Using the Wizard to create a query Queries created by the wizard provide a list or lists of information based upon what one wants to know It is possible to obtain a single answer or multiple answers depending upon the circumstances In the main database window Figure 175 click the Queries icon in the Databases section then in the Tasks section click Use Wizard to Create Query The Query Wizard window opens
69. grid color In the Drawing Presentation section you can change the color of the grid points On the Color Settings pulldown menu select a more suitable visible color for example black Positioning objects with guiding lines To simplify the positioning of objects it is possible to make visible guiding lines extensions of the edges of the object while it is being moved These guiding lines have no snap function The guiding lines can be activated or deactivated under Tools Options LibreOffice Draw View Guides when moving or by clicking on the icon on the Options toolbar The basic drawing shapes Draw provides a wide range of shapes located in palettes accessed from the Drawing Toolbar This section describes only a few of the basic shapes These shapes include rectangles and squares circles ellipses and arcs 3D objects curves lines and arrows text and connectors All shapes in Draw are called objects See the Draw Guide for a complete description of the shapes available When you draw a basic shape or select one for editing the nfo field at the left side in the status bar changes to reflect the present action Line created Text frame xxyy selected and so on 172 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Figure 159 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons needed in the following sections The Text icon is also included gt m T ur Figure 159 Part of the Drawing toolbar Drawin
70. icon on the formatting toolbar and select one of the border options displayed in the palette To quickly choose a line style and color for the borders of a cell click the small arrows next to the Line Style and Line Color icons on the Formatting toolbar In each case a palette of choices is displayed For more controls including the spacing between the cell borders and the text use the Borders tab of the Format Cells dialog There you can also define a shadow See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details The cell border properties apply to a cell and can only be changed if you are editing that cell For example if cell C3 has a top border which would be equivalent visually to a bottom border on C2 that border can only be removed by selecting C3 It cannot be removed in C2 Formatting the cell background To quickly choose a background color for a cell click the small arrow next to the Background Color icon on the Formatting toolbar A palette of color choices similar to the Font Color palette is displayed To define custom colors use Tools Options LibreOffice Colors See Chapter 2 for more information You can also use the Background tab of the Format Cells dialog See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Calc Guide for details Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 125 Autoformatting cells and sheets You can use the AutoFormat feature to quickly app
71. image into the document 5 Release the mouse button Deleting images from the Gallery To delete an image from a theme that you created 1 Right click on the name of the image file or its thumbnail in the Gallery 2 Click Delete on the pop up menu A message appears asking if you want to delete this object Click Yes Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 283 Deleting the name of a file from the list in the Gallery does not delete the file from the hard disk or other location Adding a new theme to the Gallery To add a new theme to the Gallery 1 Click the New Theme button above the list of themes Figure 285 2 Inthe Properties of New Theme dialog click the General tab and type a name for the new theme 3 Click the Files tab and add images to the theme as described earlier Deleting a theme from the Gallery You can delete only theme that you have added to the Gallery you cannot delete any of the inbuilt themes To delete a theme from the Gallery 1 Go to Tools Gallery 2 Inthe left part of the Gallery select in the list the theme you wish to delete 3 Right click on the theme then click Delete on the pop up menu Location of the Gallery and the objects in it Graphics and other objects shown in the Gallery can be located anywhere on your computer s hard disk on a network drive or on a CD ROM Listings in the Gallery refer to the location of each object When you add graphics to the
72. in high contrast if your computer s operating system supports this choose one of the high contrast style sheets from the pull down list High contrast style Visual effect Default Black text on white background High Contrast 1 Yellow text on black background High Contrast 2 Green text on black background High Contrast Black White text on black background High Contrast White Black text on white background Open Save dialogs Use LibraOffice dialogs To use the standard Open and Save dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use LibreOffice dialogs option When this option is selected the Open and Save dialogs supplied with LibreOffice will be used See Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice for more about the LibreOffice Open and Save dialogs This book uses the LibreOffice Open and Save dialogs in illustrations Open Save dialogs Show ODMA DMS dialogs first Windows only If you have the GroupWise client installed on the computer you can select this option to have LibreOffice org offer to open documents from GroupWise or save documents in GroupWise If the GroupWise client is not installed this option has no effect Print dialogs Use LibraOffice dialogs Mac only To use the standard Print dialogs for your operating system deselect the Use LibreOffice dialogs option When this option is selected the Print dialogs supplied with LibreOffice will be used This book uses the LibreOffice Print dialogs in i
73. list Close the Properties dialog Select the other labels in the same way and then change their background color 3 To change the font color for the headings a Open Styles and Formatting using the F11 key Make sure the Paragraph icon is selected at the left end of the icons in Error Reference source not found AaOOS at Complimentary close Default First line indent Hanging indent Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Se Figure 206 Styles and Formating window Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 215 b Right click the Heading 2 style to open a pop up window and select Modify from this menu c Inthe Paragraph Style Heading 2 dialog click the Font Effects tab Change Font color from Automatic to Light Cyan d Click OK to close the dialog Learning how to use styles can be very helpful at times By using styles we changed the font color for all three headings at one time There are other methods of changing the font color but they require repeating the same steps for each heading 4 To add a graphic to the background a Right click on the background and select Page from the pop up menu b Onthe Page Style dialog click the Background tab change the As dropdown list from Color to Graphic c Click Browse to find and select the graphic file you want to use and click Open In the Type section of the Background tab select Area d Click OK to close the dialog The
74. load the library and the modules it contains double click on the library Where are macros stored LibreOffice stores user specific data in a directory under the user s home directory The location is operating system specific Use Tools Options LibreOffice Paths to view where other configuration data is stored On Windows XP this is C Documents and Settings lt name gt Application Data User macros are stored in LibreOffice 3 user basic Each library is stored in its own directory off the basic directory It is not important to understand where macros are stored for casual use If you Know where they are stored however you can create a backup share your macros or inspect them if there is an error Use Tools Macros Organize Dialogs to open the LibreOffice Macro Organizer dialog Another common way to open this dialog is to use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Macros dialog and then click the Organizer button Modules Dialogs Libraries Location My Macros amp Dialogs Library ChangeStyles DBUtil MacroFormatterA a OOoAuthorForma New Pitonyak r PitonyakDatabas Import PitonyakDialogs PitonyakUtil RemoveFormatti Standard Figure 306 The macro organizer dialog Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 321 Importing macros The LibreOffice Macro Organizer dialog provides functionality to create dele
75. lt All formats gt Type Graphic Update Figure 283 The Edit Links dialog Inserting an image from the clipboard Using the clipboard you can copy images into an LibreOffice document from another LibreOffice document and from other programs To do this 1 Open both the source document and the target document 2 Inthe source document select the image to be copied 3 Move the mouse pointer over the selected image and press Contro C to copy the image to the clipboard 4 Switch to the target document 5 Click to place the cursor where the graphic is to be inserted 6 Press Control V to insert the image If the application from which the graphic was copied is closed before the graphic is A pasted into the target the image stored on the clipboard could be lost 280 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Inserting an image using a scanner If a scanner is connected to your computer LibreOffice can call the scanning application and inserted the scanned item into the LibreOffice document as an image To start this procedure place the cursor where you want the graphic to be inserted and chooe Insert Picture Scan Select Source Although this practice is quick and easy it is unlikely to result in a high quality image of the correct size You may get better results by scanned material into a graphics program and cleaning it up there before inserting the resulting image into LibreOffice Inserting an image fr
76. new sheet at that point without opening the Insert Sheet dialog Use one of the other methods to insert more than one sheet to rename the sheet at the same time or to insert the sheet somewhere else in the sequence The first step for these methods is to select the sheet that the new sheet will be inserted next to Then use any of the following options e Choose Insert Sheet from the menu bar e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Insert Sheet e Click in an empty space at the end of the line of sheet tabs Click here to insert a new sheet Click here to insert a new sheet without opening the Insert Sheet and open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 99 Creating a new sheet Each method will open the Insert Sheet dialog Figure 100 Here you can select whether the new sheet is to go before or after the selected sheet and how many sheets you want to insert If you are inserting only one sheet there is the opportunity to give the sheet a name Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 111 Insert Sheet as Position Before current sheet C After current sheet Cancel New sheet Mo of sheets 1 Mame Sheet 0 From file Figure 100 Insert Sheet dialog Deleting sheets Sheets can be deleted individually or in groups Single sheet Right click on the tab of the sheet you want to delete and choose Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or chose Edit Sheet Delete from the menu bar Multiple she
77. on objects or page edges This function is known as Snap The snap function is easier to work with at the highest practical zoom value You can use two different snap functions at the same time for example snapping to a guide line and to the page edge It is best however to activate only those functions that you really need This section Summaries the snap to grid function For more detailed information about the snap functions see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Snap to grid Use this function to move an object exactly to a grid point See Figure 156 This function can be switched on and off with View Grid Snap to Grid and on the Options toolbar with the icon Figure 156 Exact positioning with snap to grid 170 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Showing the grid To make the grid visible choose View Grid Display Grid Alternatively turn the grid on or off with the icon on the Options toolbar Configuring the grid The color spacing and resolution of the grid points can be individually chosen for each axis The spacing between the lines is defined in the Grid options dialog Tools Options LibreOffice Draw Grid Grid Snap to grid Resolution Horizontal Vertical _ Synchronize axes Snap To snap lines To the page margins L To object frame L To object points Snap range Subdivision 0 50
78. online Check for Updates Figure 322 Using the Extension Manager To install a shared extension you will need write access to the LibreOffice installation directory Some popular extensions This section describes a few of the more popular extensions to LibreOffice Some are installed by default If the extension is not already installed on your system see Installing extensions in the previous section for step by step instructions All tools listed here are open source and free of charge PDF Import Enables you to make minor modifications to the text of existing PDF files when the original source files do not exist or you are unable to open the source files Whenever possible modify the source and regenerate the PDF to obtain the best results When the extension is installed PDF is listed as a choice in the File Type drop down list in the File Open dialog Best results can be achieved with the PDF ODF hybrid file format which this extension also enables A hybrid PDF ODF file is a PDF file that contains an embedded ODF source file Hybrid PDF ODF files will be opened in LibreOffice as an ODF file without any layout changes Non hybrid PDF documents open in Draw Depending on the complexity of the layout changes may be easy or difficult to make and the saved result may or may not preserve the original layout Font substitution may occur Documents with more sophisticated layouts such as those created with pr
79. presentation 7 Choose the navigation button style to use to move from one page to another If you do not choose any LibreOffice will create a text navigator HTML Export m lma re bec Ri Select button style E Text only 4 40 09 OM FHA Wt 8 Select the color scheme for the web pages Available schemes include the document s existing scheme one based upon browser colors and a completely user defined scheme You can save a new scheme so that it will appear on the first page of the HTML export wizard Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 307 HTML Export Select color scheme Apply color scheme from document Use browser colors Use custom color scheme Hyperlink Hyperlink Active Link Active link Visited link Visited Link ait 9 Click Create to generate the HTML files If this is a new design a small dialog pops up If you might want to reuse this design you can give it aname and save it Otherwise click Do Not Save Name HTML Design Do Not Save Saving Draw documents as web pages Exporting drawings from LibreOffice s Draw application is similar to exporting a presentation from Impress Choose File Export and select HTML Document as the file type When using the wizard you can choose to create the web page at any time by clicking the Create button 308 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 13 Ge
80. right that contains data e Page Down moves the display down one complete screen and Page Up moves the display up One complete screen e Combinations of Control and Alt with Home End Page Down Page Up and the cursor keys move the focus of the current cell in other ways See the Help or Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts in the Calc Guide for details Tip Use one of the four A ttArrow key combinations to resize a cell Customizing the Enter key You can customize the direction in which the Enter key moves the focus by selecting Tools Options LibreOffice Calc General The four choices for the direction of the Enter key are shown on the right hand side of Figure 96 It can move the focus down right up or left Depending on the file being used or on the type of data being entered setting a different direction can be useful The Enter key can also be used to switch into and out of editing mode Use the first two options under nput settings in Figure 96 to change the Enter key settings Input settings Press Enter to move selection L Press Enter to switch to edit mode Expand formatting V Expand references when new columns rows are inserted Figure 96 Customizing the effect of the Enter key Moving from sheet to sheet Each sheet in a spreadsheet is independent of the others though they can be linked with references from one sheet to another There are three ways to navigate between different s
81. row changes from lt AutoField gt to 0 b Enter Kevin in the second row The PaymentID changes to 1 c Enter Cash in the third row The PaymentID changes to 2 2 Save and close the table window You can also use the Enter key to move from entry field to entry field or use the down arrow key to move from row to row Defining relationships Now that the tables have been created what are the relationships between our tables This is the time to define them based upon the questions we asked and answered in the beginning When on vacation we want to enter all of our expenses all at one time each day Most of these expenses are in the Vacations table but the fuel we buy is not So we will relate these two tables using the Date fields Since the Fuel table may have more than one entry per date this relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables is one to many It is designated 1 n The Vacations table also contains several fields for the type of payment used For each field listing the payment type there is only one entry from the Payment Type table This is a one to one relationship one field in one table to one entry from the other table It is designated 1 1 Other tables also contain fields for the type of payment The relationship between the fields of those tables and the Payment Type table are also 1 1 Since the Payment Type table only provides a static list we will not be defining a relationship between the Payment T
82. shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic Next Bookmark or Continue search forward For more uses of the Navigator in Writer see the Writer Guide Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 75 Working with documents Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice includes instructions on starting new documents opening existing documents and saving documents Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates covers how to create a document from a template Saving as a Microsoft Word file If you need to exchange files with users of Microsoft Word they may not know how to open and save odt files Microsoft Word 2007 with Service Pack 2 SP2 can do this Users of Word 2003 XP and 2000 can buy a plug in from Oracle Corp or search on the Web for the free OpenDocument Format ODF plugin from Sun Microsystems Some users of Microsoft Word may be unwilling or unable to receive odt files Their employer may not allow them to install the plug in In this case you can save a document as a Microsoft Word file 1 Important First save your document in the file format used by LibreOffice Writer odt If you do not any changes you made since the last time you saved will appear only in the Microsoft Word version of the document 2 Then choose File Save As On the Save As dialog in the File type or Save as type drop down menu select the type of Word format you need Click Save a p rr _ 5
83. stored on your computer as a combination of a private key which must be kept secret and a public key which you add to your documents when you sign them You can get a certificate from a certification authority which may be a private company or a governmental institution When you apply a digital signature to a document a kind of checksum is computed from the document s content plus your personal key The checksum and your public key are stored together with the document When someone later opens the document on any computer with a recent version of LibreOffice the program will compute the checksum again and compare it with the stored checksum If both are the same the program will signal that you see the original unchanged document In addition the program can show you the public key information from the certificate You can compare the public key with the public key that is published on the web site of the certificate authority Whenever someone changes something in the document this change breaks the digital signature On Windows operating systems the Windows features of validating a signature are used On Solaris and Linux systems files that are supplied by Thunderbird Mozilla or Firefox are used For a more detailed description of how to get and manage a certificate and signature validation see About Digital Signatures in the LibreOffice Help To sign a document 1 Choose File Digital Signatures 274 Getting Star
84. sum integral The sum and int commands can optionally take the parameters from and to These are used for lower and upper limits respectively These parameters can be used singly or together Limits for integrals are usually treated as subscripts and superscripts Markup Result n sum from k 1 tonak a k 1 int from to x f t dt or J fdt or f feat int_0 x f t dt 250 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Markup Result int from Re f ys R sum to infinity 24 n yo Note For more details on integrals and sums see the Math Guide Brackets with matrices For background we start with an overview of the matrix command Markup Result matrix a b c d a C Note Rows are separated by two s and entries within each row are separated by one The first problem people have with matrices is that brackets do not scale with the matrix Markup Result a b matrix a b c d 7 C Math provides scalable brackets That is the brackets grow in size to match the size of their contents Use the commands left and right to make scalable brackets Markup Result a b c d Tip Use eft and right to obtain square brackets How do make a derivative Making derivatives essentially comes down to one trick Tell Math it s a fraction left matrix a b c d right In other words you have to use the over command Combine this
85. template 60 creating a document 20 cross fading 187 cross references inserting references 97 overview 96 CSV file open 103 save 104 CSV files 103 104 Index 359 Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks 38 curves Draw 176 custom dictionary 46 Customize dialog 324 customizing keyboard shortcuts 339 menus 332 toolbars 335 cut and paste 78 D dashes 80 data editing Calc changing data in a cell 122 removing data from a cell 121 replacing all data in a cell 122 data entry Calc dates and times 117 fill series 118 Fill tool 117 numbers 116 numbers as text 116 selection lists 120 sharing content 120 speeding up 117 text 116 validating cell contents 121 data source description 192 editing 219 linking 217 registering 217 using in OOo documents 219 viewing 218 data validity 121 database AutoValue 199 creating 193 creating tables 194 field types and formats 196 list table 202 planning 193 primary key 195 197 199 registering 218 Report Wizard 233 Table Wizard 195 tables 194 database form activation order 216 background 215 creating in Design View 217 creating using a Wizard 204 entering data 222 modifying 207 subform 205 tab order 216 database reports creating 232 modifying 237 static 232 database table create using wizard 195 dynamic 235 joined fields 206 relationships 202 DataPilot Tools 343 date conversion automatic 117 default file format 42 default formatting 153 161 default tem
86. the File Templates menu in Writer that allow you to assign a new template to the current document or to a folder of documents All styles and formatting will be loaded from that template and the document will behave as it was created using that template Solver for Nonlinear Programming for Calc Calc ships with a solver engine for linear programming only This extension adds more solvers which are capable of handling nonlinear problems as well as linear ones e DEPS Differential Evolution amp Particle Swarm Optimization e SCO Social Cognitive Optimization DataPilot Tools for Calc Adds some utility functions that make using the Calc DataPilot easier e Display the current source range for a DataPilot e Change the source range for a DataPilot e Refresh all DataPilots on the current sheet Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 343 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts Introduction You can use LibreOffice without requiring a pointing device such as a mouse or touchpad by using its built in keyboard shortcuts This appendix lists some of the most common built in keyboard shortcuts that apply to all components of LibreOffice For shortcuts specific to Writer Calc Impress Draw or Base read the relevant component guide or search the application Help Some of the shortcuts listed here may not work if your operating system uses the same shortcuts for other tasks To resolve any conflicts a
87. the cell The font size of the data in a cell can automatically adjust to fit in a cell To do this select the Shrink to fit cell size option in the Format Cells dialog Figure 113 Figure 116 shows the results The quick brown fox jumps over the lazy dog The qik brwi tupamps wer the Bedog a 7 i ha Figure 116 Shrinking font size to fit cells Formatting numbers Several different number formats can be applied to cells by using icons on the Formatting toolbar Select the cell then click the relevant icon ah SA eta 48 Boo Figure 117 Number format icons Left to right currency percentage date exponential Standard add decimal place delete decimal place For more control or to select other number formats use the Numbers tab Figure 118 of the Format Cells dialog e Apply any of the data types in the Category list to the data e Control the number of decimal places and leading zeros e Enter a custom format code The Language setting controls the local settings for the different formats such as the date order and the currency marker Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Language Al English UK Options Decimal places 2 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 Bs Thousands separator Format code 70 00 RED 0 00 Us
88. the comment the author s name and a time stamp indicating when the comment was created Figure 83 shows an example of text with comments from two different authors 92 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Note sample riter document has been vastly improved in ri OOo notes are now displayed at the side of ae sak fn pe i tl cm ei a a et ty is Ses eee ichele Zarri user who created them To insert a note in Yesterday 23 34 1 the text the note refers to and select s he anchor point ofthe note is connected by Cello Suite 1 de ofthe page where you can type your BWV1007 attem the author of the note as well as a Prelude created lt ref gt shows an example of text Allemande Minuets configure the name you want to appear in Sarabande it courante nt each author will be alitomatically Gigue Johan Sebastian Bach Today 23 37 Figure 83 Example of comments Choose Tools Options User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Right clicking on a comment pops up a menu where you can delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document From this menu you can also apply some basic formatting to the text of the comment You can also change the font type size and alignment from the main menu To na
89. the current document as well The HTML filter Supports CSS2 Cascading Style Sheets Level 2 for printing documents These capabilities are only effective if print layout export is activated Export Copy local graphics to Internet Select this option to automatically upload the embedded pictures to the Internet server when uploading using FTP Export Character set Select the appropriate character set for the export Choosing language settings There are several options to customize the language setting in LibreOffice e Install the required dictionaries e Change some locale and language settings e Choose spelling options Install the required dictionaries LibreOffice automatically installs several dictionaries with the program To add other dictionaries be sure you are connected to the Internet and then use Tools Language More Dictionaries Online LibreOffice will open your default web browser to a page containing links to additional dictionaries that you can install Follow the prompts to select and install the ones you want Change locale and language settings You can change some details of the locale and language settings that LibreOffice uses for all documents or for specific documents In the Options dialog click Language Settings Languages Options Language Settings LibreOffice Load Save Languages Writing Aids LibreOffice Writer This is where you make settings concerning language
90. the left in Figure 17 Closing this window leaves the other LibreOffice windows open If only one LibreOffice window is open it looks like the sample shown on the right in Figure 17 Notice the small x below the large X Clicking the small x closes the document but leaves LibreOffice open Clicking the large X closes LibreOffice completely If the document has not been saved since the last change a message box is displayed Choose whether to save or discard your changes e Save The document is saved and then closed e Discard The document is closed and all modifications since the last save are lost e Cancel Nothing happens and you return to the document Not saving your document could result in the loss of recently made changes or worse still your entire file Closing LibreOffice To close LibreOffice completely choose File Exit or close the last open document as described in Closing a document above If all the documents have been saved LibreOffice closes immediately If any documents have been modified but not saved a warning message appears Follow the procedure in Closing a document to save or discard your changes Using LibreOffice on a Mac Some keystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The table on page 8 gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this book For a more detailed list see the application Help 26 Getting Started wi
91. the one in Tools Options Language Settings Writing Aids described in Chapter 2 There you can choose whether to check uppercase words and words with numbers and you can manage custom dictionaries that is add or delete dictionaries and add or delete words in a dictionary e On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can set paragraphs to be checked ina specific language different from the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for more information Writer does not include a grammar checker but you can install an extension such as Language Tool and access it from Tools Spelling and Grammar See Chapter 14 for more about installing extensions Language Tool adds a new menu item and submenu to the Tools menu from which you can configure the tool and check or recheck the document Using built in language tools Writer provides some tools that make your work easier if you mix multiple languages within the same document or if you write documents in various languages The main advantage of changing the language is that you can then use the correct dictionaries to check spelling and apply the localized versions of Autocorrect replacement tables thesaurus and hyphenation rules 82 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 You can also set the language for a paragraph or a group of characters as None This option is especially useful when you insert text such as web addresses or
92. to find if you have given them names when creating them instead of keeping LibreOffice s default graphics1 graphics2 Table1 Table2 and so on which may not correspond to the position of the object in the document If you only want to see the content in a certain category highlight the category and click the cl Content View icon Pal Until you click the icon again only the objects of that category will be displayed Click the Navigation icon O second icon from the left at the top of the Navigator to display the Navigation toolbar Here you can pick one of the categories and use the Previous and Next icons to move from one item to the next This is particularly helpful for finding items like bookmarks and indexes which can be difficult to see The names of the icons shown in the tooltips change to match the selected category for example Next Graphic or Next Bookmark 24 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Navigation z Repeat search Figure 14 Navigation toolbar e To jump to a specific page in the document type its page number in the box at the top of the Navigator A bit of experimentation with the other icons will demonstrate their functions Some component specific uses are described in the chapters on Writer and the other components Undoing and redoing changes To undo the most recent change press Control Z or click the Undo icon a on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit Und
93. view If you are designing a document to be printed double sided you may want to see what facing pages look like Writer provides two ways to do this e View Layout editable view use the Facing Pages Book Preview button on the status bar e 85 e Page Preview read only view To use Page Preview 1 Choose File Page Preview or click the Page Preview button S on the Standard toolbar Writer now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar TEET Be 5 5 e m Gy Close Preview Figure 269 Page Preview toolbar Writer 264 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 Select the required preview icon Two Pages G Multiple Pages 4 or Book Preview E 3 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 25 to open the Print dialog 4 Choose the print options and click the Print button Calc To preview the sheets in Calc before printing 1 Choose File Page Preview The Calc window now displays the Page Preview toolbar instead of the Formatting toolbar cy Si a Q B Format Page Margins O Close Preview Figure 270 Page Preview toolbar Calc 2 To print the document from this view click the Print document icon 4 to open the Print dialog 3 Choose the print options and click the Print button Exporting to PDF LibreOffice can export documents to PDF Portable Document Format This industry standard file format is ideal for
94. with LibreOffice 3 3 Select the fields of your form Tables or queries Table Vacations al Available fields Fields in the form Date rn Odometer Breakfast Lunch Supper Motel Tolls BPayment LPayment Figure 188 Form Wizard steps Step 2 Set up a subform Since we have already created a relationship between the Fuel and Vacations tables we will use that relationship If no relationship had been defined this would be done in step 4 1 Click the box labeled Add Subform 2 Click Subform based upon existing relation 3 Fuel is listed as a relation we want to add So click Fuel to highlight it as in Figure 189 Click Next Decide if you want to set up a subform Add Subfoarm Subform based on existing relation Which relation do you wart iim to add C Subform based on manual selection of fields i A subform is a form that is inserted in another form Use subforms to show data from tables or queries with a one to many Figure 189 Adding a subform Step 3 Add subform fields This step is exactly the same as step 1 The only difference is that not all of the fields will be used in the subform 1 Fuel is preselected under Tables or queries 2 Use the gt gt button to move all the fields to the right 3 Click the FuellD field to highlight it 4 Use the lt button to move the FuellD to the left Figure 190 5 Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Bas
95. you type e Change the maximum number of words remembered for word completion and the length of the smallest words to be remembered e Delete specific entries from the word completion list e Change the key that accepts a suggested entry the options are Right arrow End key Return Enter and Space bar Automatic word completion only occurs after you type a word for the second time in a document Using AutoText Use AutoText to store text tables graphics and other items for reuse and assign them to a key combination for easy retrieval For example rather than typing Senior Management every time you use that phrase you can set up an AutoText entry to insert those words when you type sm and press F3 Creating AutoText To store some text as Auto Text 1 Type the text into your document 2 Select the text 3 Choose Edit AutoText or press Control F3 4 Inthe AutoText dialog box type a name for the AutoText in the Name box Writer will suggest a one letter shortcut which you can change 5 Inthe large box to the left choose the category for the AutoText entry for example My Auto Text 6 Click the AutoText button on the right and select New text only from the menu 7 Click Close to return to your document If the only option under the AutoText button is Import either you have not entered a name for your AutoText or there is no text selected in the document AutoText is especially powerful when as
96. 0 67 50 9 00 1 zi 80 6 207 SL 26 00 0 00 2 00 6 00 16 00 17 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 0 00 62 50 9 00 78 1 209 0 Matteson Britany 28 00 0 00 3 00 3 00 17 00 22 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 00 47 60 9 00 23 79 4 212 5 Murphy Kathleen 26 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 16 00 11 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 4 00 53 50 9 00 Figure 101 Frozen rows and columns You can set the freeze point at a row a column or both a row and a column as in Figure 101 Freezing single rows or columns 1 Click on the header for the row below where you want the freeze or for the column to the right of where you want the freeze 2 Choose Window Freeze A dark line appears indicating where the freeze is put Freezing a row and a column 1 Click into the cell that is immediately below the row you want frozen and immediately to the right of the column you want frozen 2 Choose Window Freeze Two lines appear on the screen a horizontal line above this cell and a vertical line to the left of this cell Now as you scroll around the screen everything above and to the left of these lines will remain in view Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 113 Unfreezing To unfreeze rows or columns choose Window Freeze The check mark by Freeze will vanish Splitting the screen Another way to change the view is by splitting the window also Known as splitting the screen The screen can be split either horizontally or vertically o
97. 00 XP xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Template xIt Microsoft Excel 5 0 and 95 xls and xlw Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 xlsx Office Open XML Spreadsheet xlsx Data Interchange Format dif dBase dbf SYLK slk Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 357 Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 formats sdc and vor Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos HTML Document OpenOffice org Calc html and htm Pocket Excel pxl The Java Runtime Environment is required to use the mobile device filters for AportisDoc Palm Pocket Word and Pocket Excel Saving presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp otp and odg Impress 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation sxi OpenOffice org 1 x Presentation Template sti Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Template pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx potm Office Open XML Presentation pptx potm ppsx StarDraw Starlmpress sda sdd and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop Impress can also export to MacroMedia Flash swf and any of the graphics formats listed for Draw Saving drawings Draw 3 can only save in the OpenDocument Drawing formats odg and otg the OpenOffice org 1 x formats sxd and std and StarDraw format sda sdd and vor However Draw can also export to BMP EMF EPS
98. 01 shows some frozen rows and columns The heavier horizontal line between rows 3 and 14 and the heavier vertical line between columns C and H denote the frozen areas Rows 4 through 13 and columns D through G have been scrolled off the page The first three rows and columns remained because are frozen into place SESE alrae eler elal si T i a El 2 B s o r _ Ss 6 S x SG GS al 5 Dl g Oo D i Lo Ci on S S S 6 8 Si Sl sl S amp S oa a S a a da saa gga Date 10 02 10 03 10 04 10 05 10 06 10 07 10 08 10 09 10 10 10 11 10 12 10 13 10 14 4 3 Average 267 5 Possible 28 0 1 0 3 0 12 0 18 0 280 40 60 6o 35 40 78 0 11 0 76 6 200 0 Smith Jahn 28 00 7 00 0 00 00 26 00 0 00 6 00 0 00 3 50 4 00 56 50 6 00 11 67 9 181 5 Klein Mike 28 00 1 00 1 00 11 50 8 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 3 0 47 60 10 00 10 72 7 186 5 Johnson Tom 27 00 1 00 3 00 0 00 13 00 6 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 3 00 47 60 9 00 1 82 6 213 0 Doe John 27 00 1 00 1 00 2 00 17 00 17 00 _ 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 50 54 00 9 00 11 96 4 258 0 Doe Jane 28 00 1 00 3 00 9 00 16 00 28 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 60 4 00 79 60 10 00 11 67 3 172 0 Kupter Peter 26 00 1 00 3 00 _ 16 00 20 00 0 00 6 00 6 00 0 00 3 0 41 00 6 50 63 9 224 5 Newton Issac _ _ 28 00 1 00 3 00 6 00 16 00 23 00 4 00 6 00 6 00 3 50 3 6
99. 1 Elements window 243 equations over more than one line 250 floating window 248 font size 249 formula layout 250 limits to sum integral 250 markup 245 matrix markup 251 right click menu 245 event handling 325 export directly as PDF 265 export HTML 44 exporting Flash 271 PDF 265 XHTML 271 extended tips 29 extension Report Builder 239 Extension Manager 64 239 extensions 327 341 DataPilot Tools 343 Solver for Nonlinear Programming for Calc 343 extensions and addons sources of 12 Draw 166 Impress 138 Writer 72 fields 162 fields bookmarks 96 cross reference 96 Fields dialog box References tab 97 file locations 34 file sharing options 37 Fill Format 54 Fill tool Calc 117 fill editing 184 filtering visible cells Calc 129 Flash export 305 flip an object 185 floating toolbars 16 floating window 17 flowchart symbols 179 font history 32 ignore settings when importing HTML 44 options 36 preview 32 replacement table 37 replacements 36 sizes for HTML 43 font resizing Impress 153 Fontwork alignment 290 anchoring 292 area options 291 attributes 290 character spacing 290 creating an object 288 editing an object 289 Formatting toolbar 291 Gallery 289 grouping 292 line options 291 moving and resizing objects 293 positioning options 292 same letter heights 290 toolbar 288 289 Form Wizard 204 formatting pages 88 Formatting toolbar 15 formatting Calc AutoFormat 126 conditional 127 themes 127 formula bar
100. 1 n relationship Or click the New Relation icon This opens the Relations window Figure 184 Our two tables are listed in the Tables involved section In the Fields involved section click the dropdown list under the Fuel label Select Date from the Fuel table list Click in the cell to the right of this dropdown list This opens a dropdown list for the Vacations table Select Date from the Vacations table list It should now look like Figure 184 Click OK Tables involved Fuel a Vacations all Fields involved Vacations Date Date Figure 184 Selected fields in a relationship 5 Modifying the Update options and Delete options section of the Relation window a Right click the line connecting the Date fields in the two table lists to open a menu b Select Edit to open the Relations dialog Figure 185 c Select Update cascade d Select Delete cascade e Click OK to close the Relations dialog and choose File Save to save the Relation Design window While these options are not strictly necessary they do help Having them selected permits you to update a table that has a relationship defined with another table It also permits you to delete a field from the table Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 203 Update options Delete options C i No action C i No action Update cascade Delete cascade Set null C Set null Set default _ Set default OK Cancel Help Figu
101. 1a PDF A is an ISO standard for long term preservation of documents by embedding all the information necessary for faithful reproduction Such as fonts while forbidding other elements including forms security and encryption PDF tags are written If you select PDF A 1a the forbidden elements are greyed out not available Tagged PDF Tagged PDF contains information about the structure of the document s contents This can help to display the document on devices with different screens and when using screen reader software Some tags that are exported are table of contents hyperlinks and controls This option can increase file sizes significantly Create PDF form Submit format Choose the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file This setting overrides the control s URL property that you set in the document There is only one common setting valid for the whole PDF document PDF sends the whole document FDF sends the control contents HTML and XML Most often you will choose the PDF format Export bookmarks Exports headings in Writer documents and page names in Impress and Draw documents as bookmarks a table of contents list displayed by most PDF viewers Export comments Exports comments in Writer and Calc documents as PDF notes You may not want this In Impress exports a set of Comments pages following the set of slides Export automatically inserted blank pages If selected automatically inserted blan
102. 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Copyright This document is Copyright 2010 by its contributors as listed below You may distribute it and or modify it under the terms of either the GNU General Public License http www gnu org licenses gpl html version 3 or later or the Creative Commons Attribution License http creativecommons org licenses by 3 0 version 3 0 or later Contributors Ron Faile Jr Jeremy Cartwright Hal Parker Feedback Please direct any comments or suggestions about this document to documentation libreoffice org Acknowledgments This book is based on Getting Started with OpenOffice org 3 3 The contributors to that book are Jean Hollis Weber Michele Zarri Magnus Adielsson Thomas Astleitner Richard Barnes Agnes Belzunce Chris Bonde Nicole Cairns Daniel Carrera JiHui Choi Richard Detwiler Alexander No l Dunne Laurent Duperval Spencer E Harpe Regina Henschel Peter Hillier Brook Richard Holt John Kane Rachel Kartch Stefan A Keel Jared Kobos Michael Kotsarinis Peter Kupfer lan Laurenson Dan Lewis Alan Madden Michel Pinquier Andrew Pitonyak Carol Roberts lain Roberts Hazel Russman Gary Schnabl Robert Scott Joe Sellman Janet Swisher Jim Taylor Alex Thurgood Barbara M Tobias Claire Wood Linda Worthington Publication date and software version Published 31 December 2010 Based on LibreOffice 3 3 Documentation for LibreOffice is available at www
103. 25 Viewing the paths of files used by LibreOffice 34 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 You can use the entries in the LibreOffice Paths dialog to compile a list of files such as those containing AutoText that you need to back up or copy to another computer Color options On the LibreOffice Colors page you can specify colors to use in LibreOffice documents You can select a color from a color table edit an existing color and define new colors These colors are stored in your color palette and are then available in all components of LibreOffice Properties Name Blue amp Add Color Blue Color table P R 153 TCC SEeeeeee o BEBEESS0 ow Figure 26 Defining colors to use in color palettes in LibreOffice To modify a color 1 Select the color to modify from the list or the color table 2 Enter the new values that define the color If necessary change the settings from RGB Red Green Blue to CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black or vice versa The changed color appears in the lower of the two color preview boxes at the top 3 Modify the Name as required 4 Click the Modify button The newly defined color is now listed in the Color table Alternatively click the Edit button to open the Color dialog shown in Figure 27 Here you can select a color from one of the color windows in the upper area or you can enter values in the lower area using your choice of RGB CMYK or
104. 28 2010 the community of volunteers who develop and promote OpenOffice org announce a major change in the project s structure After ten years successful growth with Sun Microsystems as founding and principle sponsor the project launches an independent foundation called The Document Foundation to fulfil the promise of independence written in the original charter This Foundation will become the cornerstone of a new ecosystem where individuals and organisations can contribute to and benefit from the availability of a truly free office suite Major updates to OpenOffice org include version 2 0 in October 2005 and version 3 0 in October 2008 The release of LibreOffice 3 3 the first release by the newly formed The Document Foundation community is expected in early 2011 Since version 2 0 OpenOffice org has supported the open standard OASIS OpenDocument as its default file format You can read more about The Document Foundation at http www documentfoundation org The LibreOffice community The Document Foundation s mission is to facilitate the evolution of the OpenOffice org Community into a new open independent and meritocratic organizational structure within the next few months An independent Foundation is a better match to the values of our contributors users and supporters and will enable a more effective efficient transparent and inclusive Community We will protect past investments by building on the solid achievements
105. 3 adding graphics spreadsheets other objects 157 adding media clips 157 adding pictures 155 adding tables 156 adding text 151 layouts 149 master 157 modifying 151 rename 146 Slides pane Impress 139 snap functions 170 Snap to grid 170 Solver for Nonlinear Programming for Calc 343 sort order database fields 225 sorting records Calc 129 special characters 80 83 spelling checker 82 spelling options 46 spreadsheet using as data source 218 spreadsheets adding to slides 157 cell reference 105 definition 100 navigate 105 opening 356 Index 365 saving 357 saving as CSV 104 Standard toolbar 15 starting anew document 20 Starting LibreOffice 13 status bar 18 Calc 102 Draw 168 Impress 141 Writer 72 Style dialog 55 56 styles 185 Apply Style list 54 assigning to shortcut keys 339 AutoUpdate 56 changing using Style dialog 55 creating by dragging and dropping 57 creating from selection 57 creating new 56 creating using Style dialog 56 custom 56 defining asequence 70 deleting 60 description 52 158 Fill Format 54 formatting text 153 graphic styles 158 linking 56 loading from template or document 59 modifying 55 presentation styles 158 types supported 52 updating from a selection 55 Styles and Formatting window 53 SUB 313 subroutines 319 subroutines in macros 313 Sun Microsystems 352 support 12 system font user interface 32 tab stops 81 table of contents automated 93 tables add to slides 156 Tasks
106. 5 Setting the contents of the header or footer The header or footer of a Calc spreadsheet has three columns for text Each column can have different contents To set the contents of the header or footer click the Edit button in the header or footer dialog shown in Figure 124 to display the dialog shown in Figure 126 Header Page Style Default x Left area Center area Right area Company Name sheet 10 29 2010 10 15 29 Header Customized x Custom header A Ei a a Ele Note Use the buttons to change the font or insert field commands such as date time etc Figure 126 Edit contents of header or footer Areas Each area in the header or footer is independent and can have different information in it Header You can select from several preset choices in the Header drop down list or specify a custom header using the buttons below the area boxes To format a footer the choices are the same Custom header Click in the area Left Center Right that you want to customize then use the buttons to add elements or change text attributes Opens the Text Attributes dialog ae Inserts the total number of pages Inserts the File Name field Inserts the Date field Inserts the Sheet Name field Inserts the Time field G Inserts the current page number 136 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 gt LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress Pre
107. 53 layout selecting 149 main window 138 slide elements modifying 150 slide show modifying 151 Starting 138 inclination 183 indents 81 indexes and bibliographies 94 Insert Bookmark dialog 97 Insert Picture dialog 278 installing and setting up 12 International Support 13 Internet options 47 J Java options 40 Java Runtime Environment JRE 192 JRE Java Runtime Environment 12 40 K keyboard shortcuts assigning 339 349 customizing 339 function keys 349 loading from a file 341 resetting to default values 341 saving to a file 340 keyboard shortcuts macros 324 L landscape pages 69 language settings 45 language support 11 hyperlinks layout methods 88 absolute 296 Layout pane 152 editing 299 layout selecting Impress 149 inserting 296 LGPL 354 relative 296 libraries of macros 319 removing 299 library containers 319 hyphenation LibreOffice Basic 310 362 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog 311 licensing of LibreOffice 353 limits to sum integral 250 Line and Filling toolbar 168 line properties 184 line customizing 184 line drawing 173 lines editing 183 linking object from gallery 282 Linux Quickstarter 14 system requirements 11 list table database 202 load Basic code to edit 42 load save options 41 loading styles 59 locale settings 45 M Mac OS X keystroke differences 26 support 13 system requirements 11 Macro Organizer dialog 322 macro security options 37
108. 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the start of the number 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select and move the cursor before the sign 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the line 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the line 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the line 13 Pasting the value also pasted an extra space so press Backspace to remove the extra space 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name 15 Press Home to move to the start of the line 16 Press down arrow to move to the next line 17 Stop recording the macro and save the macro It takes much longer to read and write the steps than to record the macro Work slowly and think about the steps as you do them With practice this becomes second nature The generated macro has been modified to contain the step number in the comments to match the code to the step above Listing 5 Copy the numeric value to the start of the column sub CopyNumToColl rem rem define variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object rem e e rem get access to the document document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame dispatcher createUnoServic
109. 68 Choosing what to print in Calc Printing an individual sheet 1 Inthe spreadsheet click on the sheet tab to select the sheet you want to print 2 Choose File Print from the menu bar 260 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a range of sheets 1 Inthe spreadsheet select the sheets to print a Select the first sheet b Hold down the Control key c Click on the additional sheet tabs d Release the Control key when all required sheets are selected 2 Choose File Print from the menu bar 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog choose the Selected sheets option 4 Click the Print button Printing a selection of cells 1 Inthe document select the section of cells to print 2 Choose File Print from the menu 3 Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Selected cells option 4 Click the Print button After printing be sure to deselect the extra sheets If you Keep them selected the next time you enter data on one sheet you enter data on all the selected sheets This might not be what you want Impress and Draw You can choose individual slides ranges of slides or selections of slides for printing Range and copies All slides Number of copies 1 Slides 15 J _ EE a Collate p Aa Print Slides per page Order Left to rig
110. 9 You can turn these headers off by selecting View Column amp Row Headers Sheet tabs At the bottom of the grid of cells are the sheet tabs These tabs enable access to each individual sheet with the visible active sheet having a white tab You can choose colors for the different sheet tabs Clicking on another sheet tab displays that sheet and its tab turns white You can also select multiple sheet tabs at once by holding down the Control key while you click the names Status bar At the very bottom of the Calc window is the status bar which provides information about the spreadsheet and convenient ways to quickly change some of its features Most of the fields are similar to those in other components of LibreOffice see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Calc in the Calc Guide 102 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Sheet 1 3 Default INSRT STD fj Sheet Page Insert Selection Unsaved number style mode mode changes Figure 90 Left end of Calc status bar Sum 0 _ _ 100 I I Digital Cell or object Zoom Zoom signature information slider percent Figure 91 Right end of Calc status bar Opening and saving CSV files Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice includes instructions on starting new Calc documents opening existing documents and saving documents A special case for Calc is opening and saving comma separated values CSV files which are tex
111. Activates selected button In most cases where no button is selected Enter is equivalent to clicking OK Closes dialog without saving any changes made while it was open Esc In most cases Esc is equivalent to clicking Cancel When an open drop down list is selected Esc closes the list Spacebar Checks an empty checkbox Clears a checked checkbox Up down arrow keys Moves focus up and down a list Increases or decreases value of a variable Moves focus vertically within a section of dialog Left right arrow keys Moves focus horizontally within a section of a dialog Tab Advances focus to the next section or element of a dialog Shift Tab Returns focus to the previous section or element in a dialog Alt Down Arrow Shows items in a drop down list Getting help Shortcut Keys Result Opens the LibreOffice Help dialog In LibreOffice Help jumps to the F1 first help page of the selected tab Turns the cursor into the What s This question mark Shows the tip Shift F1 i for an item underneath the cursor Shift F2 Shows tip for a selected item Esc In LibreOffice Help goes up one level Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 347 Managing documents Shortcut Keys Result Ctrl F4 or Alt F4 Closes the current document Closes LibreOffice when the last open document is closed Ctrl O Launches the Open dialog to open a document Ctrl S Saves the current
112. Array rem 8 Press Ctrl C to copy the selected text to the clipboard dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Copy 0 Array rem 9 Press End to move the cursor to the end of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToEndOfLine 0 Array rem 10 Press Backspace twice to remove the two trailing spaces dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array POM Se ett pee ee aca tna me ein at ta ne ale ee ioe aia iene dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 11 Press Home to move the cursor to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 12 Press Ctrl V to paste the selected number to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Paste 0 Array rem 13 Press Backspace to remove the extra space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 14 Press Tab to insert a tab between the number and the name dim args1 7 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue args17 0 Name Text args17 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args17 rem 15 Press Home to move to the start of the Line dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToStartOfLine 0 Array rem 16 Press down arrow to move to the next Line dim args19 1 aS new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue arg
113. Basic button e in the toolbar to run the first macro in the module Use the Macro dialog opened using the Select macro button amp or Tools gt Macros gt Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic to select and run any macro in the module Creating a simple macro Imagine repeatedly entering simple information Although you can store the information in the clipboard if you use the clipboard for something else the contents are changed Storing the contents as a macro is a simple solution In some simple cases including the example used here a better solution is to use AutoText 1 Use Tools Macros Record Macro to start recording a macro A small window is displayed so you know that LibreOffice is recording F Recordi X 2 Type the desired information or perform an appropriate series of operations In this case typed my name Andrew Pitonyak 3 Click the Stop Recording button to stop recording save the macro and display the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog Library Containers Macro name Stop Recording Save InspectMetaData ie Close Save macro in Existing macros in DBInspecton I My Macros OpenOffice org Macros 0117G5 GettingStartedWithMacros a 4 AndrewBase InspectMetaData AddResultSetToDoc ResultSetToData GbE SupportedDBDrivers Sin ih iht DriverArgs New Module A 3 Hel Libraries ___tielp Standard ne E Untitled Modules ato T DEUtiliti
114. Click OK to save Indents amp Spacing Alignment Text Flow Font Styles and Formatting DEE Complimentary close Heading Heading 1 Heading 10 Heading 2 Heading 3 Heading 4 m Figure 78 Modifying a style Font Effects Position Organizer Hyphenation Automatically 2 Se Characters at line end 2 Characters at line begin 0 A Masimum number of consecutive hyphens Figure 79 Turning on automatic hyphenation Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 87 Turning on hyphenation for the Default paragraph style affects all other paragraph styles that are based on Default You can individually change other styles so that hyphenation is not active for example you might not want headings to be hyphenated Any styles that are not based on Default are not affected See Chapter 3 Styles and Templates for more about styles based on other styles You can also set hyphenation choices through Tools Options Language Settings Writing Aids In Options near the bottom of the dialog scroll down to find the hyphenation settings ptons Edit pre before Teak 3 Characters after line break 2 Hyphenate without inquiry Hyphenate special regions Figure 80 Setting hyphenation options To change the minimum number of characters for hyphenation the minimum number of characters before a line break or the minimum number of characters after a line break select the item and then click the Edit
115. Contro Shift G or choose Modify Group from the menu bar When objects are grouped any editing operations carried out on that group are applied to all members of the group If you click on one member of the group the whole group is selected The objects of a group retain their own individual properties To undo a group right click and choose Ungroup from the pop up menu use the keyboard shortcut Contro Alt Shift G or choose Modify Ungroup from the menu bar You can edit a member of a group individually without breaking the group To do this right click and choose Enter group or double click on the group Combining objects In contrast to grouping functions combinations create a new object subsequent un combining in the same manner as ungrouping is not possible Select a collection of objects then right click and choose Combine from the pop up menu After you have selected more than one object the Merge Subtract and Intersect functions can be reached in the Modify Shapes menu or though the group s right click menu under the heading Shapes Aids for positioning objects Draw has various tools to help you arrange the objects with respect to each other e Moving an object to the front or to the back e Aligning objects with respect to each other e Distributing the distance and space between objects See Chapter 5 Combining Multiple Objects in the Draw Guide for more information 188 Getting Started with Li
116. Decimal places E Negative numbers red E Thousands separator Format code 00000 User defined Figure 106 Adjusting leading zeros Entering text Click in the cell and type the text Text is left aligned by default Entering numbers as text A number can be entered as text to preserve a leading zero by entering an apostrophe before the number like this 01481 116 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The data is now regarded as text by Calc and displayed exactly as entered Typically formulas will treat the entry as a zero and functions will ignore it Take care that the cell containing the number is not used in a formula If smart quotes are used for apostrophes the apostrophe remains visible in the cell To choose the type of apostrophe use Tools AutoCorrect Custom Quotes The selection of the apostrophe type affects both Calc and Writer Entering dates and times Select the cell and type the date or time You can separate the date elements with a slant ora hyphen or use text such as 15 Oct 10 Calc recognizes a variety of date formats You can separate time elements with colons such as 10 43 45 Deactivating automatic changes Calc automatically applies many changes during data input unless you deactivate those changes You can also immediately undo any automatic changes with Ctr Z AutoCorrect changes Automatic correction of typing errors replacement of straight quotation marks by cur
117. Deleting a row in the Data View window Launching Base to work on data sources You can launch LibreOffice Base at any time from the View Data Source pane Just right click on a database or the Tables or Queries icons and select Edit Database File Once in Base you can edit add and delete tables queries forms and reports Using data sources in Writer and Calc Data can be placed into Writer and Calc documents from the tables in the data source window In Writer values from individual fields can be inserted Or a complete table can be created in the Writer document One common way to use a data source is to perform a mail merge Choosing Tools Mail Merge Wizard or clicking on the Mail Merge icon on the View Data Source pane launches the Mail Merge wizard which steps you through creating a mail merge document See Chapter 11 in the Writer Guide Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 219 Writer documents To insert a field from a table opened in the data source window into a Writer document click on the field name the gray square at the top of the field list and with the left mouse button held down drag the field onto the document In a Writer document it will appear as lt FIELD gt where FIELD is the name of the field you dragged For example to enter the cost of meals and who paid for them on a certain date of a vacation 1 Open the list of data sources F4 and select the Vacations table in the Automobile database
118. Determines the appearance of selected text or graphics which appear on a shaded background To make the shaded background more or less dark increase or decrease the Transparency setting If you prefer selected material to appear in reversed color typically white text on a black background deselect this option Print options On the LibreOffice Print page set the print options to suit your default printer and your most common printing method In the Printer warnings section near the bottom of the page you can choose whether to be warned if the paper size or orientation specified in your document does not match the paper size or orientation available for your printer Having these warnings turned on can be quite helpful particularly if you work with documents produced by people in other countries where the standard paper size is different from yours If your printouts are incorrectly placed on the page or chopped off at the top bottom or sides or the printer is refusing to print the most likely cause is page size incompatibility Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 33 Reduce print data Settings for Printer Printer Reduce transparency Automatically No transparency Reduce bitma ps High print quality Normal print quality Resolution 200 DPI default Include transparent objects Printer warnings Paper size Paper orientation C Print to file Reduce gradients Gradient stripes
119. FixDocVv3 set UpdateFromTemplate oDocSettings ThisComponent createInstance _ com sun star document Settings oDocSettings UpdateFromTemplate True End Sub FixDocv3 4 Click the Run BASIC icon then close the Basic window 5 Save the document The next time you open this document you will be prompted to update the styles from the modified template Adding templates using the Extension Manager The Extension Manager provides an easy way to install collections of templates graphics macros or other add ins that have been packaged into files with a OXT extension See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more about the Extension Manager This Web page lists many of the available extensions hittp extensions libreoffice org To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension package and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In LibreOffice select Tools Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the package of templates you want to install and click Open The package begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the package installation is complete the templates are available for use through File New Templates and Documents and the extension is listed in the Extension Manager 64 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Extension Manager lal as English spe
120. From Template Open Document W Load LibreOffice During System Start Up Exit Quickstarter Jur F yi pii j x es es jaia oo E l Figure 1 Quickstarter pop up menu in Windows Disabling the Quickstarter To close the Quickstarter right click on the icon in the system tray and then click Exit Quickstarter on the pop up menu The next time the computer is restarted the Quickstarter will be loaded again To prevent LibreOffice org from loading during system startup deselect the Load LibreOffice during system start up item on the pop up menu You might want to do this if your computer has insufficient memory for example Reactivating the Quickstarter If the Quickstarter has been disabled you can reactivate it by selecting the Load LibreOffice during system start up checkbox in Tools Options LibreOffice Memory Using the Quickstarter in Linux and Mac OS X LibreOffice under Linux has a Quickstarter that looks and acts like the one described above for Windows the checkbox on the Memory page is labeled Enable systray quickstarter Mac OS X provides similar functionality through a popup menu from the dock 14 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Parts of the main window The main window Is similar in each component of LibreOffice although some details vary See the chapters in this book about Writer Calc Draw and Impress for descriptions of those details Common features include the menu bar the
121. GIF JPEG MET PBM PCT PGM PNG PPM RAS SVG SVM TIFF WMF and XPM Writer Web can save in these formats HTML document html and htm as HTML 4 0 Transitional OpenOffice org 1 0 HTML Template stw OpenOffice org 2 x HTML Template oth StarWriter Web 4 0 and 5 0 vor Text LibreOffice Writer Web txt Text Encoded LibreOffice Writer Web txt Exporting to other formats LibreOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find the filetype you re looking for under Save As look under Export for additional types LibreOffice can export files to XHTML In addition Draw and Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the desired format in the File format list and click the Export button 358 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Index 3 3D objects 189 A accepting or rejecting changes 95 accessibility features 349 accessibility options 39 adding macros from other sources 310 advantages of LibreOffice 11 antialiasing screen font 32 appearance options 38 Apply Style list 54 area fill editing 184 arranging objects 181 arrow styles customizing 184 arrows 184 Asian language support 46 Asian languages enabled 152 AutoCorrect 48 83 AutoFormat Calc 126 AutolInput 117 Auto
122. K key Apply numbering symbol Apply border Create table Apply Styles Remove blank paragraphs Replace Custom Styles Replace bullets with E Sissi ISIS CSS S5 M Replace while modifying existing text T AutoFormat AutoCorrect while typing Figure 45 The AutoCorrect dialog in Writer showing the five tabs and some of the choices Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates What is a template A template is a model that you use to create other documents For example you can create a template for business reports that has your company s logo on the first page New documents created from this template will all have your company s logo on the first page Templates can contain anything that regular documents can contain such as text graphics a set of styles and user specific setup information such as measurement units language the default printer and toolbar and menu customization All documents in LibreOffice are based on templates You can create a specific template for any document type text spreadsheet drawing presentation If you do not specify a template when you start a new document then the document is based on the default template for that type of document If you have not specified a default template LibreOffice uses the blank template for that type of document that is installed with
123. Layout 152 automatic changes 117 automatic saving 22 AutoRecovery 22 41 AutoUpdate styles 56 B background images from Gallery 282 Basic 310 bitmaps 189 BitTorrent 12 book preview 265 booklet printing 262 bookmarks 96 borders editing 183 brackets Math 250 bring forward 181 brochure printing 262 bulleted list 153 Bullets and Numbering dialog 155 C Calc AutoFormat 126 editing data 121 Enter key use of 107 features 100 filtering visible cells 129 formula bar 101 Function Wizard 101 hiding and showing data 127 Navigator 105 outline group controls 128 printing 130 sheet tabs 102 sorting records 129 splitting the screen 114 status bar 102 themes 127 viewing 113 Calc macros 319 callouts 179 cells in Calc formatting 122 navigating 105 selecting 108 change tracking 95 changes undo and redo 25 charts add to slides 157 circle drawing 174 clipboard 33 closing a document 26 closing LibreOffice 26 CMYK 169 Color Bar 169 color options 35 color palette 170 color scheme 38 columns in Calc deleting 111 freezing 113 inserting 110 selecting 109 combining objects 188 comma separated values CSV 103 104 comments Draw 189 comments adding 92 complex text layout CTL 11 46 components of OpenOffice org 10 conditional formatting 127 connectors 177 content boxes Impress 150 context menu 183 context menus 17 conversion 189 copy and paste 78 copying object from Gallery 281 create document from
124. LibreOffice See Setting a default template on page 65 for more information What are styles A Style is a set of formats that you can apply to selected pages text frames and other elements in your document to quickly change their appearance When you apply a style you apply a whole group of formats at the same time Many people manually format paragraphs words tables page layouts and other parts of their documents without paying any attention to styles They are used to writing documents according to physical attributes For example you might specify the font family font size and any formatting such as bold or italic Styles are ogical attributes Using styles means that you stop saying font size 14pt Times New Roman bold centered and you start saying Title because you have defined the Title style to have those characteristics In other words styles means that you shift the emphasis from what the text or page or other element looks like to what the text s Styles help improve consistency in a document They also make major formatting changes easy For example you may decide to change the indentation of all paragraphs or change the font of all titles For a long document this simple task can be prohibitive Styles make the task easy In addition styles are used by LibreOffice for many processes even if you are not aware of them For example Writer relies on heading styles or other styles you sp
125. LibreOffice 3 The Document Foundation i Text Document Era je Spreadsheet Presentation Lo Open Figure 10 LibreOffice Start Center You can also start a new document in one of the following ways e Use File New and choose the type of document e Use the arrow next to the New button on the main toolbar From the drop down menu select the type of document to be created e Press Control N on the keyboard e Use File Wizards for some special types of documents If a document is already open in LibreOffice the new document opens in a new window Opening an existing document When no document is open the Start Center provides an icon for opening an existing document or choosing from a list of recently edited documents Open a file browser Open a list of recently edited documents 20 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 You can also open an existing document in one of the following ways e Choose File Open e Click the Open button on the main toolbar e Press Contro O on the keyboard In each case the Open dialog appears Select the file you want and then click Open Ifa document is already open in LibreOffice the second document opens in a new window In the Open dialog you can reduce the list of files by selecting the type of file you are looking for For example if you choose Text documents as the file type you will only see documents Writer can open including odt doc txt i
126. Ls relative to file system Rl Save URLs relative to internet Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version 1 2 Extended recommended l Size optimization for ODF format I Warn when not saving in ODF or default format Document type Always save as Text document ODF Text Document Figure 35 Choosing Load and Save options Load user specific settings with the document When you save a document certain settings are saved with it Some settings printer name data source linked to the document are always loaded with a document whether or not this option is selected If you select this option these document settings are overruled by the user specific settings of the person who opens it If you deselect this option the user s personal settings do not overrule the settings in the document For example your choice in the options for LibreOffice Writer of how to update links is affected by the Load user specific settings option Load printer settings with the document If this option is not selected the printer settings that are stored with the document are ignored when you print it using the Print File Directly icon The default printer in your system will be used instead Edit document properties before saving If you select this option the Document Properties dialog pops up to prompt you to enter relevant information the first time you save a new document or whenever you use Save As Save AutoRecov
127. OOoAuthorFormat fa Pitonyak DHA eee 2 Description Figure 312 Assign macro to the document open event Eem Assigned Action Assign Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document D Standard MyMacros PrintHello Remove Save Document As Figure 313 PrintHello is assigned to the Open Document event Extensions An extension is a package that can be installed into LibreOffice to add new functionality Extensions can be written in almost any programming language and may be simple or sophisticated Extensions can be grouped into types e Calc Add Ins which provide new functionality for Calc including new functions that act like normal built in functions e New components and functionality which normally include some level of UI integration such as new menus or toolbars e Data pilots that are used directly in Calc e Chart Add Ins with new chart types e Linguistic components such as spell checkers e Document templates and images Although individual extensions can be found in different places there is an extension repository at http extensions libreoffice org For more about obtaining and installing extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 327 Writing macros without the recorder The examples covered in this chapter are created using the macro recorder and the dispatcher You can also write macros that directly access the objects tha
128. Started with LibreOffice 3 3 e Ifyou are importing a Microsoft Word or Excel file containing VBA code you can select the option Executable code Whereas normally the code is preserved but rendered inactive if you inspect it with the StarBasic IDE you will notice that it is all commented with this option the code is ready to be executed Microsoft Office Load Save options On the Load Save Microsoft Office page you can choose what to do when importing and exporting Microsoft Office OLE objects linked or embedded objects or documents such as spreadsheets or equations Select the L options to convert Microsoft OLE objects into the corresponding LibreOffice OLE objects when a Microsoft document is loaded into LibreOffice mnemonic L for load Select the S options to convert LibreOffice OLE objects into the corresponding Microsoft OLE objects when a document is saved in a Microsoft format mnemonic S for save WinWord to LibreOffice Writer or reverse Excel to LibreOffice Cale or reverse W PowerPoint to LibreOffice Impress or reverse Wi L Load and convert the object Convert and save the object Figure 37 Choosing Load Save Microsoft Office options HTML compatibility Load Save options Choices made on the Load Save HTML Compatibility page affect HTML pages imported into LibreOffice and those exported from LibreOffice See HTML documents importing exporting in the Help
129. TERE E b Ip ap bL Y mop 3 E a Pawo ORA P ad 178 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Flowcharts The tools for drawing flowcharts are accessed by clicking on the Flowcharts icon i The creation of flowcharts organization charts and similar planning tools are described in Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Callouts Use the Callouts icon p to open the Callouts toolbar Stars and banners These tools are associated with the Stars icon wT Flowchart x E 2 EE a p a W TA GS VED w gt z T Callouts rx mT E ou Stars and Banners X me pe HE te ie Beg You can add text to all these shapes See Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide for details Selection modes There are three selection modes moving and changing size editing and rotating points To set the default mode either moving and changing sizes or editin the Points button Z from the Drawing toolbar In standard mode when you begin a new drawing the Points button is not active and the default mode is for selections to be moved or chang size these selections are indicated by small green squares When the Points button is active the default mode is for selections edited these selections are indicated by blue squares Some objects will have one or more extra handles which are larger or colored diffe
130. Text and the value Andrew Pitonyak which is the text that is inserted when the macro is run args1 0 Name Text args1 0 Value Andrew Pitonyak 314 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 This is where the magic happens The dispatch helper sends a dispatch to the document s frame stored in the variable named document with the command uno InsertText The next two arguments frame name and search flags are beyond the scope of this document The last argument is the array of property values to be used while executing the command InsertText dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 argsl1 Finally the end of the subroutine end sub Creating a macro When creating a macro it is important to ask two questions before recording 1 Can the task be written as a simple set of commands 2 Can the steps be arranged such that the last command leaves the cursor ready for the next command A complicated example frequently copy rows and columns of data from a web site and format them as a table in a text document First copy the table from the web site to the clipboard To avoid strange formatting and fonts paste the text into a Writer document as unformatted text reformat the text with tabs between columns so that can use Table Convert Text to Table to convert to a table inspect the text to see if can record a macro to format the text remember the two questions that
131. View User Interface Links Security _ Convert document references to PDF targets _ Export URLs relative to file system Cross document links Default mode Open with PDF reader application Open with Internet browser Figure 274 Links page of PDF Options dialog Export bookmarks as named destinations If you have defined Writer bookmarks Impress or Draw slide names or Calc sheet names this option exports them as named destinations to which Web pages and PDF documents can link Convert document references to PDF targets If you have defined links to other documents with OpenDocument extensions Such as ODT ODS and ODP this option converts the files names to PDF in the exported PDF document Export URLs relative to file system If you have defined relative links in a document this option exports those links to the PDF Cross document links Defines the behavior of links clicked in PDF files Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 269 Security page of PDF Options dialog PDF export includes options to encrypt the PDF so it cannot be opened without a password and apply some digital rights management DRM features e With an open password set the PDF can only be opened with the password Once opened there are no restrictions on what the user can do with the document for example print copy or change it e With a permissions password set the PDF can be opened by anyone but its permissio
132. You can use the mouse or the keyboard for these operations You can copy or move text within a document or between documents by dragging or by using menu selections icons or keyboard shortcuts You can also copy text from other sources such as Web pages and paste it into a Writer document To move cut and paste selected text using the mouse drag it to the new location and release it To copy selected text hold down the Control key while dragging The text retains the formatting it had before dragging When you paste text the result depends on the source of the text and how you paste it If you click on the Paste icon any formatting the text has such as bold or italics is retained Text pasted from Web sites and other sources may also be placed into frames or tables If you do not like the results click the Undo icon or press Control Z To make the pasted text take on the formatting of the surrounding text where it is being pasted choose either e Edit Paste Special or e Click the triangle to the right of the Paste icon or e Click the Paste icon without releasing the left mouse button Then select Unformatted text from the resulting menu The range of choices on the Paste Special menu varies depending on the origin and formatting of the text or other object to be pasted See Figure 70 for an example with text on the clipboard She v SgE DDE link HTML HyperText Markup Language Formatted text RTF Unformatt
133. a Intermediate color Convert colors to grayscale Transparency Figure 24 Choosing general printing options to apply to all LibreOffice components Path options On the LibreOffice Paths page you can change the location of files associated with or used by LibreOffice to suit your working situation In a Windows system for example you might want to store documents by default somewhere other than My Documents To make changes select an item in the list shown in Figure 25 and click Edit On the Select Path dialog not shown may also be titled Edit Paths add or delete folders as required and then click OK to return to the Options dialog Note that some items can have at least two paths listed one to a shared folder which might be on a network and one to a user specific folder normally on the user s personal computer Paths used by LibreOffice Type Path AutoCorrect C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOfice s user aut Auto T ext C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice s user aut Backups C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice s user bac Gallery C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 user gal Graphics C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice 3 user gal My Documents C Users Ron s Laptop Documents Templates C Users Ron s Laptop AppData Roaming LibreOffice s user ten Temporary files C Users RON SL 1L AppData Local Temp rT Default Edit Figure
134. a source can be a database spreadsheet or text document LibreOffice Base uses the HSQL database engine All of the files created by this engine are kept in one zipped file The database forms are included in this Zipped file A database consists of a number of fields that contain the individual pieces of data Each table of the database is a group of fields When creating a table you also determine the characteristics of each field in the table Forms are for data entry into the fields of one or more tables associated with the form They can also be used for viewing fields from one or more tables associated with the form A query creates a new table from the existing tables based upon how you create the query A report organizes the information of the fields of a query in a document according to your requirements The database in LibreOffice requires Java Runtime Environment JRE If you do not have it on your computer you can download it from www java com and install it following the instructions on the site It should be Java 6 0 or higher In LibreOffice A use Tools Options LibreOffice Java to register Java Windows version of JRE can not be used while there are other versions that can Base creates relational databases This makes it fairly easy to create a database in which the fields of the database have relationships with each other For example Consider a database for a library It will contain a field for
135. able 4 Table 4 Methods for starting a macro Type LibreOffice Document Type Document Toolbar No Yes Yes Menu No Yes Yes Shortcut Yes Yes No Event Yes No Yes To add a menu item keyboard shortcut or toolbar icon that calls a macro use the Customize dialog See Figure 310 Open this dialog in either of these ways e Choose Tools Customize from the main menu bar e Each toolbar has an icon that opens a menu choose the Customize Toolbar option Complete coverage of the Customize dialog is beyond the scope of this document Click the Help button to access the help pages included with LibreOffice The Customize dialog contains tabs to configure menus keyboard bindings toolbars and events Toolbar Macros can be added to toolbars For more about modifying toolbars see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Menu item Use Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Menus tab You can modify an existing menu or create new menus that call macros For more about modifying menus see Chapter 14 Keyboard shortcuts Use Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Keyboard tab Assigning keyboard shortcuts is discussed in Chapter 14 324 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events OpenOffice org Writer Toolbars Toolbar Standard i New Toolbar Content Commands m Load URL Add New New Document F
136. adsheet you cannot change anything in the spreadsheet You can only view the contents of the spreadsheet run queries and create reports based upon the data already entered into the spreadsheet All changes in a spreadsheet must be made in the spreadsheet itself using Calc After modifying the spreadsheet and saving it you will see the changes in the database If you create and save an additional sheet in your spreadsheet the database will have a new table the next time you access it Registering odb databases Databases created by LibreOffice2 x or later are in the odb OpenDocument Base format Other programs can also produce databases in this format Registered a odb database is simple 1 Choose Tools Options LibreOffice Base Databases 2 Under Registered databases click New 3 Browse to where the database is located 4 Make sure the registered name is correct 5 Click OK Sometimes when updating LibreOffice to a newer version your list of registered database files disappears When that happens you need to use these steps to register your database files with your latest version of LibreOffice Using data sources in LibreOffice Having registered the data source whether a spreadsheet text document external database or other accepted data source you can use it in other LibreOffice components including Writer and Calc Viewing data sources Open a document in Writer or Calc To view the data so
137. age of the Paragraph Style or Frame Style dialog applying direct formatting to a paragraph or frame using this style in your document automatically updates the style itself If you are in the habit of manually overriding styles in your document be sure that AutoUpdate is not enabled Updating styles from a document or template You can update styles by copying or loading them from a template or another document See Copying and moving styles on page 57 Creating new custom styles You may want to add some new styles You can do this in two ways e Creating a new style using the Style dialog e Creating a new style from a selection Creating a new style using the Style dialog To create a new style using the Style dialog right click in the Styles and Formatting window and select New from the pop up menu If you want your new style to be linked with an existing style first select that style and then right click and select New If you link styles then when you change the base style for example by changing the font from Times to Helvetica all the linked styles will change as well Sometimes this is exactly what you want other times you do not want the changes to apply to all the linked styles It pays to plan ahead 56 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The dialogs and choices are the same for defining new styles and for modifying existing styles See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Creati
138. ained in one library e A module contains zero or more macros and each macro is contained in one module Figure 304 Macro Library hierarchy Use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog See Figure 305 All available library containers are shown in the Macro from list Every document is a library container capable of containing multiple libraries The application itself acts as two library containers one container for macros distributed with LibreOffice called LibreOffice Macros and one container for personal macros called My Macros As shown in Figure 305 only two documents are currently open Macro name Macro from Existing macros in Recorded sa meas Macros H 3 OpenOffice org Macros 0117GS GettingStartedwithMacros_ AndrewBase New Organizer Help Aj ml Figure 305 Library containers are shown on the left The LibreOffice Macros are stored with the application runtime code which may not be editable to you unless you are an administrator This is just as well since these macros should not be changed and you should not store your own macros in the LibreOffice container Unless your macros are applicable to a single document and only to a single document your macros will probably be stored in the My Macros container The My Macros container is stored in your user area or home directory If a macro is contained in a document then a recorded ma
139. alettes files with the file extension soc For example web soc is acolor palette that is particularly adapted to creating drawings that are going to appear in Web pages The colors will correctly display on workstations with screens displaying at least 256 colors The color selection box also lets you individually change any color by modifying the numerical values in the fields provided to the right of the color palette You can use the color schemes known as CMYK Cyan Magenta Yellow Black and RGB Red Green Blue Click on the Edit button to open the Color dialog where you can set individual colors See Color options in Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice of this book Many more input possibilities are available in this dialog For a more detailed description of color palettes and their options see Chapter 8 Tips and Tricks in the Draw Guide Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 169 Area Area Shadow Transparency Colors Gradients Hatching Bitmaps Propertes Name Blue 8 Add Color Modify Table standard Edit a E 2 _ E gt ET IE Ennn EEN Titty ieee Titi t OTe TUTTI tT tL TTLttt sf name i is Figure 155 Changing the color palette Positioning objects with snap functions In Draw objects can be accurately and consistently positioned using grid points special snap points and lines object frames individual points
140. ally show useful text and you have a choice of several variations of the name e If you save a Writer document to HTML hyperlinks remain active but cross references do not Both remain active when the document is exported to PDF Using hyperlinks The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the document containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon choosing View Navigator or pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink 4 Inthe list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 Inthe Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink Navigator O amp amp B7 f fl amp amp GS Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy v Headings Copyright What is Writer The Writer interface Changing document views Moving quickly through a do DAS om ol ee oe ee S aed oe ae ee ae m 4 01046G53 Getting5tartedWithWrit x Figure 84 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator You can also use the Hyperlink dialog to insert and modify hyperlinks within and between documents See Chapter 12 Creating Web Pa
141. ame length The ellipse drawn is the largest ellipse that fits inside the imaginary rectangle drawn with the mouse 174 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Figure 163 Drawing an ellipse Here are some other ways to draw an ellipse or circle e To draw a circle hold down the Shift key while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse with the starting point at the center instead of the corner hold down the Alt key while dragging the mouse e To draw a circle with the starting point at the center hold down both the Alt and Shift keys while dragging the mouse e To draw an ellipse or circle that snaps to the nearest grid points hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the mouse If you first press and hold down the Ctrl key and then click on one of the icons for Line Rectangle Ellipse or Text a standard sized object is drawn automatically in the work area the size shape and color are all standard values These attributes can be changed later if desired Drawing curves The tools for drawing curves or polygons are on the toolbar that appears when you click arrow next to the Curve icon on the Drawing toolbar This toolbar contains eight tools Figure 164 If you move the mouse cursor over one of the icons a tooltip pops up with a description of the function Hovering the mouse pointer over this icon gives a tooltip of Curve If you convert the icon to a floating toolbar however the title is Lines as shown
142. amend or delete any existing incorrect information 28 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Address Company First Last name Initials Jared Kobos JK Street City State Zip Country Region Title Position Tel Home WWork Fax E mail Figure 19 Filling in user data General options The options on the LibreOffice General page are described below Help R Tips Extended tips W Help Agent Reset Help Agent Open Save dialogs Use LibreOffice dialogs Show ODMA DMS dialogs first Document status Allow to save document even when the document is not modified Year two digits Interpret as years between 1930 S and 2029 V Enable experimental unstable features Figure 20 Setting general options for LibreOffice Help Tips When Tips is active one or two words will appear when you hold the mouse pointer over an icon or field without clicking Help Extended tips When Extended tips is active a brief description of the function of a particular icon or menu command or a field on a dialog appears when you hold the mouse pointer over that item Help Agent To turn off the Help Agent similar to Microsoft s Office Assistant deselect this option To restore the default behavior click Reset Help Agent Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 29 Help formatting High contrast is an operating system setting that changes the system color scheme to improve readability To display Help
143. ample of a tear off toolbar Moving toolbars To move a docked toolbar place the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle the small vertical bar to the left of the toolbar hold down the left mouse button drag the toolbar to the new location and then release the mouse button Figure 3 To move a floating toolbar click on its title bar and drag it to a new location Figure 4 Handles of docked toolbars FA Untitled 2 LibreOffice Writer lt R b File Edit View Insert Format Table Tools Extensions Window Help A Boe eek eee K amp Default Liberation Sans 1 7 Figure 3 Moving a docked toolbar Tithe bar of floating toolbar Bullets and Numbering x oe RP cS Tf d te Ya is a IESS i C Figure 4 Moving a floating toolbar Floating toolbars LibreOffice includes several additional context sensitive toolbars whose defaults appear as floating toolbars in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is in a table a floating Table toolbar appears and when the cursor is in a numbered or bullet list the Bullets and Numbering toolbar appears You can dock these toolbars to the top bottom or side of the window if you wish see Moving toolbars above 16 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Docking floating windows and toolbars Toolbars and some windows such as the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window are dockable You can move resize or dock them to
144. an edge To dock a window or toolbar hold down the Contro key and double click on the frame of the floating window or in a vacant area near the icons at the top of the floating window to dock it in its last position To undock a window hold down the Contro key and double click on the frame or a vacant area near the icons at the top of the docked window Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar You can also add icons and create new toolbars as described in Chapter 14 To access a toolbar s customization options use the down arrow at the end of the toolbar or on its title bar Toolbar customization icons An 86 Te J ne Figure 5 Customizing toolbars To show or hide icons defined for the selected toolbar choose Visible Buttons from the drop down menu Visible icons are indicated by an outline around the icon Click on icons to select or deselect them Load URL New New DRougent From Template Open m hs Visible Buttons Customize Toolbar Dock Toolbar Dock All Toolbars Warthog Lock Toolbar Position Save Visible icons Close Toolbar save As Documents E mail Edit File Figure 6 Selection of visible toolbar icons Right click context menus You can quickly access many menu functions by right clicking on a paragraph graphics or other object A context menu will pop
145. an iiaa 188 inserting and ediung pictUlOS Sen ere ce ec ne ninien n n onesie eeeeen Deine ene EEEE EEEE RE R E EE 189 VEE ge ae D OO a ne a a 189 ED T 16 4 a E E en ence ten ornare 189 Adang commen O a 01g 618 eke eee een cee eee ne eee een eer he roe eee rrer eer errata ree ne et etree 189 Chapter 8 TT elec mses os eens E np ipl ee ns EREA NRR 191 PR OGG TOV or EN E EEE EEEE 192 PN O o O Aa E an EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EE ATE 193 Creamg anew ada IDa E sinp hna eee ee ree nee EEE ENa 193 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 5 Cileaing dalanao ANOS srren een Aa oT RR T aa 194 DENO TEON ND ee a ene E NE ESEE E E oe ences ee eee 202 Oi ellie oom da aE 6 es AE a 204 Aee Orar a a OU eara E 217 Using data sources in LibreOffiCE iserssiiiriisssiiinirisidairidreriniiiinn anki ia Seca t a ia E a eni 218 Emengo adain a TON sieaa aa iaai a ei 222 aE aO E AE MEE A E A EE EE E A ne A IEE A EAE E 224 Se AE E ee AES AE AA AE NAE AEE AIEEE S AEA TEET 232 Chapter 9 cerno a eT W T MA oe aa 241 a 51g a T E E E T S 242 E OI a E O 242 CUSTOMIZAUONS serrin iri ore apes Ea ns pete sen NRE E T EEEE EE 248 E O AEA E EEEE E EEE 250 Numerd Maia 8 fc UON enen E E EEE A aE ete er aTa 252 Chapter 10 PINTO EXPOring and E Mail RP ee ence nae a eee ne eee aE EE i 255 LEE 6 E 12 ee eee eee AE I eee ae eet EA eer E E T ee eee ee eee te 256 IO OG AEE E EEA I A EEA E PEA A A A A T O T oe 256 CONTON O NO eena E EE OE EEN EEA 256 REO r OF eeen ae ner AE
146. apter 4 Getting Started with Writer 73 Section or object information When the cursor is on a section heading or list item or when an object such as a picture or table is selected information about that item appears in this field Double clicking in this area opens a relevant dialog For details consult the Help or the Writer Guide View layout Click an icon to change between single page side by side and book layout views You can edit the document in any view Figure 63 View layouts single side by side book Zoom To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Zoom interacts with the selected view layout to determine how many pages are visible in the document window _e amp 100 Changing document views Writer has several ways to view a document Print Layout Web Layout and Full Screen To access these and other choices go to the View menu and click on the required view When in Full Screen view press the Esc key to return to either Print or Web Layout view When in Print Layout you can use both the Zoom slider and the View Layout icons on the status bar In Web Layout you can use the Zoom slider You can also choose View Zoom from the menu bar to display the Zoom amp View Layout dialog where you can set the same options as on the Statu
147. ask AS an example copied the FontWeight constants group from the LibreOffice web site The first column indicates the constant name Each name is followed by a space and a tab DONTKNOW The font weight is not specified known THIN specifies a 50 font weight ULTRALIGHT specifies a 60 font weight LIGHT specifies a 75 font weight SEMILIGHT specifies a 90 font weight NORMAL specifies a normal font weight SEMIBOLD specifies a 110 font weight BOLD specifies a 150 font weight ULTRABOLD specifies a 175 font weight BLACK specifies a 200 font weight want the first column to contain the numeric value the second column the name and the third column the description The desired work is easily accomplished for every row except for DONTKNOW and NORMAL which do not contain a numeric value but know that the values are O and 100 so I will enter those manually The data can be cleaned in multiple ways all of them easy The first example uses keystrokes that assume the cursor is at the start of the line with the text THIN 1 Use Tools Macros Record Macro to start recording 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 315 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s and then press S to add an upper case S
148. ational Support l WN International mailing lists http wiki documentfoundation org Local_Mailing_Lists Information in accessibility options are available Accessibility Options http www libreoffice org get help accessibility Support for installing and using LibreOffice on Mac OS X mae Suppor http www libreoffice org get help installation Paid support and training Alternatively you can pay for support services Service contracts can be purchased from a vendor or consulting firm specializing in LibreOffice Starting LibreOffice The most common way to launch any component of LibreOffice is by using the system menu the standard menu from which most applications are started On Windows it is called the Start menu On GNOME tt is called the Applications menu On KDE it is identified by the KDE logo On Mac OS X it is the Applications menu When LibreOffice was installed on your computer in most cases a menu entry for each component was added to your system menu The exact name and location of these menu entries depend on the operating system and graphical user interface Starting from an existing document You can start LibreOffice by double clicking the filename of an LibreOffice document in a file manager such as Windows Explorer The appropriate component of LibreOffice will start and the document will be loaded Note for Windows users If you have associated Microsoft Office file types with LibreOffice th
149. ay box to the left of the row of data you want to add That row should be highlighted like the second row of Figure 213 Click the Data to Fields icon circled This should fill the fields with the data from the row you chose Click another row and then click this icon again The data in the sentence changes to this selected row of data Save the document if you want to use it as an example later a E eH ei Ky O ad Friday June 26 530 50 00 11 00 Saturday Junez778 48 00 4 00 13 00 Dan Figure 213 Selected row in data source window Adding data in table format is a little easier and takes perhaps fewer steps SOME of the steps will be quite similar 1 Navigate to the place you want to place the table and click the location 2 Control Click the gray box to the left of each row of the data source that you want to bea row in your table when the rows are not consecutive To select consecutive rows click the gray box to the left of the top desired row and Shift click the bottom desired row 220 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Click the Data to text icon to open the Insert Database Columns dialog Figure 214 The Data to text icon is to the left of the Data to Fields icon in Figure 213 4 Move the fields you want in your table from the Database Columns list to the Table column s list e To place the fields in the order you select click the field and use the single arrow to move t
150. bar which is similar to the Formatting toolbar in Writer For more information see Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer in this book 168 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Liberation Sans 16 Bs U A E ATA a y w Drawing toolbar The Drawing toolbar is the most important toolbar in Draw It contains all the necessary functions for drawing various geometric and freehand shapes and for organizing them on the page Options toolbar Use the Options toolbar to activate or deactivate various drawing aids To display the Options toolbar select View Toolbars Options Options Figure 154 Options toolbar Choosing and defining colors Color Bar To display the Color Bar use View Toolbars Color Bar The toolbar then appears at the bottom of the workspace HEEEREEES EO ES ERED SERRE ORERERE ORES SE SSEREEEERL ESSE CREE Zl E San This toolbar lets you rapidly choose the color of the objects in your drawing The first box in the panel corresponds to transparency no color You can access several specialized color palettes in Draw as well as change individual colors to your own taste To do this choose Format Area or the pouring can icon on the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Area dialog Choose the Colors tab To load another palette click on the Load Color List button circled The file selector dialog asks you to choose one of the standard LibreOffice p
151. be installed into LibreOffice to add new functionality The official extension repository is located at http extensions libreoffice org These extensions are free of charge Installing extensions To install an extension follow these steps 1 Download an extension and save it anywhere on your computer 2 In LibreOffice select Tools Extension Manager from the menu bar In the Extension Manager dialog Figure 322 click Add 3 A file browser window opens Find and select the extension you want to install and click Open The extension begins installing You may be asked to accept a license agreement 4 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog To download extensions that are listed in the repository open the Extension Manager and click the Get more extensions online link Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 341 Extension Manager ia as English spelling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2010 03 16 LanguageTool Open source language checker 1 0 0 MySQL Connector 1 0 1 a The MySQL Connector for OpenOffice org installs a native MySQL database driver It ts faster seam PDF Import 1 0 3 Oracle gl The PDF Import Extension allows you to import and modify PDF documents Best results with 100 Report Builder 1 2 1 Oracle A Create with the Report Builder stylish smart looking database reports The flexible report editor ca Get more extensions
152. ble quotes around the table or query name The query will then add the rest of the double quotes as in Figure 230 Use the arithmetical symbol between the two More than one calculation can be done by using parentheses to group the arithmetical operations Step 9 Run the query and make some modification After we run the query to make sure it works correctly we will hide all of the fields that we do not need 230 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 1 Click the Run Query icon in the Design Query toolbar Figure 223 The results are in Distance End Reading Odometer Fuer Odometer End Reading Figure 231 FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD 6 430 178 7 r042 1 14 5 1 ae 19 570 1032 3 78 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 231 Result of running the fuel economy query Notice that not all of the last column label is visible because some of the labels are long We can fix this problem by using an alias for many of the fields The labels are replaced by their aliases 2 Add Aliases Type in the aliases as they are listed in Figure 232 End Reading End Reading Fuel FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading End Reading Quanity Begin End Fuel Economy Figure 232 Query table with aliases added 3 Run the query again The results are in Figure 233 Quanity Begin End End Reading FuellD F
153. breOffice 3 3 Inserting and editing pictures Draw contains a number of functions for editing raster graphics bitmaps for example photos and scanned images including import and and export as well as conversion from one format to another Draw can read in all the usual range of graphic file formats You can add pictures from several sources e The Gallery see Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork e Directly from a scanner Insert Picture Scan e Images created by another program including photographs from a digitial camera Insert Picture From File Draw provides tools for working with bitmap images the Picture toolbar and the bitmap image management palette However it does not have the same capabilities as the specialized raster graphics programs like Adobe Photoshop or The Gimp See Chapter 6 Editing Pictures in the Draw Guide for details and examples Working with 3D objects Although Draw does not match the functionality of the leading drawing or picture editing programs it is capable of producing and editing very good 3D drawings Draw offers two types of 3D objects 3D bodies and 3D shapes Depending on which type you choose there are different possibilities for further editing of the object rotation illumination perspective 3D shapes are simpler to set up and edit than 3D bodies but 3D bodies currently allow for more customization See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw
154. breaking space In cases where you do not want the hyphen to appear at the end of a line for example in a number such as 123 4567 you can press Control Shift minus sign to insert a non breaking hyphen To enter en and em dashes you can use the Replace dashes option on the Options tab under Tools AutoCorrect Options This option replaces two hyphens under certain conditions with the corresponding dash 80 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 is anen dash that is a dash the width of the letter n in the font you are using Type at least one character a Space one or two hyphens another space and at least one more letter then a space The one or two hyphens will be replaced by an en dash is an em dash that is a dash the width of the letter m in the font you are using Type at least one character two hyphens and at least one more character then a space The two hyphens will be replaced by an em dash See the Help for more details For other methods of inserting dashes see the Writer Guide Setting tab stops and indents The horizontal ruler shows both the default tab stops and any tab stops that you have defined Tab settings affect indentation of full paragraphs using the Increase Indent and Decrease Indent icons on the Formatting toolbar as well as indentation of parts of a paragraph by pressing the Tab key on the keyboard Using the default tab spacing can cause formatting problems if you shar
155. button in the Options section Hyphenation options set on the Writing Aids dialog are effective only if hyphenation is turned on through paragraph styles Manual hyphenation To manually hyphenate words do not use a normal hyphen which will remain visible even if the word is no longer at the end of a line when you add or delete text or change margins or font size Instead use a conditional hyphen which is visible only when required To insert a conditional hyphen inside a word click where you want the hyphen to appear and press Control hyphen The word will be hyphenated at this position when it is at the end of the line even if automatic hyphenation for this paragraph is switched off Formatting pages Writer provides several ways for you to control page layouts page styles columns frames tables and sections For more information see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide Page layout is usually easier if you show text object table and section boundaries in Tools Options LibreOffice Appearance and paragraph ends tabs breaks and other items in Tools Options LibreOffice Writer Formatting Aids Which layout method to choose The best layout method varies depending on what the final document should look like and what sort of information will be in the document Here are some examples 88 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 For a book similar to this user guide with one column o
156. can also be changed or removed later Slide Transition Many transitions are available including No Transition You can select the transition speed slow medium fast choose between an automatic or manual transition and choose how long the selected slide will be shown Workspace The Workspace has five tabs Normal Outline Notes Handout and Slide Sorter These five tabs are called View buttons The Workspace below the View buttons changes depending on the chosen view Figure 128 Workspace tabs Normal Toolbars Many toolbars can be used during slide creation they can be displayed or hidden by clicking View Toolbars and selecting from the menu 140 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 You can also select the icons that you wish to appear on each toolbar For more information refer to Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book Many of the toolbars in Impress are similar to the toolbars in Draw Refer to the Draw Guide for details on the functions available and how to use them Status bar The Status bar located at the bottom of the Impress window contains information that you may find useful when working on a presentation For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Impress in the mpress Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in T
157. can also insert hyperlinks using the Navigator and the Hyperlink dialog and you can modify all hyperlinks using the Hyperlink dialog as described in this section Using the Navigator The easiest way to insert a hyperlink to another part of the same document is by using the Navigator 1 Open the documents containing the items you want to cross reference 2 Open the Navigator by clicking its icon 2j by choosing View Navigator or by pressing F5 3 Click the arrow next to the Drag Mode icon and choose Insert as Hyperlink See Figure 296 4 Inthe list at the bottom of the Navigator select the document containing the item that you want to cross reference 5 In the Navigator list select the item that you want to insert as a hyperlink 6 Drag the item to where you want to insert the hyperlink in the document The name of the item is inserted in the document as an active hyperlink 5 Navigator aE 6 oe Tag Insert as Hyperlink Insert as Link Insert as Copy Headings Copyright Introduction 7 Relative and absolute hyperli Saving Calc spreadsheets as Saving Impress presentations Figure 296 Inserting a hyperlink using the Navigator When using the Navigator to hyperlink to an object such as a graphic to have the hyperlink show useful text such as 2009 Sales Graph you need to give such objects useful names instead of leaving them as the default names Graphics6 or you n
158. cecccecccecceecceuccusecueecuseceeccusecuseenassuesaceeeess 304 Saving Impress presentations AS WED PAGES 1 cscccceecseenceeneecneecnescnescneucneseuusssusssusssusssassenss 305 Saving Draw documents as web DAG CS ase ds csv ance cenceasencosenscesrataceieeaieueeldaesadesaimicansieacesenataenensae 308 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Chapter 13 cerno aa I roca cre eea 309 bo Cg gol lolol ek Semmens ee IA en ee ee nee eee Ae Tne eet eee eee E NA eek een er ret her oe ee eee A CeO eer tenet 310 Co T E E non ee etc e een y errno ne ee 915 Sometimes the macro recorder TANS scssccadeteeeoncteset aia leanesideslscdbneboeselebatsenieeaieseaeddceseebeiansoniardes 318 Macro organiza aap ccs een En nir ee acted EE ESETA EEEE AAEE ATN 319 PU FN CD aa EEE E EE EEEE E EE EER E 32i E r E A A E EE EE EEE EEEE EEEE EAE EAEE 327 Writing macros without the rOcOrdel issisirisisirisrinsn iin aE aa 328 T O T O eea TE E E E E 328 Chapter 14 Bh omna no GOEOD E e EE E ee eee 331 P 816 0 EE E E AEE E EEE E E 332 Customizing Menu Conen rac sec oclanr go cteac once ec at EE ade EE A A E E E i iA 332 Cu ONMO ODA ep ia ian eiia 335 A SONNO SONCU KOV ieri ee eno i er en en Pe Eee ene meee Serer ote eee ee nee 339 ASSiONNG MaTOS TO OVEN keane ee Annee ene ee PE eae nee eee ee eee eee eae ener 341 Adding WIN CUOMAIIY WHT CXICN GIONS osc gensssrecsrssestoceiieasaceidesaneebastearensddsrnaeieteheiebbetanendsaosaa rinit 341 Appendix A PO sce ipanaa ecient
159. cells then cells are added If a range contains cells that already have content then the sort fails Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 129 Custom sort order Select the box then choose one of the sort orders defined in Tools Options Spreadsheet Sort Lists from the drop down list Direction Sets whether rows or columns are sorted The default is to sort by columns unless the selected cells are in a single column Printing Printing from Calc is much the same as printing from other LibreOffice components See Chapter 10 but some details are different especially regarding preparation for printing Using print ranges Print ranges have several uses including printing only a specific part of the data or printing selected rows or columns on every page For more about using print ranges see Chapter 6 Printing Exporting and E mailing in the Calc Guide Defining a print range To define a new print range or modify an existing print range 1 Highlight the range of cells that comprise the print range 2 Choose Format Print Ranges Define The page break lines display on the screen You can check the print range by using File Page Preview LibreOffice will only display the cells in the print range Adding to the print range After defining a print range you can add more cells to it This allows multiple separate areas of the same sheet to be printed while not printing the whole sheet After you ha
160. ch one individually This may be confusing at times because although there may be a column break set on the page when you go to Edit Manual Break Column break may be grayed out In order to remove the break you have to be in the cell next to the break For example if you set the column break while you are in H15 you can not remove it if you are in cell D15 However you can remove it from any cell in column H Headers and footers Headers and footers are predefined pieces of text that are printed at the top or bottom of a sheet outside of the sheet area Headers are set in the same way as footers Headers and footers are assigned to a page style You can define more than one page style for a spreadsheet and assign different page styles to different sheets For more about page styles see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Setting a header or footer To set a header or footer 1 Navigate to the sheet that you want to set the header or footer for Choose Format Page 2 On the Page Style dialog select the Header or Footer tab See Figure 124 3 Select the Header on option From here you can also set the margins the spacing and height for the header or footer You can check the AutoFit height box to automatically adjust the height of the header or footer Margin Changing the size of the left or right margin adjusts how far the header or footer is from the side of the page Spacing Spacing affect
161. cm a Horizontal 10 point s 0 50cm 5 Vertical 10 point s Snap position L_ When creating or moving objects Extend edges L When rotating 15 00 degrees Point reduction 15 00 degrees A 5 Pixels Figure 157 Setting grid options In the dialog shown in Figure 157 you can set the following parameters e Vertical and horizontal spacing of the dots in the grid You can also change the unit of measurement used in the general Draw options Tools Options LibreOffice Draw General e The resolution is the size of the squares or rectangles in the grid If the resolution is Horizontal 1 cm Vertical 2 cm the grid consists of rectangles 2 cm high and 1 cm wide e Subdivisions are additional points that appear along the sides of each rectangle or square in the grid Objects snap to subdivisions as well as to the corners of the grid e The pixel pix element size of the snap area defines how close you need to bring an object to a snap point or line before it will snap to it Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 171 Changing the color of the grid points The default grid dots are light gray which can be hard to see To change the color of the grid points choose Tools Options LibreOffice Appearance Color scheme Scheme LibreOffice AWE Delete Custom colors On User interface elements Motes background Drawing Presentation Grid Identifier Comment Number String Figure 158 Changing the
162. control transparency gradients in the same manner as color gradients Both types of gradient can be used together With a transparency gradient the direction and degree of an object s fill color changes from opaque to transparent in a regular gradient the fill changes from one color to another but the degree of transparency remains the same See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Duplication Duplication makes copies of an object while applying a set of changes such as color or rotation to the duplicates The result of a duplication is a new group of objects To start duplication click on an object or group and choose Edit Duplicate The dialog shown in Figure 172 appears When the options chosen in that dialog are applied to a blue rectangle they produce the following result 186 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Duplicate Number of copies Placement A axis Y axis Default Angle Enlargement Start End Figure 172 Duplicating an object Cross fading Cross fading transforms a shape from one form to another The result is a new group of objects including the start and end points and the intermediate steps To carry out a cross fade first select two objects hold the Shift key while selecting each object in turn and then choose Edit Cross fading On the Cross fading dialog choose the number of increments transition steps You probably want to have Cro
163. corder can correctly generate a macro there is an add in created by Paolo Mantovani which converts Calc macros when they are recorded The final code manipulates LibreOffice objects rather than generating dispatches This can be very useful for learning the object model You can download the macro recorder from Paolo s web site directly or from the OOo Macros web site You should check both places to see which contains the latest version http www paolo mantovani org downloads DispatchToApiRecorder http www ooomacros org user php Macro organization In LibreOffice macros are grouped in modules modules are grouped in libraries and libraries are grouped in library containers A library is usually used as a major grouping for either an entire category of macros or for an entire application Modules usually split functionality such as user interaction and calculations Individual macros are subroutines and functions Library Container Library 3 Module 2 Macro 1 Figure 303 Macro Library hierarchy Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 319 A computer scientist would use Figure 304 to precisely describe the situation The text 1 means one or more and O means zero or more The black triangle means composed of or contains e A library container contains one or more libraries and each library is contained in one library container e Alibrary contains zero or more modules and each module is cont
164. cription Test Data Style E mail J Web site information Copyright notice Preview Created 26 05 05 Modified 26 05 05 7 Chose where to save the file and preview the page if you wish Click Finish Web Wizard Steps Where do you want to publish your web site Introduction Click Preview to see a preview in your browser Documents Preview Main layout Publish the new web site To a local Folder C Documents and Settings Jean Hollis weberi Documents My Websites Layout details Style To a FIP archive Web site information Preview Publishing via FTP Proxy is not supported Save settings recommended Save as Web Wizard Settings To edit or view the document s underlying HTML code open the document and then choose View HTML Source or click the HTML Source icon on the Main toolbar Saving Calc spreadsheets as web pages Calc can save files as HTML documents As for Writer choose File Save As and select HTML Document or choose File Wizards Web Page 304 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 If the file contains more than one sheet the additional sheets will follow one another in the HTML file Links to each sheet will be placed at the top of the document Calc also allows the insertion of links directly into the spreadsheet using the Hyperlink dialog Saving Impress presentations as web pages You can export presentations as Macromedia Flash files choose File
165. cro will attempt to work on that document primarily because it uses ThisComponent for its actions Every library container contains a library named Standard It is better to create your own libraries with meaningful names than to use the Standard library Not only are meaningful names easier to manage but they can also be imported into other library containers whereas the Standard library cannot 320 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 LibreOffice allows you to import libraries into a library container but it will not allow you to overwrite the library named Standard Therefore if you store your macros in the Standard library you cannot import them into another library container Just as it makes good sense to give your libraries meaningful names it is prudent to use meaningful names for your modules By default LibreOffice uses names such as Module1 Feel free to use your own meaningful name As you create your macros you must decide where to store them Storing a macro in a document is useful if the document will be shared and you want the macro to be included with the document Macros stored in the application library container named My Macros however are globally available to all documents Macros are not available until the library that contains them is loaded The Standard library and Template library however are automatically loaded A loaded library is displayed differently from a library that is not loaded To
166. cs from many common formats and save them in over 20 formats including PNG HTML PDF and Flash Base database Base provides tools for day to day database work within a simple interface It can create and edit forms reports queries tables views and relations so that managing a connected database is much the same as in other popular database applications Base provides many new features such as the ability to analyze and edit relationships from a diagram view Base incorporates HSQLDB as its default relational database engine It can also use dBASE Microsoft Access MySQL or Oracle or any ODBC compliant or JOBC compliant database Base also provides support for a subset of ANSI 92 SQL Math formula editor Math is LibreOffice s formula or equation editor You can use it to create complex equations that include symbols or characters not available in standard font sets While it is most commonly used to create formulas in other documents such as Writer and Impress files Math can also work as a 10 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 standalone tool You can save formulas in the standard Mathematical Markup Language MathML format for inclusion in web pages and other documents not created by LibreOffice The advantages of LibreOffice Here are some of the advantages of LibreOffice over other office suites No licensing fees LibreOffice is free for anyone to use and distribute at no cost Many features that are available
167. d So we will change them by editing the text in the label The table wizard in Base contains suggested fields which are single words often consisting of two separate words Table names in the wizard have been that way also However you can use multiple words as the name of a field label or table We will do so when we create a list box for each of the payment type controls 1 Control click the SnackNo label Do one of the following Right click the SnackNo label and select Control from the pop up menu e Or click the Control icon in the Form Control toolbar Figure 194 2 The dialog that opens is labeled Properties Label Field It contains all of the properties of the selected label In the Label selection edit the label to Snack No e Close the Properties dialog 3 Use the same procedure to change these labels as well BPayment to Payment LPayment to Payment SPayment to Payment Miscellaneous to Misc SnackCost to Snack Cost MPayment to Payment MiscPayment to Misc Payment and MiscNotes to Misc Notes You can modify all of the listings in the Properties window For example if you change the Alignment from Left to Center the word or words in the label are centered within the label When you have some time you might want to experiment with different settings just to see the results you get Step 5 Change the widths of the labels and fields We want the following controls to be 2 cm wide 0 8 inches B
168. d What you need to do is associate the document with the different template You can do this in two ways In both cases for best results the names of styles should be the same in the existing document and the new template If they are not you will need to use Search and Replace to replace old styles with new ones See Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer for more about replacing styles using Search and Replace Method 1 This method includes any graphics and wording such as legal notices that exists in the new template as well as including styles If you do not want this material you need to delete it 1 Use File New Templates and Documents Choose the template you want If the template has unwanted text or graphics in it delete them 2 Open the document you want to change It opens in a new window Press Control A to select everything in the document Paste into the blank document created in step 1 3 Update the table of contents if there is one Save the file Method 2 Writer only This method does not include any graphics or text from the new template it simply includes styles from the new template and establishes an association between the template and the document 1 Download the Template Changer extension from http extensions libreoffice org and install it as described on page 64 2 Close and reopen LibreOffice Now the File Templates menu has two new choices in Writer Assign Template current document an
169. d an icon a shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Object information Displays information relevant to the cursor s position or the selected element of the document Double clicking in this area usually opens a relevant dialog Zoom slider and percent To change the view magnification drag the Zoom slider or click on the and signs or right click on the zoom level percent to pop up a list of magnification values from which to choose Double clicking on the zoom level percent opens the Zoom amp View Layout dialog 18 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 What are all these things called The terms used in LibreOffice for most parts of the user interface the parts of the program you see and use in contrast to the behind the scenes code that actually makes it work are the same as for most other programs A dialog is a special type of window Its purpose is to inform you of something or request input from you or both It provides controls for you to use to specify how to carry out an action The technical names for common controls are shown in Figure 9 not shown is the list box from which you select an item In most cases we do not use the technical terms in this book but it is useful to know them because the Help and other sources of information often use them In most cases you can interact only with the dialog not the document itself as long as the dialog remains open When you close t
170. d automatically by LibreOffice You can choose to show all styles or other groups of styles for example only custom styles Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 53 Paragraph Styles fat A W fra f ma New Style from Selection Update Style Character Styles Load Styles Frame Styles Fill Format Mode Page Styles Figure 46 The Styles and Formatting window for Writer showing paragraph Styles Using Fill Format Mode Use Fill Format to apply a style to many different areas quickly without having to go back to the Styles and Formatting window and double click every time This method is quite useful when you need to format many scattered paragraphs cells or other items with the same style 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and select the style you want to apply 2 Click the Fill Format Mode icon 3 To apply a paragraph page or frame style hover the mouse over the paragraph page or frame and click To apply a character style hold down the mouse button while selecting the characters Clicking on a word applies the character style for that word Repeat step 3 until you made all the changes for that style 4 To quit Fill Format mode click the Fill Format Mode icon again or press the Esc key When this mode is active a right click anywhere in the document undoes the last Fill Format action Be careful not to accidentally right click and thus undo actions you want to keep Using the Apply
171. d Assign Template folder In Calc Impress and Draw only the Assign Template folder choice is available 3 Open the document whose template you want to change Choose File Templates Assign Template current document 4 Inthe Select Template window find and select the required template and click Open 5 Save the document If you now look in File Properties you will see the new template listed at the bottom of the General page 66 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Organizing templates LibreOffice can only use templates that are in LibreOffice template folders You can create new LibreOffice template folders and use them to organize your templates For example you might have one template folder for report templates and another for letter templates You can also import and export templates To begin choose File Templates Organize from the main menu The Template Management dialog opens All the actions made by the Commands button in the Template Management dialog can be made as well by right clicking on the templates or the folders Creating a template folder To create a template folder 1 Inthe Template Management dialog click any folder 2 Click the Commands button and choose New from the drop down menu A new folder called Untitled appears 3 Type a name for the new folder and then press Enter LibreOffice saves the folder with the name that you entered Deleting a template folder
172. d option 3 For Handouts you can then choose how many slides to print per page and the order in which they are printed 4 Click the Print button Range and copies All slides Number of copies n O Slides 5 ET Collate A Sax Print Document Slides per page Default va Order Left to right then down v Printing a brochure In Writer Impress and Draw you can print a document with two pages on each side of a sheet of paper arranged so that when the printed pages are folded in half the pages are in the correct order to form a booklet or brochure Plan your document so it will look good when printed half size choose appropriate margins font sizes and so on You may need to experiment To print a brochure on a single sided printer 1 Choose File Print 2 Inthe Print dialog click Properties 262 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Check the printer is set to the same orientation portrait or landscape as specified in the page setup for your document Usually the orientation does not matter but it does for brochures Click OK to return to the Print dialog 4 Select the Page layout tab in the Print dialog 5 Select the Brochure option 6 Inthe Page sides section select Back sides left pages option from the Include drop down list LibreOffice Writer ki Layout Pages per sheet Order left to right then down 1 C Draw a border around each page Brochure Page sides Include
173. database This section is an exercise in explaining how the Wizard works The Wizard permits the fields of the table to come from more than one suggested table We will create a table with fields from three different suggested tables in the Wizard Every table requires a Primary key field What this field does will be explained later We will use this field to number our entries and want that number to automatically A increase as we add each entry Click Use Wizard to Create Table This opens the Table Wizard Figure 176 Step 1 Select fields We will use the CD Collection Sample table in the Personal category to select the fields we need 1 Category Select Personal The Sample Tables dropdown list changes to a list of personal sample tables 2 Sample tables Select CD Collection The Available fields box changes to a list of available fields for this table 3 Selected fields Using the gt button move the following fields from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window in this order CollectionID AlbumTitle Artist DatePurchased Format Notes and NumberofTracks 4 Selected Fields from another sample table Click Business as the Category Select Employees from the dropdown list of sample tables Use the gt button to move the Photo field from the Available fields window to the Selected fields window It will be at the bottom of the list directly below the NumberofTracks field 5 If you make a mistake in
174. derstand how and why the macro recorder frequently fails The primary offender is related to the dispatch framework and its relationship to the macro recorder The dispatch framework The purpose of the dispatch framework is to provide a uniform access to components documents for commands that usually correspond to menu items can use File Save from the menu the shortcut keys Ctrl S or click on the Save toolbar icon All of these commands are translated into the same dispatch command which is sent to the current document The dispatch framework can also be used to send commands back to the UI User Interface For example after saving the document the File Save command is disabled As soon as the document has been changed the File Save command is enabled If we see a dispatch command it is text such as uno InsertObject or uno GoToStartOfLine The command is sent to the document s frame and the frame passes on the command until an object is found that can handle the command How the macro recorder uses the dispatch framework The macro recorder records the generated dispatches The recorder is relatively simple to implement and the same commands that are issued are recorded for later use The problem is that not all dispatched commands are complete For example inserting an object generates the following code dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertObject 0 Array It is not possible to specify
175. dialog Using the Navigator The Navigator lists objects contained in a document collected into categories For example in Writer it shows Headings Tables Text frames Comments Graphics Bookmarks and other items as shown in Figure 13 In Calc it shows Sheets Range Names Database Ranges Graphics Drawing Objects and other items In Impress and Draw it shows Slides Pictures and other items Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 23 To open the Navigator click its icon 2 on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View Navigator on the menu bar You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main LibreOffice window or leave it floating see Docking floating windows and toolbars on page 17 Navigator E Tables Text frames Graphics llb OLE objects s9 Bookmarks Sections Hyperlinks References t Indexes Comments EA Draw objects Untitled active Figure 13 The Navigator Click the marker or arrow by any of the categories to display the list of objects in that category To hide the list of categories and show only the toolbars at the top click the List Box On Off icon Click this icon again to show the list box The Navigator provides several convenient ways to move around a document and find items in it When a category is showing the list of objects in it double click on an object to jump directly to that object s location in the document Objects are much easier
176. distorting shadows and transparency can be found in Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes of the Draw Guide Flip an object Select an object and click on the Flip icon bo You will see a dashed line through the middle of the object This dashed line is the axis of symmetry The object will be flipped around this line Move one or both ends of the line with your mouse to set the orientation of the axis Then grab any one of the eight green handles and move it across to the other side of the dashed line The new position of the figure is shown dashed until the mouse is released If you hold down the Shift key while moving the line the line will rotate in 45 degree increments Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 185 Mirror copies Move the axis of symmetry to the desired location of the mirror axis Copy the object to the clipboard Flip the object then click on an empty area of the Draw screen in order to deselect the object Paste from the clipboard to put a copy of the object in its original location and now you have a mirror copy lt gt O O Distorting an image There are three tools on the Effects menu that let you drag the corners and edges of an object to distort the image The Distort tool distorts an object in perspective the Set to Circle slant and Set in Circle perspective tools both create a pseudo three dimensional effect See Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Dynamic gradients You can
177. document Instructions for creating forms using Design view will be described in the Database Guide Accessing other data sources LibreOffice allows data sources to be accessed and then linked into LibreOffice documents For example a mail merge links an external document containing a list of names and addresses into a letter with one copy of the letter being generated for each entry To access a data source that is not a odb file 1 File New Database opens the Database Wizard window 2 Select Connect to an existing database Click the arrow next to the Database type field and select the database type from the dropdown list Click Next 3 Click Browse and select the database Click Next 4 Accept the default settings Register the database for me and Open the database for editing Click Finish Name and save the database in the location of your choice Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 217 Accessing a spreadsheet as a data source Accessing a spreadsheet is similar to accessing other databases 1 Choose File New Database 2 Select Connect to an existing database Select Spreadsheet as the Database type 3 Click Browse to locate the spreadsheet you want to access If the spreadsheet is password protected check the Password required box Click Next 4 Ifthe spreadsheet requires a user s name enter it If a password is also required check its box Click Next Using this method of accessing a spre
178. ds button and choose Set As Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File New the document will be created from this template Although many important settings can be changed in the Options dialog See Chapter 2 for example default fonts and page size more advanced settings Such as page margins can only be changed by replacing the default template with a new one Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 65 Resetting the default template To re enable LibreOffice s Default template for a document type as the default 1 Inthe Template Management dialog click any folder in the box on the left 2 Click the Commands button and choose Reset Default Template from the drop down menu The next time that you create a document by choosing File New the document will be created from LibreOffice s Default template for that document type Associating a document with a different template At times you might want to associate a document with a different template or perhaps you are working with a document that did not start from a template One of the major advantages of using templates is the ease of updating styles in more than one document as described on page 63 If you update styles by loading a new set of styles froma different template as described on page 59 the document has no association with the template from which the styles were loaded so you cannot use this metho
179. e com sun star frame DispatchHelper rem 2 Press Ctrl Right Arrow to move the cursor to the start of specifies dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 3 Press Backspace twice to remove the tab and the space dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array a ll a ak aaa Na ea dispatcher executeDispatch document uno SwBackspace 0 Array rem 4 Press Tab to add the tab without the space after the constant name dim args4 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args4 0 Name Text args4 0 Value CHR 9 dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args4 rem 5 Press Delete to delete the lower case s dispatcher executeDispatch document uno Delete 0 Array 316 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 rem 5 and then press S to add an upper case S dim args6 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyValue args6 0 Name Text args6 0 Value S dispatcher executeDispatch document uno InsertText 0 args6 rem 6 Press Ctrl Right Arrow twice to move the cursor to the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array POM a aged gee tel oh E cl a gd a als a a tl dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoToNextWord 0 Array rem 7 Press Ctrl Shift Right Arrow to select the number dispatcher executeDispatch document uno WordRightSel 0
180. e 181 Make sure you make the Date field the primary key before closing Right click the gray box to the left of Date and select Primary key from the menu Save the table and name it Vacations Close the Vacations table 200 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Field Name Field Type Date Date DATE Odometer Number NUMERIC Odometer reading Motel Number NUMERIC Tolls Number NUMERIC total tolls Breakfast Number NUMERIC BPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Lunch Number NUMERIC LPayment Text VARCHAR payment type Supper Number NUMERIC SPayment Text VARCHAR payment type SnackNo Number NUMERIC SnackCost Number NUMERIC SnPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for snacks Miscellaneous Number NUMERIC misc costs MPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for motel MiscNotes Memo LONGVARCHE a MiscPayment Text VARCHAR payment type for miscellaneous Figure 181 Fields in Vacations table Creating tables for the list box When the same information can be used in several fields design a table for each type of information Each table will contain two fields the information field and D in that order You must create these tables with the information field listed first and the ID field listed last Failure to do so will produce the wrong results For my Payment table use Name and ID as my fields with Dan Kevin a
181. e 205 Select the fields of your subform Tables or queries Available fields Fields in the form FulID Date FuelCast FuelQuanity Odameter PaymentT ype T Figure 190 Selecting fields of a subform Step 4 Get joined fields This step is for tables or queries for which no relationship has been defined Because we have already defined the relationship the wizard skips this step It is possible to create a relationship between two tables that is based upon more than one pair of fields How to do that and why is discussed in the Base Guide When selecting a pair of fields from two tables to use as a relationship they have to have the same field type That is why we used the Date field from both tables both their field types are Date DATE Whether a single pair of fields from two tables are chosen as the relationship or two or more pairs are chosen certain requirements must be met for the form to work A e No field from the subform can be the Primary key for its table FuellD cannot be used e Each pair of joined fields must have the same file type e One of the fields from the main form must be the Primary key for its table Date would have to be used Step 5 Arrange controls Arrange the controls on your form Each control in a form consists of two parts label and field This step in creating the form determines where a control s label and field are placed in relationship with each
182. e Chapter 4 for more information Defining a sequence of styles You can set up one paragraph style so that when you press Enter at the end of that paragraph the following paragraph automatically has the style you wish applied to it For example you could define a Heading 1 paragraph to be followed by a Text Body paragraph A more complex example would be Title followed by Author followed by Abstract followed by Heading 1 followed by Text Body By setting up these sequences you can avoid manually applying styles in most cases 70 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer Word Processing with LibreOffice What is Writer Writer is the word processor component of LibreOffice In addition to the usual features of a word processor spelling check thesaurus hyphenation autocorrect find and replace automatic generation of tables of contents and indexes mail merge and others Writer provides these important features e Templates and styles See Chapter 3 e Page layout methods including frames columns and tables e Embedding or linking of graphics spreadsheets and other objects e Built in drawing tools e Master documents to group a collection of documents into a single document e Change tracking during revisions e Database integration including a bibliography database e Export to PDF including bookmarks see Chapter 10 e And many more Th
183. e Image files including photos drawings scanned images and others e Diagrams created using LibreOffice s drawing tools e Charts created using LibreOffice s Chart component See Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork in this book and Chapter 8 Working with Graphics in the Writer Guide Printing See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing in this book and Chapter 5 Printing Exporting Faxing and E mailing in the Writer Guide for details on previewing pages before printing selecting print options printing in black and white on a color printer printing brochures and other printing features Using mail merge Writer provides very useful features to create and print e Multiple copies of a document to send to a list of different recipients form letters e Mailing labels e Envelopes All these facilities use a registered data source a spreadsheet or database containing the name and address records and other information Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge in the Writer Guide describes the process 94 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Tracking changes to a document You can use several methods to keep track of changes made to a document 1 Make your changes to a copy of the document stored in a different folder or under a different name or both then use Writer to combine the two files and show the differences Choose Edit Compare Document This technique is particularly useful if you are the onl
184. e center of snack area Type the heading Snacks Use the Enter key to move the cursor between the Supper control and the subform Use the spacebar to move the cursor to the center of the subform Type the heading Fuel Data If you know how to use styles you can open the Styles and Formatting window using F11 Right clicking the Heading 2 paragraph style allows you to modify the appearance of all three headings See Chapter 6 of the Writer Guide for details Step 10 Change the background of a form The background for a form can be a color or a graphic picture You can use any of the colors in the Color Table at Tools Options LibreOffice Colors If you know how to create custom colors you can use them You can also use a picture graphic file as the background If you choose a dark background you many need to change many of the labels and headings so they can be seen 1 2 Select the labels of the top row of controls a Control click the Date label b Control shift click the rest of the labels of the top row The border will gradually grow to the right as you do this until all the labels are enclosed in it Date Odometer Tolls Motel Payment Misc Misc Payment NE SO a a E SNS NNR Figure 205 Selecting multiple labels at one time c Click the Control icon in the Design Form toolbar to open the Properties dialog d Change the Background color selection from Default to Light cyan This is a dropdown
185. e documents with other people If you use the default tab spacing and then send the document to someone else who has chosen a different default tab spacing tabbed material will change to use the other person s settings This may cause major formatting problems Instead of using the defaults define your own tab settings as described in this section To define indents and tab settings for one or more selected paragraphs double click on a part of the ruler that is not between the left and right indent icons to open the Indents amp Spacing page of the Paragraph dialog Double click anywhere between the left and right indent icons on the ruler to open the Tabs page of the Paragraph dialog A better strategy is to define tabs for the paragraph style See Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide for more information Using tabs to space out material on a page is not recommended Depending on what you are trying to accomplish a table is usually a better choice Changing the default tab stop interval Any changes to the default tab setting will affect the existing default tab stops in any document you open afterward as well as tab stops you insert after making the change To set the measurement unit and the spacing of default tab stop intervals go to Tools Options LibreOffice Writer General settings Measurement unit Tab stops 0 50 m Figure 73 Selecting a default tab stop interval You can also set or change the measure
186. e ene 26 Chapter 2 STO OO ES oats EA E ges AE eae cea A esas EE E ete eee 27 CROOSINOODIIONS for all of LIDIA OTIC sec sesetsdeceaticccencasscbieied iedendstessemdeeedteeesbcuciadesiicesccseantnade 28 Choosing options for loading ANA SAVING COCUIMENNS 4sccscccseecneecneecueseueeeesesssesseessnssseesaes 40 Choosing language Seling ee ee oe en ee ean ee nk ee ee eee eee eer tree eet tee mae 45 OS emne OD ON aa ssa cece nna E n NE e EAE na E rae I nTa 47 Controlling LibreOffice s AutoCorrect TUN CHONG oseisissastendinneceantemerateldtnarseu ber cteiencencddonenedeerarsebees 48 Chapter 3 dong omes and TOMDI OS sasra se gnees sedan paved te esen EEE EEE 51 Wa e a ONDE ian E E a E SEEE 52 wna are SVS aseinaan a Ea 52 AVG TEE E E N EN EA E OEE A AAT A AA Cee A A A S A eee eee EE 53 E EUS EE i E E A EEE EEAS E E A E AEAEE E EAEE E 55 Oi ek tial NEw CUSTOM SIVE Seir annn E E h Aa 56 Sea e E E o E cho Rake eee EE ATA AEE E AA T E NA A AA A er marr ae ne 57 Da g16 STi chs a E E 60 Using a template to create a COCUIINGIN od scsnscaccahouesnsteasshoseenineeantusesceanencnsecdeeeelassseeencieeeacebes 60 Creating TCT OC assessed tncen Ses od enn ce sedientrtcqeneasecienneciuesetenrtadnctdacs seven veiadecedieearenesaydesiusecancedeehaese 61 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Adding templates using the Extension M maQet c1cccscccscccssccusccusccusccueccuscauecauscauenanenenesenenes 64 Senno adoru os 09 6 aan een oe eo
187. e finished be sure to A deselect all the sheets except the one you want to edit Ctr click on a sheet tab to select or deselect the sheet 120 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Validating cell contents When creating spreadsheets for other people to use you may want to make sure they enter data that is valid or appropriate for the cell You can also use validation in your own work as a guide to entering data that is either complex or rarely used Fill series and selection lists can handle some types of data but they are limited to predefined information To validate new data entered by a user select a cell and use Data Validity to define the type of contents that can be entered in that cell For example a cell might require a date ora whole number with no alphabetic characters or decimal points or a cell may not be left empty Depending on how validation is set up the tool can also define the range of contents that can be entered and provide help messages that explain the content rules you have set up for the cell and what users should do when they enter invalid content You can also set the cell to refuse invalid content accept it with a warning or start a macro when an error is entered See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for more information Editing data Editing data is done in much the same way as entering data The first step is to select the cell containing the data t
188. e from the context menu This opens the Line dialog Common line properties In most cases the property you want to change is the line s style solid dashed invisible and so on its color or its width These options are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 You can also edit these properties from the Line dialog where you can also change the line s transparency Figure 171 illustrates different degrees of transparency Figure 171 The vertical lines have different levels of transparency 0 25 and 50 Drawing arrows Arrowheads and other line endings usually referred to collectively as arrows are t a line property Select a line and click on the Arrow Style icon from the Line and Filling toolbar This opens the Arrowheads menu Several types of arrowheads are available Each end of the line can have a different arrowhead or no arrowhead Arrowheads are only applicable to lines They have no effect on an object s border Customizing line and arrow styles You can modify the line and arrow styles and create your own See Chapter 4 Changing Object Attributes in the Draw Guide for details Editing the inside fill of an object The LibreOffice term f
189. e gie iii Form controls Right pa Ci Comments onb General dod pa View Fage background Brochure i End of document Formatting Aids i Grid C Print text in black 0 End of page nasi Fonts Western Fl Hidden text Table Text placeholder Changes Compatibility Other AutoCaption N PAE ea a T RE Mail Merge E mail Print automatically inserted blank pages LibreOffice Writer Web Paper tray from printer settings LibreOffice Base Chart Ea Internet 0 E amp PENERE Figure 319 Setting up LibreOffice for sending faxes 4 Click the arrow icon at the end of the Standard toolbar In the drop down menu choose Customize Toolbar The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog appears Figure 317 Click Add 5 On the Add Commands dialog Figure 320 select Documents in the Category list then select Send Default Fax in the Commands list Click Add Now you can see the new icon in the Commands list 6 In the Commands list click the up or down arrow button to position the new icon where you want it Click OK and then click Close Your toolbar now has a new icon to send the current document as a fax Category Commands Application Templates View N Properties Edit Options BASIC Insert h Printer Settings Add Close Recheck Document Help Format ca epn T Navigate Controls aN Send Default Fa Table Drawing Graphic 4 ul Versions Figure 320 Adding a Send Fax command to a toolbar
190. e image into the Writer document and drop it where you want it to appear A faint vertical line marks where the image will be dropped This method embeds Saves a copy of the image file in the Writer document To link the file instead of embedding it hold down the Contro Shift keys while dragging the image Insert Picture dialog 1 Click in the LibreOffice document where you want the image to appear 2 Choose Insert Picture From File from the menu bar 3 On the Insert Picture dialog navigate to the file to be inserted select it and click Open At the bottom of the dialog are two options Preview and Link Choose Preview to view a thumbnail of the selected image on the right so you can verify that you have the correct file See below for the use of Link 278 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Insert picture D Profiles rgs02c My Documents My Pictures i ci a Date modified oe 17 8KB 06 20 2006 21 31 08 s ned20qi jog Graphics jpg 5779 Bytes 07 05 2006 20 39 06 E4 republican jpg Graphics jpg 723KB 06 08 2006 18 01 4 E s2_01 jpq Graphics jpa 8043 Bytes 04 16 2006 18 45 5 a tn_005 jpa jpg Graphics jpg 1877 Bytes 06 10 2006 04 29 1 Siu im Sere a United States gif Graphics gif 4086 Bytes 04 11 2006 22 03 1 al fo vl z ehe File name lincoln _creek_rest_photo jpg B Co Style cc comes File type lt All formats gt bmp dxf emt eps gif jpg jpeq
191. e main menu File in the Menu list and then in the Menu Content section of the dialog select the submenu Send in the Entries list and use the arrow keys to move it up or down in the sequence In addition to renaming you can specify a keyboard shortcut that allows you to select a menu command when you press A t an underlined letter in a menu command 1 Select a menu entry 2 Click the Modify button and select Rename 3 Add a tilde in front of the letter that you want to use as an accelerator For example to select the Save All command by pressing Alt V after opening the File menu using A t F enter Sa ve All Be careful when using these shortcuts In the example above if the File menu is not already open then pressing A t V opens the View menu if another other menu is open Alt V may activate another command Adding a command to a menu You can add commands to the supplied menus and to menus you have created On the Customize dialog select the menu in the Menu list and click the Add button in the Menu Content section of the dialog On the Add Commands dialog Figure 316 select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence Modifying menu entries In addition to changing the seq
192. e memory can make LibreOffice faster and more convenient for example more undo steps require more memory but the trade off is less memory available for other applications and you could run out of memory altogether e If your documents contain a lot of objects such as images or the objects are large LibreOffice s performance may improve if you increase the memory for LibreOffice or the memory per object If you find that objects seem to disappear from a document that contains a lot of them increase the number of objects in the cache The objects are still in the file even if you cannot see them on screen e To load the Quickstarter an icon on the desktop or in the system tray when you start your computer select the option near the bottom of the dialog This makes LibreOffice start faster the trade off is LibreOffice uses some memory even when not being used This option called Enable systray quickstarter on Linux is not available on Mac OS X Undo Number of steps 100 Graphics cache Use for LibreOffice 20 MB Memory per object 5 2 S MB Remove from memory after 00 10 H hhimm Cache for inserted objects 4 Number of objects 20 LibreOffice Quickstarter v Load LibreOffice during system start up Figure 21 Choosing Memory options for the LibreOffice applications View options The options on the LibreOffice View page affect the way the document window looks and behaves Some of these options are described bel
193. e mouse pointer to the start of the next range or single cell 3 Hold down the Control key and click or click and drag to select a range 4 Repeat as necessary Selecting columns and rows Entire columns and rows can be selected very quickly in LibreOffice Single column or row To select a single column click on the column identifier letter See Figure 87 To select a single row click on the row identifier number Multiple columns or rows To select multiple columns or rows that are contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Shift key 3 Click the last column or row in the group To select multiple columns or rows that are not contiguous 1 Click on the first column or row in the group 2 Hold down the Control key 3 Click on all of the subsequent columns or rows while holding down the Control key Entire sheet To select the entire sheet click on the small box between the A column header and the 1 row header Select All Figure 98 Select All box You can also press Control A to select the entire sheet Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 109 Selecting sheets You can select either one or multiple sheets It can be advantageous to select multiple sheets at times when you want to make changes to many sheets at once Single sheet Click on the sheet tab for the sheet you want to select The active sheet becomes white see Figure 99 Multiple contiguous sheets To select
194. e no changes Leave the option Insert data immediately checked Click Finish to complete the table wizard Close the window created by the table wizard You are now back to the main window of the database with the listing of the tables queries Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 197 forms and reports Notice that a table named CD Collection is now listed in the Tables portion of the window Creating a table by copying an existing table If you have a large collection of music you might want to create a table for each type of music you have Rather than creating each table from the wizard you can make copies of the original table naming each according to the type of music contained in it 1 Click on the Tables icon in the Database pane to see the existing tables 2 Right click on the CD Collection table icon Choose Copy from the pop up menu 3 Move the mouse pointer below this table right click and select Paste The Copy table dialog opens 4 Change the table name to Pop and click Next 5 Click the gt gt button to move all the fields from the left box to the right box and click Next 6 Since all the fields already have the proper Field type no changes should be needed However this is the time and place to make any changes if they are needed See Caution below for the reason why Click Create The new table is created Once tables have been created using the wizard and data has been entered editing them
195. e optimization for ODF format LibreOffice documents are XML files When you select this option LibreOffice writes the XML data without indents and line breaks If you want to be able to read the XML files in a text editor in a structured form deselect this option Document type If you routinely share documents with users of Microsoft Office you might want to change the Always save as attribute for documents to one of the Microsoft Office formats Although LibreOffice can open and save files in the docx and xlsx formats produced by Microsoft Office 2007 and 2010 it does not yet save in pptx format This capability is planned for a future release VBA Properties Load Save options On the Load Save VBA Properties page you can choose whether to keep any macros in Microsoft Office documents that are opened in LibreOffice Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Executable code Save original Basic code Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP Load Basic code Save original Basic code Figure 36 Choosing Load Save VBA Properties e lf you choose Save original Basic code the macros will not work in LibreOffice but are retained if you save the file into Microsoft Office format e lf you choose Load Basic code to edit the changed code is saved in an LibreOffice document but is not retained if you save into a Microsoft Office format 42 Getting
196. e option Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks If clicking in your links activates them check that page to see if the option has been deselected Removing hyperlinks You can remove the clickable link from hyperlink text leaving just the text by right clicking on the link and selecting Default Formatting This option is also available from the Format menu You may then need to re apply some formatting in order for the text to match the rest of your document Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 299 To erase the link text or button from the document completely select it and press the Backspace or Delete key Saving Writer documents as web pages Writer s HTML capabilities include saving existing documents in HTML format creating new documents as HTML not described here and creating several different types of web pages using a wizard The easiest way to create HTML documents is to start with an existing Writer document You can get a good idea of how it will appear as a web page by using View Web Layout However web layout view will not show you which features will or won t save correctly to HTML Some considerations are described in the introduction to this chapter Saving a document as a single web page To save a document as a single web page HTML format choose File Save As and specify HTML Document as the file type Writer does not replace multiple spaces in the original document with the HTML code for non breaki
197. e or document Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 57 Using the Template Management dialog To copy or move styles using the Template Management dialog 1 Click File Templates Organize 2 Inthe Template Management dialog Figure 50 set the lists at the bottom to either Templates or Documents as needed The default is Templates on the left and Documents on the right To copy styles from a file that is not open click the File button When you return to this dialog both lists show the selected file as well as all the currently open documents 3 Open the folders and find the templates from and to which you want to copy Double click on the name of the template or document and then double click the Styles icon to show the list of individual styles Figure 51 4 To copy a style hold down the Ctrl key and drag the name of the style from one list to the other If you do not hold down the Control key when dragging the style will be moved from one list to the other The style will be deleted from the list you are dragging it from 5 Repeat for each style you want to copy If the receiving template or document has many styles you may not see any change unless you scroll down in the list When you are finished click Close Template Management C Drawing Untitled C HE Systems C phb C Presentation Jj Presentation Backgrounds 7 Presentations CI US Sizes C0 My Templates O207WG WorkingWit
198. e owns the trademark OpenOifce the corect Note name for both the open source project and its software is OpenOffice ang 4 The OpenOffice org software is a freely available full featured office productivity suite E you have used previous versions of OpenOfice org you might want to look over the new features lists at http Arww openofice org dey docs features 0 http Awww openotice orgidey docs features 3 1 http iw ww openoiiice org dey docsfeatures 3 2 amd http w vw openoiice orgidew docs features 3 4 0000 s native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents OOo can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office T Oo includes the following components 7 Writer wore 3 Print General OpenOffice org Writer Page Layout Options Printer Lexmark E232 b Details Properties Range and copies All pages Number of copies i 3 1 2 Pages o dedi Collate AA Sax Print Cancel other co a iara amak EESE r ERT Figure 267 Printing a selection of text Calc You can choose single sheets multiple sheets and selections of cells for printing Range and copies S Number of copies 1 Selected sheets a K Selected cells Collate A A Thereof print All pages Pages 1 3 Figure 2
199. e the style Using a template to create a document To use a template to create a document 1 From the main menu choose File New Templates and Documents The Templates and Documents dialog opens 2 Inthe box on the left click the Templates icon if it is not already selected A list of template folders appears in the center box 3 Double click the folder that contains the template that you want to use A list of all the templates contained in that folder appears in the center box 4 Select the template that you want to use You can preview the selected template or view the template s properties To preview the template click the Preview icon A preview of the template appears in the box on the right e To view the template s properties click the Document Properties icon E The template s properties appear in the box on the right 5 Click Open The Templates and Documents dialog closes and a new document based on the selected template opens in LibreOffice You can then edit and save the new document just as you would any other document 60 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Templates and Documents My Templates EE Title Personal Checkbook Register Elid Personal Checkbook Register New Document By Ron Faile Jr Date 10 30 2010 07 07 50 Moditied by Ron Faile Jr Modified on 10 30 2010 07 10 27 Subject Personal Finance Description G Figure 53 Templates and Doc
200. e to the next slide after a set amount of time for example kiosk mode or carousel from the Slide Show Slide Show Settings menu or to advance automatically after a pre set amount of time different for each slide To set up the latter choose Slide Show Rehearse Timings When using this tool start the slide show a small timer is displayed in the bottom left corner When you are ready to advance to the next slide click on the timer Impress will memorize the timings and at the next slide show will advance automatically after the timer expires Running the slide show To run the slide show do one of the following e Click Slide Show Slide Show e Click the Slide Show button on the Presentation toolbar Presentation x Slide l Slide Design l Slide Show e Press F5 or F9 on the keyboard If the slide transition is Automatic after x seconds let the slide show run by itself If the slide transition is On mouse click do one of the following to move from one slide to the next e Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to go to the next slide or to go back to the previous one e Click the mouse to move to the next slide e Press the spacebar on the keyboard to advance to the next slide Right click anywhere on the screen to open a menu from which you can navigate the slides and set other options To exit the slide show at any time including at the end press the Esc key 164 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 Libr
201. eOffice The Document Foundation Chapter Getting Started with Draw Vector Drawing in LibreOffice What is Draw Draw is a vector graphics drawing program although it can also perform some operations on raster graphics pixels Using Draw you can quickly create a wide variety of graphical images Vector graphics store and display an image as simple geometric elements such as lines circles and polygons rather than a collections of pixels points on the screen Vector graphics allow for easier storage and scaling of the image Draw is fully integrated into the LibreOffice suite and this simplifies exchanging graphics with all components of the suite For example if you create an image in Draw reusing it in a Writer document is as simple as copying and pasting the image You can also work with drawings directly from within Writer or Impress using a subset of the functions and tools from Draw Draw s functionality is extensive even though it was not designed to rival high end graphics applications it possesses more functions than most drawing tools that are integrated with office productivity suites A few examples of drawing functions are e Layer management e Magnetic grid point system e Dimensions and measurement display e Connectors for making organization charts e 3D functions that enable small three dimensional drawings to be created with texture and lighting effects e Drawing and page style integration e B
202. eading Fuel x x x Figure 227 Added fields to the query Step 8 Enter the FuellD difference field We want the difference between the FuellD value of the Fuel table and FuellD value of the End Reading query to equal one 1 1 Type End Reading FuelID Fuel FuelID in the field to the right of the Odometer field of the Fuel Table Type the numeral 1 one in the Criterion cell of this column Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 229 Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Alias Table End Reading End Reading Fuel Figure 228 Typing in calculation of fields 2 Calculate the distance traveled Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer in the Field cell Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer i o Figure 229 Field for distance traveled calculations Visible EJ Visible 3 Calculate fuel economy Type End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity in the next column to the right of the word Field End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer End Reading FuelQuantity Figure 230 Fuel economy calculation field When entering fields for these calculations you must follow this format table or query name followed by a period follow by the field name For hyphenated or multiple word names table or query use dou
203. eadsheet the term function covers much more than just mathematical functions See Chapter 7 in the Calc Guide for more details Clicking the Sum button inserts a formula into the current cell that totals the numbers in the cells above the current cell If there are no numbers above the current cell then the cells to the left are placed in the Sum formula Clicking the Function button inserts an equals sign into the selected cell and the Input line enabling the cell to accept a formula When you enter new data into a cell the Sum and Equals buttons change to Cancel and Accept buttons XK v The contents of the current cell data formula or function are displayed in the Input line which forms the remainder of the Formula Bar You can edit the contents of the current cell on the Input line or in the cell itself To edit on the Input line click in the line then type your changes To edit within the current cell just double click the cell Individual cells The main section of the screen displays the cells in the form of a grid with each cell being at the intersection of a column and a row At the top of the columns and at the left end of the rows are a series of gray boxes containing letters and numbers These are the column and row headers The columns start at A and go on to the right and the rows start at 1 and go down These column and row headers form the cell references that appear in the Name Box on the Formula Bar Figure 8
204. eae eee ene ec eee eee ene E E reer Benet ern E eee Sear ee eer 94 Hacking changes 10 a documen Geen ae enn cen e eee eet eee eae rere ae Seem entree tne mente a ee nee eter ier aa 95 OLS eE E a Serene nee Nery A ne een eee Cnt eT Tete AREER ERE Seer ere eave ee en re ieee een Tone ee ere ete ner ne Ces 95 a igi O Rci glo gia gi pato gr 001610 9g lt 1 sssrini Sener errr meee ee en anne eke ire manner nets er si aaaea 95 Jong masor 0 8 6810 0 fc ee ee eee ee enon eee ee nee ee nee eer ae eee eee era Penne reer ers ere teen ey Reyna 98 IT TOMS ieee ca eee odes pee acinatonaecenceonteaenetaeeie ued eeeciaaenaeeeacienees E AE 98 Chapter 5 I en aO e E A A E E T A A E EE 99 W E cate r ee EAE EEN EE A ENEA A A TO AEE AE A EEE 100 Spreadsheets sheets and me 2 aan ee eee ne we eae oer nee enn EE eee eee eee eee ee 100 Pa O Me Man CAC WOOW Renee tere en mee een AENT 100 Opening and Saving CoV IO Sorsan napar on ER E E EE 103 Navigating within SIP CAOSIC CIS i asecstsed tec tncteeacen deeded dan eaniaceraacdbeceeeesbheeinetladeiserdasnctnebevecadecnecmerceede 105 Selecting items in a sheet or SPreAdShee ccccccccccscecccecsseccseccusecueccueecueccusecusesnassuecuceeeees 108 Working WIA ONS and Sit ieee ar attics said diiine biriani riian an in eee 110 YEON AO W NENO S ii O ET T E ree ree 111 T OF a r helen ere n eee eae erie OMOR eR Re mrt an err er nee one ee ee 113 Eneng Gala Usma DO KOVOR U seci a 116 Pecon Up 8 ois ENUY sieni an
205. ecify when it compiles a table of contents Some common examples of style use are given in Examples of style use on page 68 LibreOffice supports the following types of styles e Page styles include margins headers and footers borders and backgrounds In Calc page styles also include the sequence for printing sheets e Paragraph styles control all aspects of a paragraph s appearance such as text alignment tab stops line spacing and borders and can include character formatting e Character styles affect selected text within a paragraph such as the font and size of text or bold and italic formats e Frame styles are used to format graphic and text frames including wrapping type borders backgrounds and columns e Numbering styles apply similar alignment numbering or bullet characters and fonts to numbered or bulleted lists e Cell styles include fonts alignment borders background number formats for example currency date number and cell protection 52 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 e Graphics styles in drawings and presentations include line area shadowing transparency font connectors dimensioning and other attributes e Presentation styles include attributes for font indents spacing alignment and tabs Different styles are available in the various components of LibreOffice as listed in Table 1 LibreOffice comes with many predefined styles You can use the styles as provided modify the
206. ect is selected and the yellow dot these are discussed in Moving and resizing Fontwork objects on page 293 3 Double click the object to edit the Fontwork text Type your own text in place of the black Fontwork text that appears over the object Figure 291 Editing Fontwork text 4 Click anywhere in a free space or press Esc to apply your changes Editing a Fontwork object Now that the Fontwork object is created you can edit some of its attributes To do this you can use the Fontwork toolbar the Formatting toolbar or menu options as described in this section If the selected Fontwork object is a 3 D object you can also use the 3D Settings toolbar Using the Fontwork toolbar Make sure that the Fontwork toolbar shown in Figure 289 is visible If you do not see it go to View Toolbars Fontwork Click on the different icons to edit Fontwork objects Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 289 e Fontwork Shape Edits the shape of the selected a object You can choose from a palette of shapes AVP dav om me Avl OG awl OS Figure 292 Fontwork toolbar showing palette of shapes E Fontwork Same Letter Heights Changes the height of characters in the object Toggles d between normal height some characters taller than others for example capital letters d h and others and all letters the same height ronwa FONON Figure 293 Left normal letters right same letter he
207. ector drawings odf for formulas mathematical equations Frequently asked questions May distribute LibreOffice to anyone Yes How many computers may install it on As many as you like May sell it Yes May use LibreOffice in my business Yes Is LibreOffice available in my language LibreOffice has been translated localized into over 40 languages so your language probably is supported Additionally there are over 70 spelling hyphenation and thesaurus dictionaries available for languages and dialects that do not have a localized program interface The dictionaries are available from the LibreOffice website at www libreoffice org or at http extensions services openoffice org en dictionaries How can you make it for free LibreOffice is developed and maintained by volunteers and has the backing of several orgainzations What if need technical support Read the section titled How to get help in Chapter 1 Introducting LibreOffice Who owns the software Does that mean that they can take away the software No The licenses under which LibreOffice is developed and distributed can never be revoked so it cannot be taken away am writing a software application May use programming code from LibreOffice in my program You may within the parameters set in the LGPL Read the license http www documentfoundation org Igpl 354 Get
208. ects To move an object select it and then click within the object s border and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the mouse During movement the shape of the object appears a faded version of the shape to help with repositioning To drop the object at its new location release the mouse button The new position appears immediately in the Status Bar Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 181 Dynamic size modification of objects To change the size of a selected object or group of selected objects with the mouse move one of the handles located around the selection As shown in the following illustration a faded version of the new object shape is shown The results depend on which handle you use To resize an object along one axis use the appropriate side handle To resize both axes use a corner handle The new size appears immediately in the status bar If you press the Shift key while resizing an object the change in size will be carried out symmetrically with respect to the two axes so that the aspect height length ratio of the object remains the same Rotation Rotating an object lets you move the object around an axis To do this dynamically with the mouse use the red handles as you do when changing the size of the object Rotation works in a slightly different way for 3D objects because the rotation occurs in 3D space and not in one plane See Chapter 7 Working with 3D Objects in the Draw
209. ects 188 Powerpoint See Impress 138 presentation formatting 149 output medium 147 running 164 slide design 147 transition effect 148 transitions 148 presentation styles 158 Presentation Wizard 146 presentations saving 358 primary key 197 primary key database 197 Print dialog 256 print file directly 256 print options general 33 print preview Calc 265 Writer 264 print ranges Calc 130 printer settings 41 printing black and white on color printer 263 booklet 262 brochure 262 Calc 130 260 envelopes labels business cards 263 general options 257 grayscale on color printer 264 handouts 262 headers and footers Calc 134 Impress and Draw 261 multiple pages per sheet 258 notes Impress 262 page break Calc 133 page order details scale in Calc 131 page orientation 257 rows or columns on every page 132 selecting what to print 259 Writer 259 Professional Template Pack extension 343 Q queries database alases 231 creating using a Wizard 224 creating using Design View 227 joined fields 206 pictures search conditions 226 adding from file 278 Query Wizard database 224 linking 279 Quickstarter 14 364 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 enabling 31 quotation marks 117 R raster graphics 189 rectangle drawing 174 redilines 95 redo change 25 regular expressions 79 relationships database 202 REM 313 remove manual formatting 161 remove personal information on saving 38 removing personal data 275 renam
210. ects at once by using the mouse to drag a large rectangle around the objects as shown For this to work the Select i icon on the Drawing toolbar must be active Only objects that lie entirely within the rectangle are selected Selecting hidden objects Even if objects are located behind others and not visible they can still be selected Hold down the Alt key and click where the object is located If there are several overlapping objects hold down the Alt key and click until you reach the object you want To cycle through the objects in reverse order hold down the Alt Shift keys The number and type of selected objects is shown at the left of the status bar to help you select the correct object This method generally works in Windows but on a Linux system it usually does not If the Alt key on your system does not operate as described above use the Tab key method described below 180 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 To select an object that is covered by another object using the keyboard press the Tab key to cycle through the objects stopping at the object you wish to select To cycle through the objects in reverse order press Shift Tab This may not be practical if you have a large number of objects in your drawing When you click on the selected object its outline will appear briefly through the objects covering it In the illustration to the right the square located beneath the circle was selected in this way the
211. ed they are saved separately In general if you need to create complex drawings it is recommended to use LibreOffice Draw which includes many more features such as layers styles and so on Creating drawing objects To begin using the drawing tools display the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 by clicking View Toolbars Drawing If you are planning to use the drawing tools repeatedly you can tear off this toolbar and move it to a convenient place on the window z ITTTTT TIILIEN 1 23 45 67 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 Select 5 Freeform Line 9 Symbol Shapes 13 Stars 2 Line 6 Text 10 Block arrows 14 Points 3 Rectangle 7 Callouts 11 Flowcharts 15 Fontwork Gallery 4 Ellipse 8 Basic Shapes 12 Callouts 16 From File 17 Extrusion On Off Figure 287 The Drawing toolbar To use a drawing tool 1 Click in the document where you want the drawing to be anchored You can change the anchor later if necessary 2 Choose the tool from the Drawing toolbar Figure 287 The mouse pointer changes to a drawing functions pointer D 3 Move the cross hair pointer to the place in the document where you want the graphic to appear and then click and drag to create the drawing object Release the mouse button 286 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The selected drawing function remains active so you can draw another object of the same type 4 To cancel the selected drawing function press the Esc key or click on the Select icon
212. ed code Tp LibreOffice always creates an empty subroutine named Main when it creates a module Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 313 There are advanced topics that are beyond the scope of this document but knowing about them might be of interest e You can write a macro so that values can be passed to the subroutine The values are called arguments Recorded macros do not accept arguments e Another kind of subroutine is called a function A function is a subroutine that returns a value The keyword FUNCTION is used rather than SUB to define a function Generated macros are always of type SUB Defining variables using DIM You can write information on a piece of paper so that you can look at it later A variable like a piece of paper contains information that can be changed and read The DIM statement is similar to setting aside a piece of paper to be used to store a message or note The EnterMyName macro defines the variables document and dispatcher as type object Other common variable types include string integer and date A third variable named args1 is an array of property values A variable of type array allows a single variable to contain multiple values similar to storing multiple pages in a single book Values in an array are usually numbered starting from zero The number in the parentheses indicates the highest usable number to access a storage location In this example there is only one value and it is numbe
213. ed in a Writer document and then saved as a template for later use e Printer settings which printer single sided double sided and paper size and so on e Styles to be used including character page frame numbering and paragraph styles e Format and settings regarding indexes tables bibliographies table of contents Templates can also contain predefined text saving you from having to type it every time you create a new document For example a letter template may contain your name address and salutation You can also save menu and toolbar customizations in templates see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more information Creating a template using a wizard You can use wizards to create templates for letters faxes agendas presentations and Web pages For example the Fax Wizard guides you through the following choices e Type of fax business or personal e Document elements like the date subject line business fax salutation and complementary close e Options for sender and recipient information business fax e Text to include in the footer business fax To create a template using a wizard 1 From the main menu choose File Wizards type of template required See Figure 55 2 Follow the instructions on the pages of the wizard This process is slightly different for each type of template but the format is very similar 3 Inthe last section of the wizard you can specify the name and location
214. ed text Figure 70 Paste Special menu 78 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Finding and replacing text and formatting Writer has two ways to find text within a document the Find toolbar for fast searching and the Find amp Replace dialog In the dialog you can e Find and replace words and phrases e Use wildcards and regular expressions to fine tune a search e Find and replace specific formatting e Find and replace paragraph styles eke toolbar is not visible you can display it using View Toolbars Find b To display the Find amp Replace dialog use the keyboard shortcut Control F or choose Edit Find amp Replace from the menu bar Find amp Replace Search for and Replace with or Replace All Match case W Whole words only Fewer Options Current selection only E Backwards Attributes C Regular expressions L Similarity search No Format E Search for Styles Figure 71 Expanded Find amp Replace dialog 1 Type the text you want to find in the Search for box 2 Toreplace the text with different text type the new text in the Replace with box 3 You can select various options such as matching the case matching whole words only or doing a search for similar words 4 When you have set up your search click Find To replace text click Replace instead For more information on using Find amp Replace see the Writer Guide Chapter 4 Getting Start
215. ed with Writer 79 If you click Find All LibreOffice selects all instances of the search text in the document Similarly if you click Replace All LibreOffice replaces all matches Use Replace All with caution otherwise you may end up with some hilarious and highly embarrassing mistakes A mistake with Replace All might require a manual word by word search to fix Inserting special characters A special character is one not found on a standard English keyboard For example ecnog are all special characters To insert a special character 1 Place the cursor where you want the character to appear 2 Choose Insert Special Character to open the Special Characters dialog 3 Select the characters from any font or mixture of fonts you wish to insert in order then click OK The selected characters are shown in the lower left of the dialog As you select a character it is shown on the lower right along with its numerical code Different fonts include different special characters If you do not find a particular special character try changing the Font selection Special Characters Es Cancel ojala a e S Ofe e me et Pe Figure 72 The Special Characters dialog where you can insert special characters Inserting dashes and non breaking spaces and hyphens To prevent two words from being separated at the end of a line press Control Shift spacebar after the first word to insert a non
216. edge of the fuel table Figure 220 and drag the to make it longer and easier to see all of the fields in the table Fuel ir FuellD Date FuelCost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 221 Fuel table in query Step 3 Add fields to the table at the bottom 1 Double click the FuellD field in the Fuel table 2 Double click the Odometer field 3 Double click the FuelQuantity field The table at the bottom of the query window should now have three columns Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 227 Field Alias Table Sort Visible Function Criterion FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity Fuel Fuel Fuel Figure 222 Query table Step 4 Set the criterion for the query We want the query s FuellD to begin with the numeral 1 1 Type gt 0 in the Criterion cell under FuellD in the query table 2 Click the Run Query icon in the Query Design toolbar Figure 223 Query Design toolbar Figure 224 contains the Fuel table with my entries and the query results based upon the Fuel table the query results are in the right table FuellD Date FuelCost FueQuantity Odometer FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity 0 Friday M 16 00 14 690 704 2 1 Tf 7 6 430 1 Friday M 7 00 6 430 78 7 2 1032 3 19 570 2 Saturday 20 00 19 570 1032 3 3 1239 4 15 150 3 Saturday 16 00 15 150 1239 4 4 4 sunday lt AutoFie lt AutoF ie Figure 224 Fuel table and query of the fuel table Step 5 Save
217. edit 322 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 the library If Insert as reference is not checked however the library is copied to the user s macro directory Macros can be stored in libraries inside LibreOffice documents Select a document rather thana directory on disk as shown in Figure 307 to import libraries contained in a document Downloading macros to import Macros are available for download Some macros are contained in documents some as regular files that you must select and import and some as macro text that should be copied and pasted into the Basic IDE use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the LibreOffice Macros dialog choose the macro to edit and then click Edit to open the macro in the Basic IDE Some macros are available as free downloads on the Internet See Table 3 Adding an existing macro on page 310 describes how to add these macros to your macros library Table 3 Places to find macro examples Location Description http www ooomacros org Excellent collection of packaged macros http www pitonyak org oo php Reference materials regarding macros http www pitonyak org database Reference materials regarding database macros http development LibreOffice Lots of links to everything http www oooforum org Many examples and help How to run a macro A typical method to run a macro is as follows 1 Use Tools Macros Run Macr
218. eed to edit the resulting link text using the Hyperlink dialog as described below Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 297 You can also use the Navigator to insert a hyperlink from one document the source to a specific place in another document the target Open the Navigator in the target document and drag the item to the spot in the source document where you want the hyperlink to appear Using the Hyperlink dialog To display the dialog click the Hyperlink icon B on the Standard toolbar or choose Insert Hyperlink from the menu bar To turn existing text into a link highlight it before opening the dialog Hyperlink irl Hyperlink type Web Telnet Internet Target gA i Mail amp News Further settings Frame Text Mame Hew Document Figure 297 Hyperlink dialog showing details for Internet links On the left side select one of the four categories of hyperlink e Internet the hyperlink points to a web address normally starting with http e Mail amp News the hyperlink opens an email message that is pre addressed to a particular recipient e Document the hyperlink points to another document or to another place in the current document e New document the hyperlink creates a new document The top right part of the dialog changes according to the choice made for the hyperlink category in the left panel A full description of all the choices and their interactions is beyo
219. efore the object Ungroup icon Ungroup the selected objects so you can manage them individually Group icon Group the selected objects so you can manage them as a single object Using menu options You can use some the choices on the Format menu to anchor align arrange and group selected Fontwork objects wrap text around them and flip them horizontally and vertically You can also right click on a Fontwork object and choose many of the same options from the pop up menu The pop up menu also provides quick access to the Line Area Text and Position and Size dialogs The Text dialog offers only a few options for Fontwork objects and is not discussed here On the Position and Size dialog you can enter precise values concerning size and position For more information on all of these menu options see the Draw Guide Using the 3D Settings toolbar If the selected Fontwork object is a 3 D object you can also use the options on the 3D Settings toolbar You can also change a 2 D Fontwork object into a 3 D object or change a 3 D object into a 2 D object by clicking the Extrusion On Off icon on the 3D Settings toolbar For more information see the Draw Guide 292 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3D Settings x w 268 H P o l i Extrusion Depth 3D On Off Direction Color Tilt Down Up Lighting Surface Left Right Figure 295 3D Settings toolbar Moving and resizing Fontwork objects When you select a Fon
220. eld and type the sequence number of the required page After a brief delay the display jumps to the selected page Page style Shows the style of the current page To change the page style right click on this field A list of page styles pops up choose a different style by clicking on it To edit the current page style double click on this field The Page Style dialog opens Language Shows the language for the selected text Click to open a menu where you can choose another language for the selected text or for the paragraph where the cursor is located You can also choose None Do not check spelling to exclude the text from a spelling check or choose More to open the Character dialog Insert mode Click to toggle between nsert and Overwrite modes when typing Selection mode Click to toggle between STD Standard EXT Extend ADD Add and BLK Block selection EXT is an alternative to Shift click when selecting text See Working with text on page 77 for more information about ADD and BLK Unsaved changes An icon with an exclmation point appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Outline Numbering Level 2 B OO EO O e 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom siqnature Inform ation lay out slider percent Figure 62 Right end of status bar Digital signature 5 If the document has been digitally signed an icon shows here You can double click the icon to view the certificate Ch
221. elected menu item to a different position When you have finished making all your changes click OK not shown in illustration to save them Creating anew menu In the Customize dialog click New to display the dialog shown in Figure 315 1 2 3 Type a name for your new menu in the Menu name box Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the new menu into the required position on the menu bar Click OK to save The new menu now appears on the list of menus in the Customize dialog It will appear on the menu bar itself after you save your customizations After creating anew menu you need to add some commands to it as described in Adding a command to a menu on page 334 Menu name New Menu 1 Menu position Window Help New Menu 1 Figure 315 Adding a new menu Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 333 Modifying existing menus To modify an existing menu select it in the Menu list and click the Menu button to drop down a list of modifications Move Rename Delete Not all of these modifications can be applied to all the entries in the Menu list For example Rename and Delete are not available for the menus supplied by LibreOffice To move a menu such as File choose Menu Move A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 315 but without the Menu name box opens Use the up and down arrow buttons to move the menu into the required position To move submenus such as File Send select th
222. ell A For example when you create your first table you must save it before you can close it When the table is first saved it is also made part of the database Creating database tables In a database a table stores information for a group of things we call fields For example a table might hold an address book a stock list a phone book or a price list A database can have from one to several tables To work with tables click the Tables icon in the Database list or press Alt a The three tasks that you can perform on a table are in the Tasks list See Figure 175 194 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Using the Wizard to create a table Wizards are designed to do the basic work Sometimes this is not sufficient for what we want in those cases we can use a wizard as a Starting point and then build upon what it produces The Table Wizard in Base contains two categories of suggested tables business and personal Each category contains sample tables from which to choose Each table has a list of available fields We can delete some of these fields and add other fields A field in a table is one bit of information For example a price list table might have one field for item name one for the description and a third for the price Since none of the fields we need for our Automobile database are contained in any of the sample wizard tables we will create a simple table using the wizard that has nothing to do with our
223. emer ee ere een erent Renn ene nenT rts eae en ee Serna eae ene ener 117 Sharing Content between SNEELS ccccccccseccseccueccucccuecaueceuscauensuensuensueceuseesucsuecensnsussucseceanas 120 vadano COCOM OI i ene one a er nee ae ene eee nee enn Tents ey Seen ee een eee ere 121 E ea E sc EE EAE E E EEE EERE O E 121 F a aE r E E E E AEE IE EE E AEE OEE 122 Aulolormating Cells and BC go a ee oe eee naan a a aa 126 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Formatting spreadsheets USING ICM CS vss cans acs cncrcerncnsounorensteacssconsseaonuesiauessar danaeniuesiabeaneaadaeoutsa 127 Geng Cond onal armat NO a ee eee ene oe EAE EEA aai 127 POO O I ey E E esse 127 T T ce eee ee E E E E E eer eee 129 PN OIEA E N EEEN A E IE ease scene AE EAT AIE E E T E E ATT 130 Chapter 6 Gelling Started WiN IMITOS S Ae re nEn ee ee ae EE ENEE R AEE Eae 137 A EE 8 Coke es ee AAT EEE AANE AES EA ANE AI E E E 138 T a EE ETE E E EEEE eee 138 Pas ofthe Main Impress cate reeset ste eee a eee E 138 WO DORO W o EE a cee etree oe 142 Creaung a hew presentalo Ee ne en eer ee AE A TE 146 Formatting a DIOS CIM AU ON ia oeisee das tesnsusianndncdodshecdedsceantadestensa tab tnsasbedenndadupsednaaecdenadeosnse lt anerhbehieres 149 AGNO Ro lg om Oleggcltll teh eee eee a et Seer EE eens en ert Sree eee area ne ae E 151 Adding pictures tables charts and MCONA ss si cezssesncconccanesuaneatorssisanwiaan ened cepidndewstantsariesaansseteneses 155 Working with
224. en sharing a document that you do not expect or want the recipient to modify the safest option is to convert the document to PDF LibreOffice provides a very straightforward way to convert documents to PDF See Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E Mailing in this book Saving text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt and ott Writer 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document sxw OpenOffice org 1 x Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 6 0 95 and 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 docx Office Open XML Text docx Rich Text Format rtf StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 sdw StarWriter 3 0 4 0 and 5 0 Template vor Text txt Text Encoded txt Unified Office Format text uot uof HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html and htm DocBook xml AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw Encryption support within the Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP filter allows password protected Microsoft Word documents to be saved The rtf format is a common format for transferring text files between applications but you are likely to experience loss of formatting and images For this reason other formats should be used Saving spreadsheet files In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can save in these formats OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Sxc OpenOffice org 1 x Spreadsheet Template stc Microsoft Excel 97 20
225. en when you double click on a doc Word file it opens in Writer xls Excel files open in Calc and ppt PowerPoint files open in Impress If you did not associate the file types then when you double click on a Microsoft Word document it opens in Microsoft Word if Word is installed on your computer Excel files open in Excel and PowerPoint files open in PowerPoint You can use another method to open Microsoft Office files in LibreOffice and save in those formats from LibreOffice See Opening an existing document on page 20 for more information Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 13 Using the Quickstarter under Windows The Quickstarter is an icon that is placed in the Windows system tray during system startup It indicates that LibreOffice has been loaded and is ready to use The Quickstarter loads library DLL files required by LibreOffice shortening the startup time for LibreOffice components If the Quickstarter is disabled see Reactivating the Quickstarter if you want to enable it Using the Quickstarter icon Right click the Quickstarter icon in the system tray to open a pop up menu Figure 1 from which you can open a new document open the Templates and Documents dialog or choose an existing document to open You can also double click the Quickstarter icon to display the Templates and Documents dialog FS Text Document HA Spreadsheet i Presentation a Drawing fa Database EA Formula 4
226. entation From template 6 Open existing presentation Preview Do not show this wizard aqain Figure 138 Choosing the type of presentation 1 Select Empty Presentation under Type It creates a presentation from scratch e From template uses a template design already created as the basis for a new presentation The wizard changes to show a list of available templates Choose the template you want e Open existing presentation continues work on a previously created presentation The wizard changes to show a list of existing presentations Choose the presentation you want Both of these options are covered in the Impress Guide 146 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 Click Next Figure 139 shows the Presentation Wizard step 2 as it appears if you selected Empty Presentation at step 1 If you selected From template an example slide is shown in the Preview box Presentation Wizard Select a slide design Presentation Backgrounds I Original gt Black and White Blue Border Blue Lines and Gradients F ee ee ee ee Select an output medium Original Screen Overhead sheet Slide D Uv Se ae Preview Paper Figure 139 Selecting a slide design 3 Choose a design under Select a slide design The slide design section gives you two main choices Presentation Backgrounds and Presentations Each one has a list of choices for slide designs If you want to use one of these other than lt Origina
227. ents called spreadsheets Spreadsheets consist of a number of individual sheets each sheet containing cells arranged in rows and columns A particular cell is identified by its row number and column letter Cells hold the individual elements text numbers formulas and so on that make up the data to display and manipulate Each spreadsheet can have many sheets and each sheet can have many individual cells In Calc 3 3 each sheet can have a maximum of 1 048 576 rows and 1024 columns Parts of the main Calc window When Calc is started the main window looks similar to Figure 87 Title bar The Title bar located at the top shows the name of the current spreadsheet When the spreadsheet is newly created its name is Untitled X where X is a number When you save a spreadsheet for the first time you are prompted to enter a name of your choice Menu bar Under the Title bar is the Menu bar When you choose one of the menus a submenu appears with other options You can modify the Menu bar as discussed in Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 100 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Untitled 2 LibreOffice Calc Oks File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data E ers bar Standard toolbar T Boa BER FE KEES Ti by Aaea Olin h a Arial MOIE BZ U bb A O m A Fi Formatting Active cell Active cell toolbar reference Column Headers Name box Sheet tabs Status bar v r a i stain o e
228. enu bar In the Extension Manager dialog click Get more extensions online 2 The LibreOffice extensions page opens in your browser Find and select the extension you want and follow the prompts to install it During installation you will be asked to accept a license agreement 3 When the installation is complete the extension is listed in the Extension Manager dialog For more about extensions see Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 239 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math LibreOffice s Equation Editor What is Math Math is LibreOffice s component for writing mathematical equations It is most commonly used as an equation editor for text documents but it can also be used with other types of documents or stand alone When used inside Writer the equation is treated as an object inside the text document The equation editor is for writing equations in symbolic form as in equation 1 If you want to evaluate a numeric value see the Calc Guide df x In x tan x 1 Getting started To insert an equation choose Insert Object Formula The equation editor opens at the bottom of the screen and the floating Elements window may appear You will also see a small box with a gray border in your document where the formula will be displayed File Edit View Format Tools Window Help le gi B axb a b aab a b a b avb
229. eport on vacation expenses includes both fuel costs and meal costs These values are contained in fields of two different tables Vacations and Fuel So this report requires creating a query Creating a static report We will create a report on vacation expenses Certain questions need to be asked before creating the report e What information do we want in the report e How do we want the information arranged e What fields are required to provide this information e Will a query have to be created because these fields are in different tables e Are there any calculations required in the data before being added to the report The expenses for our vacation are motel tolls miscellaneous breakfast lunch supper snacks and fuel One possible report would simply list the totals of each of these expense groups Another possible report would list the expense totals for each day of the vacation A third possible report would list the totals for each expense group for each type of payment This would let us know where the money came from to pay the expenses The best way to create reports like these is to create the queries needed to gather the needed data insert the query data into a spreadsheet and use the necessary Calc functions on this data We will create two reports one listing the expenses each day other than fuel and the second listing the fuel costs each day 232 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The fields we need fo
230. er Change the Length to 10 and the Decimal places to 1 FuelCost Change the Length to 5 and Decimal places to 2 Click the Format example button Figure 179 This opens the Field Format window Figure 180 Use Currency as the Category and your currency as the Format My currency has two decimal places Use what is appropriate for yours Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 199 Field Name Field Type g FuellD Integer INTEGER Date Date DATE p Fuetcost FuelQuantity Number NUMERIC Odometer Number NUMERIC PaymentTyp Text VARCHAR 4 Field Properties Entry required No Length Decimal places Default value Format example 0 00 mm Figure 179 Changing field properties Format Alignment Category Format Language All JUSD English USA w English USA v User defined 1234 00 USD Ar 1234 00 USD Currency 1 234 00 a 1 234 Ime 1 234 00 Scientific I erie 1 234 57 Options Decimal places 2 Negative numbers red Leading zeroes 1 Thousands separator Figure 180 Field Format options 4 To access additional formatting options click the button to the right of the Format example field 5 Description can be anything or can be left blank 6 To save and close the table choose File Save Name the table Fuel Close the Fuel table Follow the same steps to create the Vacations table The fields and their field types are listed in Figur
231. er defined Figure 118 Format Cells Numbers 124 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Formatting the font To quickly choose the font used in a cell select the cell then click the arrow next to the Font Name box on the Formatting toolbar and choose a font from the list To choose whether to show the font names in their font or in plain text go to Tools gt Options LibreOffice View and select or deselect the Show preview of fonts option in the Font Lists section For more information see Chapter 2 Setting Up LibreOffice To choose the size of the font click the arrow next to the Font Size A m See box on the Formatting toolbar For other formatting you can use the Bold Italic or Underline icons To choose a font color click the arrow next to the Font Color icon to display the color palette Click on the desired color To define custom colors use Tools Options LibreOffice Colors See Chapter 2 To specify the language of the cell useful because it allows different languages to exist in the same document and be spell checked correctly use the Font tab of the Format Cells dialog Use the Font Effects tab to set other font characteristics See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc of the Ca c Guide for more information Automatic Formatting the cell borders To add a border to a cell or group of selected cells click on the Borders
232. erals starting with 1 You can restart page numbering in two ways Method 1 1 Place the cursor in the first paragraph of the new page 2 Choose Format Paragraph 3 On the Text Flow tab of the Paragraph dialog select Breaks 4 Select Insert and then With Page Style and specify the page style to use 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Method 1 is also useful for numbering the first page of a document with a page number greater than 1 For example you may be writing a book with each chapter in a separate file Chapter 1 may start with page 1 but Chapter 2 could begin with page 25 and Chapter 3 with page 51 Method 2 1 Insert Manual break 2 By default Page break is selected on the Insert Break dialog Figure 81 3 Choose the required page Style 4 Select Change page number 5 Specify the page number to start from and then click OK Insert Break Type Line break Page break Help Figure 81 Restarting page numbering after a manual page break Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 91 Changing page margins You can change page margins in two ways e Using the page rulers quick and easy but does not have fine control e Using the Page Style dialog can specify margins to two decimal places If you change the margins using the rulers the new margins affect the page style and will be shown in the Page Style dialog the next time you open it Because the page sty
233. erences Figure 265 General print options Printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper You can print multiple pages of a document on one sheet of paper To do this 1 Inthe Print dialog select the Page Layout tab Figure 266 Layout Pages per sheet su Draw a border around each page 7 bibs Brochure Page sides Include All pages All pages Back sides left pages Front sides right pages Figure 266 Printing multiple page per sheet of paper 2 Inthe Layout section select from the drop down list the number of pages to print per sheet The preview panel on the left of the Print dialog shows how the printed document will look When printing more than 2 pages per sheet you can choose the order in which they are printing across and down the paper The two pictures below show the difference LibreOffice Writer Page Layout Layot AA a Pages per sheet 12 Order E Draw a border a left to right then down top to bottom then right 258 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Inthe Page sides section select whether to print all pages or only some pages 4 Click the Print button Selecting pages sheets slides to print In addition to printing a full document you can choose to print individual pages sheets slides ranges of pages sheets slides or a selection of a document The details vary slightly in Writer Calc Draw and Impress as described in this section In Writer to pr
234. erlink You can also point to an anchor ina document to do this write the address in this format file lt path gt document_name anchor_name e Text type the text that you want to be displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the hotspot e Frame where the target of the hyperlink will open pick among _ blank opens in a new browser window _ self opens in the active browser window top or parent Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 285 The value _ self for the target frame will work just fine in the vast majority of occasions It is therefore not recommended to use the other choices unless absolutely necessary Using LibreOffice s drawing tools You can use LibreOffice s drawing tools to create graphics such as simple diagrams using rectangles circles lines text and other predefined shapes You can also group several drawing objects to make sure they maintain their relative position and proportion You can place the drawing objects directly on a page in your document or you can insert them into a frame You can also use the drawing tools to annotate photographs screen captures or other illustrations produced by other programs but this is not recommended because e You cannot include images in a group with drawing objects so they may get out of alignment in your document e If you convert a document to another format such as HTML the drawing objects and the graphics will not remain associat
235. ert Date and Time and in the dialog box that opens click on the Notes and Handouts tab see Figure 135 Use this dialog to select the elements you want to appear on each handout page and their contents More details on how to use this dialog are provided in the mpress Guide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 143 Header and Footer x Include on page Header Header text Date and time Fixed Variable Language 12 16 10 English USA Footer Footer text F Page number Figure 135 Dialog to set the page information for handouts and notes Slide Sorter view Slide Sorter view contains all of the slide thumbnails Use this view to work with a group of slides or with only one slide Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter D LibreOffice Tae Dacument Foundation The poak for Ge Libr toe hiia Freesia Tempe Slide 2 x Goren nd neue design esp7ecing ihe Uinre0 ice bandio guideaiines Suie reay x O pimi Sre for coisi dieis E ferrpleces x Unig Se eosi Lions ice banding cobr paeme goa mey hasie separas Figure 136 Slide Sorter view 144 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Customizing Slide Sorter view To change the number of slides per row 1 Check View Toolbars Slide View to make the Slide View toolbar visible D jaa o a E l4 Slides Figure 137 Slide Sorter and Slide View toolbars 2 Adjust the number of slides up to a maximum of 15 Moving a
236. ery information every Choose whether to enable AutoRecovery and how often to save the information used by the AutoRecovery process AutoRecovery in LibreOffice overwrites the original file If you also choose Always create backup copy the original file then overwrites the backup copy If you have this set recovering your document after a system crash will be easier but recovering an earlier version of the document may be harder Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 41 Save URLs relative to file system internet Relative addressing to a file system is only possible if the source document and the referenced document are both on the same drive A relative address always starts from the directory in which the current document is located It is recommended to save relatively if you want to create a directory structure on an Internet server Default file format and ODF settings ODF format version LibreOffice by default saves documents in OpenDocument Format ODF version 1 2 Extended While this allows for improved functionality there may be backwards compatibility issues When a file saved in ODF 1 2 Extended is opened in an editor that uses earlier versions of ODF 1 0 1 1 some of the advanced features may be lost Two notable examples are cross references to headings and the formatting of numbered lists If you plan to share documents with people who use editors which use older versions of ODF save the document using ODF version 1 0 1 1 Siz
237. es Forms Modulel Figure 300 OOo Macro Organizer dialog DB nspection library selected Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 311 4 Be certain to open the library container named My Macros Find the library named Standard under My Macros Be warned every library container has a library named Standard Select the Standard library and click New Module to create a new module to contain the macro 5 The default module name is Module1 Type a descriptive name and click OK to create the module The LibreOffice Basic Macros dialog is displayed again showing the new module Name ox Recorded cancel Cancel Figure 301 Give your module a meaningful name 6 Highlight the newly created module In the upper left corner type the macro name to use such as EnterMyname and then click Save to save the macro If you followed all of the steps the Standard library now contains a module named Recorded which contains the EnterMyName macro as shown in Figure 302 When LibreOffice creates a new module it automatically adds the macro named Main Running the macro Use Tools Macros Run Macro to open the Macro Selector dialog Select the newly created macro and click Run Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name 3 Pitonyak a G EnterMyName Run l PitonyakDatabase Main
238. es box is cleared 3 Type the series for the new list in the Entries box one entry per line Click Add The new list will now appear in the Lists box 4 Click OK at the bottom of the dialog to save the new list Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 119 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd _ 0 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug 5 January February March April May i Figure 111 Defining a new fill series Using selection lists Selection lists are available only for text and are limited to using only text that has already been entered in the same column To use a selection list select a blank cell and press Ctrl D A drop down list appears of any cell in the same column that either has at least one text character or whose format is defined as Text Click on the entry you require November December 13 Sharing content between sheets You might want to enter the same information in the same cell on multiple sheets for example to set up standard listings for a group of individuals or organizations Instead of entering the list on each sheet individually you can enter it in all the sheets at once To do this select all the sheets Edit Sheet Select then enter the information in the current one This technique overwrites any information that is already in the cells on the other sheets without any warning For this reason when you ar
239. ese features are covered in detail in the Writer Guide The Writer interface The main Writer workspace is shown in Figure 60 The menus and toolbars are described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice Some other features of the Writer interface are covered in this chapter File Edit Viewginsert Format Table Tools Window Help ca we limes Neva Roman i i y a J Standard toolbar Formatting tool bar i il Status bar m a Pi E Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT STD E Er T E Figure 60 The main Writer workspace in Print Layout view Status bar The Writer status bar provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some document features 72 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Page 3 14 Default English USA INSRT STO E Page number Page style Language Inset Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 61 Left end of status bar Page number Shows the current page number the sequence number of the current page if different and the total number of pages in the document For example if you restarted page numbering at 1 on the third page its page number is 1 and its sequence number is 3 If any bookmarks have been defined in the document a right click on this field pops up a list of bookmarks click on the required one To jump to a specific page in the document double click on this field The Navigator opens Click in the Page Number fi
240. essage box to return to the Set Password dialog and enter the password again LibreOffice uses a very strong encryption mechanism that makes it almost impossible to recover the contents of a document in case you lose the password Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 21 Set Password File encryption password Enter password to open Confirm password Note After a password has been set the document will only open with the password Should you lose the password there will be no way to recover the document Please also note that this password is case sensitive More Options OK Cancel Figure 11 Entering a password for a document Writer and Calc provide a second level of protection which allows a file to be viewed but not changed without a password that is the file opens in read only mode To protect a document from being changed 1 Choose More Options from the Set Password dialog 2 Enter the password in the Enter password to allow editing field Repeat the password in the Confirm password field Click OK Saving a document automatically You can choose to have LibreOffice save files for you automatically Automatic saving like manual saving overwrites the last saved state of the file To set up automatic file saving 1 Choose Tools Options Load Save General 2 Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and set the time interval Renaming and deleting files You can rename or de
241. ets To delete multiple sheets select them as described earlier then either right click over one of the tabs and select Delete Sheet from the pop up menu or choose Edit Sheet Delete from the menu bar Renaming sheets The default name for the a new sheet is SheetX where X is a number While this works for a small spreadsheet with only a few sheets it becomes awkward when there are many sheets To give a sheet a more meaningful name you can e Enter the name in the Name box when you create the sheet or e Right click on a sheet tab and choose Rename Sheet from the pop up menu replace the existing name with one of your choosing e Double click on a sheet tab to pop up the Rename Sheet dialog Sheet names must start with either a letter or a number Apart from the first character of the sheet name allowed characters are letters numbers spaces and the underline character Attempting to rename a sheet with an invalid name will produce an error message 112 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Viewing Calc Using zoom Use the zoom function to change the view to show more or fewer cells in the window For more about zoom see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book Freezing rows and columns Freezing locks a number of rows at the top of a spreadsheet or a number of columns on the left of a spreadsheet or both Then when scrolling around within the sheet any frozen columns and rows remain in view Figure 1
242. ets and other objects Graphics such as shapes callouts arrows and so on are often useful to complement the text on a slide These objects are handled much the same as graphics in Draw For more information see Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw the Draw Guide or Chapters 4 5 and 6 in the mpress Guide Spreadsheets embedded in Impress include most of the functionality of soreadsheets in Calc and are therefore capable of performing extremely complex calculations and data analysis If you need to analyze your data or apply formulas these operations are best performed in a Calc spreadsheet and the results displayed in an embedded Impress spreadsheet or even better in a native Impress table Alternatively choose Insert Object OLE Object from the menu bar This opens a spreadsheet in the middle of the slide and the menus and toolbars change to those used in Calc so that you can start adding data though you may first need to resize the visible area on the slide You can also insert an already existing spreadsheet and use the viewport to select the data that you want to display on your slide Impress offers the capability of inserting in a slide various other types of objects such Writer documents Math formulas or even another presentation For details on using these objects refer to Chapter 7 of the Impress Guide Working with slide masters and styles A slide master is a slide that is used as the starting point for other slide
243. ever LibreOffice options can be set at a component level or even document level File compatibility In addition to its native OpenDocument formats LibreOffice includes PDF and Flash export capabilities as well as support for opening and saving files in many common formats including Microsoft Office HTML XML WordPerfect and Lotus 1 2 3 formats Using an extension included the ability to import and edit some PDF files No vendor lock in LibreOffice uses OpenDocument an XML eXtensible Markup Language file format developed as an industry standard by OASIS Organization for the Advancement of Structured Information Standards These files can easily be unzipped and read by any text editor and their framework is open and published You have a voice Enhancements software fixes and release dates are community driven You can join the community and affect the course of the product you use You can read more about LibreOffice and The Document Foundation on their websites at http www libreoffice org and http www documentfoundation org Minimum requirements LibreOffice 3 x requires one of the following operating systems Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher XP Vista or 7 GNU Linux Kernel version 2 6 18 and glibc2 version 2 5 or higher is required Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger or higher Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 11 Some LibreOffice features wizards and the HSQLDB database engine require that the Java Ru
244. f Figure 95 You can verify your selection by looking in the Name box Range of contiguous cells A range of cells can be selected using the keyboard or the mouse To select a range of cells by dragging the mouse 1 Click in a cell 2 Press and hold down the left mouse button 3 Move the mouse around the screen 4 Once the desired block of cells is highlighted release the left mouse button To select a range of cells without dragging the mouse 1 Click in the cell which is to be one corner of the range of cells 2 Move the mouse to the opposite corner of the range of cells 3 Hold down the Shift key and click 108 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 To select a range of cells without using the mouse 1 Select the cell that will be one of the corners in the range of cells 2 While holding down the Shift key use the cursor arrows to select the rest of the range The result of any of these methods looks like the right side of Figure 95 You can also directly select a range of cells using the Name box Click into the Name Box as described in Using a cell reference on page 105 To select a range of cells enter the cell reference for the upper left hand cell followed by a colon and then the lower right hand cell reference For example to select the range that would go from A3 to C6 you would enter A3 C6 Range of non contiguous cells 1 Select the cell or range of cells using one of the methods above 2 Move th
245. f text some figures without text beside them and some other figures with descriptive text use page styles for basic layout and tables to place figures beside descriptive text when necessary For an index or other document with two columns of text where the text continues from the left hand column to the right hand column and then to the next page all in Sequence also known as snaking columns of text use page styles with two columns If the title of the document on the first page is full page width put it in a single column section For a newsletter with complex layout two or three columns on the page and some articles that continue from one page to some place several pages later use page styles for basic layout Place articles in linked frames and anchor graphics to fixed positions on the page if necessary Items fomatted as a table Title is in a single column section Thisis a header on the first page only This frame is linked to a frame on another page These frames are not linked to other frames a nageamiemn mpm mamala iai mm saa Be EL ngs m We a hml oe ee ee eel i eo a a ie PE E l So Gee de tee eke eee ar ar Whetdom Cpe Othe or gocludaT Tse ee ed ee amp brim Ter EAE ME ninn ee et Se ee a ar ee DeTAuthors Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 89 For a document with terms and translations to appear side by side in what appear to be colum
246. f you choose Spreadsheets you will see ods x1s and other files that Calc opens You can also open an existing document that is in an OpenDocument format by double clicking on the file s icon on the desktop or in a file manager such as Windows Explorer If you have associated Microsoft Office file formats with LibreOffice you can also open these files by double clicking on them Under Microsoft Windows you can use either the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by Microsoft Windows See Using the Open and Save As dialogs on page 22 Saving a document To save a new document do one of the following e Press Control S e Choose File Save from the menu bar e Click the Save button on the main toolbar When the Save As dialog appears enter the file name verify the file type if applicable and click Save To save an open document with the current file name choose File Save This will overwrite the last saved state of the file Password protection To protect a document from being viewable without a password use the option on the Save As dialog to enter a password 1 On the Save As dialog select the Save with password option and then click Save You will receive a prompt Figure 11 2 Type the same password in both fields and then click OK If the passwords match the document is saved password protected If the passwords do not match you receive an error message Close the m
247. fect three elements of a slide master the background background objects such as icons decorative lines and text frames and the text placed on the slide Text styles are further divided into Notes Outline 1 through Outline 9 Subtitle and Title The outline styles are used for the different levels of the outline to which they belong For example Outline 2 is used for the subpoints of Outline 1 and Outline 3 is used for the subpoints of Outline 2 Graphic styles affect many of the elements of a slide Notice that text styles exist in both the presentation and graphic style selections Slide masters Impress comes with several prepackaged slide masters They are shown in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane This section has three subsections Used in This Presentation Recently Used and Available for Use Click the sign next to the name of a subsection to expand it to show thumbnails of the slides or click the sign to collapse the subsection to hide the thumbnails Each of the slide masters shown in the Available for Use list is from a template of the same name If you have created your own templates or added templates from other sources slide masters from those templates will also appear in this list Tasks View X Master Pages E Used in This Presentation EN DEI eS F 4 i b Available for Use aem Se E bii hihi Figure 145 Available master pages slides 158 Getting Started with LibreOffice
248. field in the selected row onto the ID field in the spreadsheet The Save icon should activate 7 Click the Edit File button to make the spreadsheet read only Click Save when asked if you want to save the file 8 The Data Source window goes blank the fields in the spreadsheet are populated with data from the row you selected and the Form Navigation toolbar appears at the bottom of the spreadsheet Mi Record 2 of 2 Cu 4 gt Deo Figure 215 Navigation arrows of a form 9 Click the arrows on the Form Navigation toolbar to view the different records of the table The arrows are circled in red The number in the box changes when you change the record number by clicking an arrow The data in the fields changes correspondingly to the data for that particular record number Entering data in a form Records are used to organize the data we enter into a form They also organize the data we enter into a subform Each type of field allows a different method to enter the data In many if not all cases more than one method can be used The first step to entering data in a form is to open it from the main database window Figure 175 1 Click the Forms icon in the Database list 2 Find the form s name in the Forms list Vacations 3 Double click the form s name The quickest way to enter a date in the Date field is to click the arrow that opens the dropdown calendar Figure 216 Then click the day the you want Then press the Tab ke
249. fined custom dictionaries are active by default and add or remove dictionaries by clicking the New or Delete buttons LibreOffice has a spelling and grammar checker called Language Tool You can access the tool from Tools Spelling and Grammar Choosing Internet options Use the Internet Options pages to define search engines and save proxy settings for use with LibreOffice If you are using a Mozilla browser such as Firefox on Windows or Linux you can enable the Browser Plug in so you can open LibreOffice files in your browser print them save them and work with them in other ways If you are using a Unix or Linux based operating system including Mac OS X an additional page of E mail options is available where you can specify the e mail program to use when you send the current document as e mail See Figure 43 Under Windows the operating system s default e mail program is always used Windows and Linux installations also have a Wiki Publisher extension included by default Select MediaWiki in the Internet options then click the Add button to open the dialog shown in Figure 44 Here you can specify the address URL and login information for a wiki You can add several wikis to the list Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 47 N Options internet E mail x LibreOffice Load Save Language Settings LibreOffice Writer E mail program usr lib thunderbird thunderbird m LibreOffice Writer Web LibreOffice Base
250. for example with an associated caption it is not saved and does not appear in the HTML document instead the name of the frame appears Relative and absolute hyperlinks Hyperlinks stored within a file can be either relative or absolute A relative hyperlink says Here is how to get there starting from where you are now meaning from the folder in which your current document is saved while an absolute hyperlink says Here is how to get there no matter where you start from An absolute link will stop working if the target is moved A relative link will stop working if the start and target locations change relative to each other For instance if you have two spreadsheets in the same folder linked to each other and you move the entire folder to a new location an absolute hyperlink will break but a relative one will not To change the way that LibreOffice stores the hyperlinks in your file select Tools Options Load Save General and choose if you want URLs saved relatively when referencing the File System or the nternet or both Calc will always display an absolute hyperlink Don t be alarmed when it does this even when you have saved a relative hyperlink this absolute target address will be updated if you move the file Make sure that the folder structure on your computer is the same as the file structure on your web server if you save your links as relative to the file system and you are going to upload pages to the
251. for more information Font sizes Use these fields to define the respective font sizes for the HTML lt font size 1 gt to lt font size 7 gt tags if they are used in the HTML pages Many pages no longer use these tags Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 43 Font sizes Import Size1 7 n Use English USA locale for numbers Sire 10 gt L Import unknown HTML tags as fields Ignore font settings Size 3 12 i Export Size 4 14 Netscape Navigator Size 5 8 G l LibreOffice Basic Size 6 24 3 Display warning Size 7 36 Print layout W Copy local graphics to Internet Character set Western Europe Windows 14 Figure 38 Choosing HTML compatibility options Import Use English USA locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page the decimal and thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page The clipboard however contains no information about the locale If this option is not selected numbers will be interpreted according to the Language Locale setting in Tools Options Language Settings Languages see page 45 If this option is selected numbers will be interpreted as for the English USA locale Import Import unknown HTML tags as fields Select this option if you want tags that are not recognized by LibreOffice to be imported as fields For an opening tag an HTML_ON field will be created with the value of the tag name For a cl
252. form should look like Figure 207 st T Figure 207 Finished form Step 11 Change the tab order The Tab key moves the cursor from field to field This is much easier to do than to click each field to enter data into it It also permits us to group our expenses into areas before we begin entering data For example all of our meal receipts can be grouped together as can our snacks and also our fuel purchases 1 Control click the Date field 2 Click the Form Design icon in the Form Controls toolbar to open the Form Design toolbar Figure 208 or choose View Toolbars Form Design to open this toolbar 3 Click the Activation Order icon circled 216 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Figure 208 Form Design toolbar with Activation Order icon circled 4 Rearrange the order of the fields in the Tab Order window a Find the txtWPayment listing near the bottom of the list and click it b Click the Move Up button until txtPayment is just below fmtMotel c Use the same two steps to put the fields in the same order as in Figure 209 Click OK Controls Automatic Sort txtLPayment fmiSupper imtSnackCost txtSn Payment txtMiscNotes Figure 209 Tab order for the main form 5 Save and close the form 6 Save the database Creating forms and subforms in Design View This method requires using the Form Controls and Form Design toolbars extensively These techniques are beyond the scope of this
253. g do any of the following e On the toolbar click the arrow at the end of the toolbar and choose Customize Toolbar e Choose View Toolbars Customize from the menu bar e Choose Tools Customize from the menu bar and pick the Toolbars page Figure 317 To customize toolbars 1 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed toolbar for the application for example Writer or for a selected document 2 Inthe section LibreOffice lt name of the program example Writer Toolbars select from the Toolbar drop down list the toolbar that you want to customize 3 You can create a new toolbar by clicking on the New button or customize existing toolbars by clicking on the Toolbar or Modify buttons and add commands to a toolbar by clicking on the Add button These actions are described below 4 When you have finished making all your changes click OK to save them Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 335 Menus Keyboard Toolbars LibreOffice Writer Toolbars foobar tan z New pe Mew Document From Tem E Open Save 4 Save As gt Document as E mail Toolbar Content Commands a E E 1 Save In LibreOffice Writer Description Figure 317 The Toolbars page of the Customize dialog Creating a new toolbar To create a new toolbar 1 Choose Tools Customize Toolbars from the menu bar 2 Click New On the Name dialog type the new toolba
254. g a straight line Click on the Line icon on the Drawing toolbar and position the mouse pointer where you want to start the line Drag the mouse while keeping the button pressed Release the mouse button at the point where you want to end the line A selection handle appears at each end of the line showing that this is the currently selected object Figure 160 Drawing a straight line To restrict the angle of the line to a multiple of 45 degrees 0 45 90 135 and so on hold down the Shift key while you draw the line To snap the end of the line to the nearest grid point hold down the Control Ctr key pressed while drawing the line The effect of the Ctr key depends on the settings of the Snap to Grid option on the View Grid menu Snap to Grid on Ctr deactivates the snap option for this activity Snap to Grid off Ctrl activates the snap option for this activity To extend the line symmetrically in both directions from the starting point hold down the Alt key while drawing the line To change line attributes for example the color or line type select the line by clicking on it then use the tools in the Line and Filling toolbar or for more control right click on the line and choose Line to open the Line dialog Drawing an arrow Arrows are drawn like lines Draw classifies arrows as a subgroup of lines Lines with arrowheads The information field on the status bar shows them only as lines Click on the L
255. g is MM DD YYYY Each date must have a before and after it Hence May 25 2007 is written 05 25 2007 or 25 5 2007 depending upon your language s default setting for dates 3 Open anew report Right click the Vacation Fuel Purchases query e Select Report Wizard from the pop up menu When a new report is opened in this way the query used to open it is automatically selected in the Tables or queries dropdown list in the Report Wizard 234 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 4 Create the report Use gt gt to move both fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Click Next 5 Label fields Add a space to FuelCost to make it Fuel Cost two words Click Next 6 Group fields Click Date to highlight it Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 7 Choose layout We will be making no changes in the layout Click Next 8 Create report final settings Use the suggested name which is the same as the query Select Static report Click Finish Creating a dynamic report Now we will create a report with some statistics on our fuel consumption To do this we have to modify two queries End Reading and Fuel Economy We will be adding the FuelCost field to the End Reading query Then we will add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query When opening a query to edit it it might appear as in Figure 239 If you move your cur
256. ge an object s attributes Such as color and border width you can use the Line and Filling toolbar or the context menu If the Line and Filling toolbar Figure 170 is not visible you can display it using View Toolbars Line and Filling From here you can edit the most common object attributes You can also open the Line dialog by clicking on the Line icon and the Area dialog by clicking on the Area gt icon to see more options a amp t h poom Mmm Black A color M Blues E o I I I 1 2 3 4 J 6 f G g 10 1 Styles and Formatting 4 Line Style 7 Area 2 Line 5 Line Width 8 9 Area Style Filling 3 Arrow Style 6 Line Color 10 Shadow Figure 170 Line and Filling toolbar When you select text this toolbar changes to show text formatting options The context menu When an object is selected you can right click on the object to bring up a context menu which provides additional access to the options shown above and another way to change an object s attributes The entries with a small arrow on the right hand side contain a submenu Editing lines and borders Lines arrows and the borders of an object are managed through the Line dialog An object s border is just another type of line Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 183 You can change some properties from the Line and Filling toolbar To see more options select the object and click on the Line icon or right click on the object and choose Lin
257. ge the template or copy the styles into the other documents as described on page 5 7 Changing a style using the Style dialog To change an existing style using the Style dialog right click on the required style in the Styles and Formatting window and select Modify from the pop up menu The Style dialog displayed depends on the type of style selected Each style dialog has several tabs See the chapters on styles in the user guides for details Updating a style from a selection To update a style from a selection 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window 2 Inthe document select an item that has the format you want to adopt as a style Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 55 Make sure that there are unique properties in this paragraph For example if there are two different font sizes or font styles that particular property will remain the same as before 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window select the style you want to update single click not double click then long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and click on Update Style rad fol rel el fe W Ly a EF A E Complimentary dose New Style from Selection Default eee Iir Che First line indent Update Style Hanging indent Load Styles Heading ita Figure 48 Updating a style from a selection Using AutoUpdate AutoUpdate applies to paragraph and frame styles only If the AutoUpdate option is selected on the Organizer p
258. ges Using cross references If you type in references to other parts of the document those references can easily get out of date if you reword a heading add or remove figures or reorganize topics Replace any typed cross references with automatic ones and when you update fields all the references will update automatically to show the current wording or page numbers The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog lists some items such as headings bookmarks figures tables and numbered items such as steps in a procedure You can also create your own reference items see Setting References in Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for instructions 96 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 To insert a cross reference to a heading figure bookmark or other item 1 In your document place the cursor where you want the cross reference to appear 2 Ifthe Fields dialog is not open click Insert Cross reference On the Cross references tab in the Type list select the type of item to be referenced for example Heading or Figure You can leave this page open while you insert many cross references Fields Cross references Functions DocInformation Variables Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Figure Bookmarks Selection The Writer interface Status bar Changing document views Moving quickly through a document Working with documents Saving as a Microsoft Word file Working with tex
259. ges two high and two wide a scaling of 50 would print as one page both width and height are halved e Fit print range s on number of pages defines exactly how many pages the printout will take up This option will only reduce a printout it will not enlarge it To enlarge a printout the reduce enlarge option must be used e Fit print range s to width height defines how high and wide the printout will be in pages Printing rows or columns on every page If a sheet is printed on multiple pages you can set up certain rows or columns to repeat on each printed page For example if the top two rows of the sheet as well as column A need to be printed on all pages do the following 1 Choose Format Print Ranges Edit On the Edit Print Ranges dialog type the rows in the text entry box under Rows to repeat For example to repeat rows 1 and 2 type 1 2 This automatically changes Rows to repeat from none to user defined 132 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Edit Print Ranges Print range Figure 123 Specifying repeating rows 2 To repeat type the columns in the text entry box under Columns to repeat For example to repeat column A type A In the Columns to repeat list none changes to user defined 3 Click OK You do not need to select the entire range of the rows to be repeated selecting one cell in each row works Page breaks While defining a pr
260. gs as summarized in Table 2 Table 2 Print options in LibreOffice components Feature Writer Calc Impress Draw Select pages sheets slides to print Yes Yes Yes Yes a multiple pages sheets slides on one Ves Ves Ves ves Print a brochure Yes No Yes Yes Print envelopes Yes No No No Print labels or business cards Yes No No No Preview pages sheets before printing Yes Yes No No Selecting general printing options On the General tab of the Print dialog you can choose e The printer from the printers available e Which pages to print the number of copies to print and whether to collate multiple copies Range and copies section e Whether to print any comments that are in the document and where to print the comments Print Comments Comments only Place at end of document Place at end of page Cancel Figure 264 Choosing whether and where to print comments Select the Properties button to display a dialog where you can choose portrait or landscape orientation which paper tray to use and the paper size to print on On the Options tab of the Print dialog Figure 265 the last item Use only paper tray from printer preference is not available in Calc Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 257 LibreOffice Writer Options Print to file Create single print jobs for collated output E Print in reverse page order E Use only paper tray from printer pref
261. h LibreOffice 3 3 The fn is replaced by a numbered formula E mc 2 Now you can double click on the formula to edit it For example here is the Riemann Zeta function c zj y 4 3 n 1 N You can reference an equation as shown in Equation 2 with these steps 1 Choose Insert Cross reference from the menu bar 2 On the Cross references tab Figure 262 under Type select Text 3 Under Selection select the equation number 4 Under Format select Reference 5 Click Insert Done If you later add more equations to the paper before the referenced equation all the equations will automatically renumber and the cross references will update To insert the equation number without parenthesis around it choose Numbering instead of Reference under Format Fields Document Cross references Functions DocInformation Variables Database Type Selection Set Reference Insert Reference Headings Numbered Paragraphs Text Figure Bookmarks Insert reference to 45 Page Style Category and Sumber Caption Text Numbering Figure 262 Inserting a cross reference to an equation number Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 253 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing Introduction This chapter provides general information about printing exporting and e mailing documents from LibreOffice Quick printing Click the Print File Directly icon
262. hStyles_PHE Commands Address Book a Selecting Document as source of styles Figure 50 Choosing to copy styles from a document not a template 58 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Template Management T LibOTextBody T LibOHeading 1 T LibQHeading 2 T LibOHeading 0 T LibOGuideName TW LibOPageBreak T LibOToCHead T LibOFocter T Contents 1 T Contents 2 T LibOTip Note Caution T LibOTableT ext W LibOTableCaption T LibOTableHeader 0102653 SettingUpLibO 0103655 StylesAndT ernplates 0103G6 3 StylesTemplatesLO_JH Untithed1 Untitled Address Book Figure 51 Copying a style from one document to another Loading styles from a template or document You can copy styles by loading them from a template or another document 1 Open the document you want to copy styles into 2 Inthe Styles and Formatting window long click on the arrow next to the New Style from Selection icon and then click on Load Styles see Figure 48 3 On the Load Styles dialog Figure 52 find and select the template you want to copy styles from Templates Presentation Backgrounds Presentations US Sizes Text _ Frame _ Pages L_ Numbering _ Overwrite From File Figure 52 Copying styles from a template into the open document 4 Select the categories of styles to be copied Select Overwrite if you want the styles being copied to replace any style
263. have on your system LibreOffice will substitute fonts for those it does not find You might prefer to specify a different font from the one the program chooses Apply replacement table Font Replace with Helvetica Arial amp Helvetica Arial a r r Font settings for HTML Basic and SQL sources Fonts Automatic gt Non proportional fonts only Size 10 l Figure 28 Defining a font to be substituted for another font 36 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 On the LibreOffice Fonts page 1 Select the Apply Replacement Table option 2 Select or type the name of the font to be replaced in the Font box If you do not have this font on your system it will not appear in the drop down list in this box so you need to type it in 3 Inthe Replace with box select a suitable font from the drop down list of fonts installed on your computer 4 The checkmark to the right of the Replace with box turns green Click on this checkmark A row of information now appears in the larger box below the input boxes Select the options under Always and Screen 5 Inthe bottom section of the page you can change the typeface and size of the font used to display source code such as HTML and Basic in macros Security options Use the LibreOffice Security page to choose security options for saving documents and for Opening documents that contain macros Security options and warnings Adju
264. have to go through this process a few times before everything becomes clear in your mind and on paper Using a text document for these questions and answers makes it easier to move the questions around add additional questions or change the answers Here are some of the questions and answers developed before created a database for automobile expenses had an idea of what wanted before started but as began asking questions and listing the answers discovered that needed additional tables and fields What are the fields going to be My expenses divided into three broad areas fuel purchases maintenance and vacations The annual cost for the car s license plate and driver s license every four years did not fit into any of these It will be a table of its own license fees What fields fit the fuel purchases area Date purchased odometer reading fuel cost fuel quantity and payment method fit Fuel economy can be calculated with a query What fields fit the maintenance area Date of service odometer reading type of service cost of service and next scheduled service of this type for example for oil changes list when the next oil change should be But it would be nice if there was a way to write notes So a field for notes was added to the list What fields fit the vacations area Date odometer reading fuel including all the fields of the fuel table food including meals and snacks motel total tolls and miscel
265. he cell is circled in Figure 243 In the Options section Figure 244 a Change the number of Decimal places to 3 b Click the green checkmark Click OK Options Decimal places IB a Negative numbers red Leading zeroes Thousands separator Format code 0 000 lv Figure 244 Option section of the Number Formating window Change the Cost per mile field a Right click in the cell below Fuel Cost b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency Click OK Change the Fuel Cost field a Right click in the cell below Cost per mile b Select Number Format c Inthe Category list select Currency d Inthe Option section e Set the number of decimal places to 3 s Click the green checkmark e Click OK Step 4 Save and close the report Double click the report It should now look like Figure 245 238 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Tit Author Dan Lewis Date STAA 8 Date Friday May 25 2007 Date saturday May 26 2007 Date sunday May 27 2007 Figure 245 Final report More ways to create reports An extension is available to assist in report creation Report Builder creates stylish complex database reports You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields It is installed by default with Libreoffice To install this extension follow these steps 1 Choose Tools Extension Manager from the m
266. he cursor moves You should also have both rulers active View Ruler Step 1 Change the Date field 1 Control click the Date field to select it 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right side It should change toa double headed arrow 3 Hold the left mouse button down as you drag the cursor to the right until the length is 6 cm The vertical dashed line is lined up with the 6 Release the mouse button 4 Click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar The Properties Date Field window opens Each line contains a property of the field Fe we oO EN e ac 20 EN a Figure 194 Form Controls toolbar 208 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 e Scroll down to the Date format property This is a dropdown list with Standard short as the default setting Click it to open the list Select the Standard long entry Scroll down to the Dropdown property Its default setting is No It is also a dropdown list Click to open the list Select Yes To see what the Date field will look like click the Form Mode OnlOff icon the second icon from the left in Figure 194 You can do this any time you want to see the form with the changes you have made Step 2 Shorten the width of some fields All of the fields with a label containing the word payment are too wide They need shortening before the controls are moved 1 Control click the BPayment field Figure 195 Selecting a fie
267. he dialog after use usually clicking OK or another button saves your changes and closes the dialog then you can again work with your document Some dialogs can be left open as you work So you can switch back and forth between the dialog and your document An example of this type is the Find amp Replace dialog Page Style Default Organizer Background Sheet 1 Page order a 5 Left to right then down Mf First page number Frint E Column and row headers 3 E Grid W Drawing objects L Comments E Formulas Objects graphics W Zero values Scale Scaling mode Reduce enlarge printout Figure 9 Dialog showing common controls 1 Tabbed page not strictly speaking a control 2 Radio buttons only one can be selected at a time 3 Checkbox more than one can be selected at a time 4 Spin box click the up and down arrows to change the number shown in the text box next to it or type in the text box 5 Thumbnail or preview 6 Drop dowyn list from which to select an item 7 Push buttons Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 19 Starting a new document You can start a new blank document in LibreOffice in several ways When LibreOffice is open but no document is open for example if you close all the open documents but leave the program running the Start Center is shown Click one of the icons to open a new document of that type or click the Templates icon to start a new document using a template S
268. he fields in the order you desire You can also limit the fields you use to less than all of the fields available e If you want to use all of the fields use the double arrow pointing to the right to move all of them at one time The order of the fields in the table you create will be the same as in the data source table e To remove a single field from the Table Column s list click the field and use the single arrow pointing to the left 5 To start over click the double arrow pointing to the left gq Insert Database Columns x Insert data as Table Fields Text Table Database columns Table column s Miscellaneous x W Date MiscNotes aa Breakfast MiscPayment BPayment Motel Lunch MPayment LPayment Odometer SnackCost snackNo z Format From database Insert table heading Properties General Apply column name AutoFormat Create row only Figure 214 Insert Database Columns dialog 6 Select the settings for your table Use the default settings as in Figure 214 7 Click OK Save the document Calc spreadsheets There are two ways to enter data in a Calc spreadsheet One enters the data into the spreadsheet cells The other creates records in the spreadsheet just like they are done in creating aformina database While you can directly access the data in the spreadsheet cells you can only see the data in the records created in the spreadsheet Entering data directly to the spreadsheet cells use
269. he spacebar Finally the Enter key only acts as a line break to move the cursor to the next line While the Enter key will move from non text fields to non text fields it will not do so from a text field Use the Tab key instead If we did not have a subform for fuel data pressing the Tab key in the last field would save all of the fields clear them and make the form ready to accept data on the second record Since we have a subform form using the Tab key places the cursor in the first Date field of the subform with the date automatically entered to match the Date field of the main form The FuelCost FuelQuantity and Odometer fields are numerical fields The Payment field is a dropdown list Enter the data just as you did in the main form and use the Tab key to go to the next field When you use the Tab key to leave the Payment field it goes to the Date field of the next line and automatically enters the date Now you can enter your second set of fuel data for this day To move to another record when the form has a subform click any of the fields of the main form In this case click the Date field of the main form Then use the directional arrows at the bottom There are four of them from left to right First Record Previous Record Next Record and Last Record Figure 215 To the right of these arrows is the New Record icon Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 223 To create a new record while in another record in the main
270. heets in a spreadsheet Using the Navigator When the Navigator is open Figure 94 double clicking on any of the listed sheets selects the sheet Using the keyboard Pressing Contro Page Down moves one sheet to the right and pressing Contro Page Up moves one sheet to the left Using the mouse Clicking on one of the sheet tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet selects that sheet Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 107 If you have a lot of sheets then some of the sheet tabs may be hidden behind the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen If this is the case then the four buttons at the left of the sheet tabs can move the tabs into view Figure 97 shows how to do this Move to the first sheet Move left one sheet Move right one sheet Move to the last sheet a Sheet tabs MOHE Sheet4 Sheet lt Sheet 3 8 Figure 97 Sheet tab arrows Notice that the sheets here are not numbered in order Sheet numbering is arbitrary you can name a sheet as you wish The sheet tab arrows that appear in Figure 97 only appear if you have some sheet tabs that are hidden by the horizontal scrollbar Otherwise they will appear faded as in Figure 87 Selecting items in a sheet or spreadsheet Selecting cells Cells can be selected in a variety of combinations and quantities Single cell Left click in the cell The result will look like the left side o
271. hough we shall do little walking Make haste Figure 68 Selecting items that are not next to each other To select nonconsecutive items using the keyboard 1 Select the first piece of text For more information about keyboard selection of text see the topic Navigating and selecting with the keyboard in the Help 2 Press Shift F8 This puts Writer in Add mode The word ADD appears on the status bar 3 Use the arrow keys to move to the start of the next piece of text to be selected Hold down the Shift key and select the next piece of text 4 Repeat as often as needed Now you can work with the selected text Press Esc to exit from this mode Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 77 Selecting a vertical block of text You can select a vertical block or column of text that is separated by spaces or tabs as you might see in text pasted from e mails program listings or other sources using LibreOffice s block selection mode To change to block selection mode use Edit Selection Mode Block Area or click several times in the status bar on STD until it changes to BLK Pagel 1 Default English USA INSRT st Hil Now highlight the selection using mouse or keyboard as shown below January October Figure 69 Selecting a vertical block of text Cutting copying and pasting text Cutting and copying text in Writer is similar to cutting and copying text in other applications
272. ht then down Printing an individual slide 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slide to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slide to print 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 Select the slides to print Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 261 a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog select the Slides option b Enter the number of the slides to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of a slide or a selection from multiple slides 1 Inthe document select the section of the slide to print 2 Choose File Print from the menu bar 3 Select the Selection option in the Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog 4 Click the Print button Printing handouts notes or outlines in Impress Handouts prints the slides in reduced size on the page from one to nine slides per page The slides can be printed horizontally landscape orientation or vertically portrait orientation on the page Notes prints a single slide per page with any notes entered for that slide in Notes View Outline prints the title and headings of each slide in outline format To print handouts notes or outlines 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 Inthe Print section of the Print dialog select the require
273. i a g s i E Save As T F a A L 4 BBa _ ode di Docs with new template Update 3 4 Search Update 3 pa Organize New folder J ow 7 sir Favorites Name Date modified Type ME Desktop 0104G653 GettingStarted With Writer 12 16 2010 12 06 OpenDocument T d Downloads E 0114653 CustomizingLibO 12 15 2010 12 49 OpenDocument T Recent Places f 0115G53 KeyboardShortcuts 12 15 2010 1 08 AM OpenDocument T LE My Documents B E 0116653 OpenSourceStandardsDoc 12 15 2010 12 59 OpenDocument T i Ron s Laptop oy Libraries Homegroup 7 la am t File name E ga aid Save as type ODF Text Document 77 ay ODF Text Document Template ott OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw penOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw Microsoft Word 97 2000 XP doc Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf Text bet Text Encoded tet a HTML Document OpenOffice org Writer html working with Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx Office Open AML Text docx Figure 67 Saving a file in Microsoft Word format Hide Folders From this point on all changes you make to the document will occur only in the new document You have changed the name and file type of your document If you want to go back to working with the odt version of your document you must open it again 76 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3
274. ial numbers Fields Column type StandardStandard Standard Standard StandardStandard Standard_ 1 surname ens a a Sa prg danaa eber Jean PO Box 640 Airlie Beach QLD 4802 Australia Figure 92 Text Import dialog with Comma selected as the separator and double quotation mark as the text delimiter Saving as a CSV file To save a spreadsheet as a comma separate value CSV file 1 Choose File Save As 2 Inthe File name box type a name for the file 3 Inthe File type list select Text CSV csv and click Save You may see the message box shown below Click Keep Current Format This document may contain Formatting or content that cannot be saved in the Text CS file Format Do you want to save the document in this Format ania Use the latest ODF File Format and be sure all Formatting and content is saved correctly keep Current Format Save in ODF Format sk when not saving in ODF Format 104 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 4 Inthe Export of text files dialog select the options you want and then click OK Export of text files Field options _ Ok Cancel Character set Field delimiter Text delimiter Help Save cell content as shown Fixed column width Figure 93 Choosing options when exporting to Text CSV Navigating within spreadsheets Calc provides many ways to navigate within a spreadsheet from cell to cell and sheet to sheet You can ge
275. iew Format Tools Window Help Fonts Fant Sze Spacing Alignment Text Mode Figure 258 Changing the font size for a formula 2 Select a larger font size under Base size top most entry gj Font Sizes Base size OK Relative sizes Cancel Text Default Indexes Functions Operators L Limits Figure 259 Edit Base size top to make a formula bigger The result of this change is illustrated in Figure 260 Before mT 3 14159 A fter T 3 141 59 Figure 260 Result of changing the base font size Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 249 Formula layout The most difficult part of using Math comes when writing complicated formulas This section provides some advice Brackets are your friends Math knows nothing about order of operation You must use brackets to state the order of operations explicitly Consider the following example Markup Result 2 2 over x 1 x 2 2 over x 1 x 1 Equations over more than one line x 3 Your first reaction would be to simply press the Enter key However if you press the Enter key though the markup goes to a new line the resulting equation does not You must type the newline command explicitly This is illustrated in the table below Suppose you want to type an equation covering more than one line For example Markup Result Xx 3 a x 3 y 1 x 3 newline x 3 y 1 y l How do add limits to my
276. ights hh 4 Fontwork Alignment Changes the alignment of characters Fontwork Ali ory Choices are left align center right align word justify and stretch justify The effects of the text alignment can only be seen if the Left Align text spans over two or more lines In the stretch justify mode all the lines are filled completely Center Right Align Word Justify Stretch Justify AW Fontwork Character Spacing Changes the character spacing and ing i i Fontwork Charact _ kerning in the object For custom spacing input a percentage TOER value 100 is normal spacing less than 100 is tight spacing Sa more than 100 is expanded spacing Tight Normal Logse very Loose Custom Kern Character Pairs 290 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Using the Formatting toolbar Now let us go further and customize the Fontwork object with several more attributes Click on the Fontwork object The Formatting toolbar changes to show the options for editing the object The toolbar shown in Figure 294 appears when you use Fontwork in Writer Arrow Style Line Colour Area Style Filling Area Style Filling rx Figure 294 Formatting toolbar for a Fontwork object in Writer This figure shows the toolbar floating In its default docked position it is one of the toolbars located below the menu bar The example toolbar has also been customized to show all of the
277. ilable are by default bulleted lists while for normal text boxes an additional step is required to create a bulleted list Creating lists in AutoLayout text boxes Every text box included in the available layouts is already formatted as a bulleted list therefore to create a bulleted list the only necessary steps are 1 From the Layout pane choose a slide design that contains a text box Those are easily recognizable from the thumbnail 2 Click in the text box that reads Click to add an outline 3 Type the text then press Enter to start a new bulleted line The methods for switching between bulleted and numbered lists are explained in Changing the appearance of the list on page 154 Press Shift Enter to start a new line without creating a new bullet or number The new line will have the same indentation of the previous line To switch off bullets altogether click the bullets button on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it selecting View Toolbar Formatting in the menu bar Creating lists in other text boxes To create a list in a text box follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the text box 2 Click the Bullets On Off button a on the text formatting toolbar If the text formatting toolbar is not showing enable it by selecting View Toolbar Formatting from the menu bar 3 Type the text and press Enter to start a new bulleted line 4 The default list type
278. ils Hiding and showing data When elements are hidden they are neither visible nor printed but can still be selected for copying if you select the elements around them For example if column B is hidden it is copied when you select columns A and C When you need a hidden element again you can reverse the process and show the element To hide or show sheets rows and columns use the options on the Format menu or the right click context menu For example to hide a row first select the row and then choose Format Row Hide or right click and choose Hide To hide or show selected cells choose Format Cells from the menu bar or right click and choose Format Cells On the Format Cells dialog go to the Cell Protection tab Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 127 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Protection Hide all Cell protection is only effective after the current sheet has been protected Protecte Select Protect Document from the Tools menu _ Hide formula Se a Print L_ Hide when printing The cells selected will be omitted when printing Figure 120 Hiding or showing cells Outline group controls If you are continually hiding and showing the same cells you can simplify the process by creating outline groups which add a set of controls for hiding and showing the cells in the group that are quick to use and always available
279. images to the built in themes indicated by an icon of another color Method 1 selecting a file 1 Inthe theme s Properties on the Files page click the Find Files button The Select path dialog opens 2 You can enter the path for the file s directory in the Path text box or you can navigate to locate the file s directory Use the File type drop down list to help limit the search 3 Click the Select button to start the search 4 A list of graphic files is then displayed in the window You can use the File type filter again to further limit the search 5 Select the files to add To select more than one file hold the Control key down while you click on each file 6 Finally click Add Method 2 drag and drop 1 Open the document containing an image you want to add to the Gallery and display the Gallery theme to which you want to add it 2 Position the mouse pointer above the image without clicking 3 Ifthe mouse pointer changes to a hand symbol the image refers to a hyperlink In this case press the Alt key while you click the image to select it without activating the link If the mouse pointer does not change to a hand symbol you can simply click the image to select it 4 Once the image is selected evident from the green selection handles around it release the mouse button Click again on the image keeping the mouse button pressed for more than two seconds Without releasing the mouse button drag the
280. in Figure 164 1 Curve filled 4 Freeform line Filled 7 Polygon 45 2 Polygon filled 5 Curve 8 Freeform line 3 Polygon 45 filled 6 Polygon Figure 164 Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines Polygons Draw the first line from the start point with the left mouse button held down As soon as you release the mouse button a first corner point is drawn move the mouse to see how the second Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 175 line will look Every mouse click sets another corner point A double click ends the drawing A filled polygon automatically joins the last point to the first point to close off the figure and fills it with the current standard fill color A polygon without filling will not be closed at the end of the drawing Polygon 45 Like ordinary polygons these are formed from lines but with angles of 45 or 90 degrees between them Freeform line With this tool you can draw just like with a pencil Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the mouse It is not necessary to end the drawing with a double click Just release the mouse button and the drawing is completed If you have selected Freeform Line Filled the end point is joined automatically to the start point and the object is filled with the appropriate color Curves and filled curves For a description of the handling of curves and filled curves see Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide 1 Curve filled 4 Freeform li
281. ine Ends with Arrow icon gt to draw an arrow Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 173 Choosing line endings Several types of line endings arrows circles squares and others are available in Draw Choose View Toolbars Arrows or click on the small black triangle on the Lines and Arrows il icon on the Drawing toolbar to open a toolbar with ten tools for drawing lines and arrows The last used command is stored on the toolbar to make it quicker to call it up again 1 Line 5 Line 45 8 Line with square arrow 2 Line Ends with Arrow 6 Line starts with arrow 9 Dimension line 3 Line with arrow circle 7 Line with circle arrow 10 Line with arrows 4 Line with arrow square Figure 161 Arrows toolbar Drawing a rectangle or square Drawing a rectangle is similar to drawing a straight line except that you click on the Rectangle icon from the Drawing toolbar and the imaginary line drawn by the mouse corresponds to a diagonal of the rectangle The rectangle changes shape as you drag the mouse around Starting point Figure 162 Drawing a rectangle Hold down the Shift key to draw a square Hold down the Alt key to draw a rectangle starting from its center To combine the effects hold down both the Shift and Alt keys simultaneously Drawing a circle or ellipse To draw an ellipse also called an oval or a circle use the Ellipse icon from the Drawing toolbar A circle is simply an ellipse with both axes the s
282. ing files 22 replacement table font 37 Report Builder 239 Report Builder extension 343 Report Wizard database 233 revision marks 95 RGB 169 right to left RTL layout 11 right click context menus 17 rotating an object 182 rows in Calc deleting 111 freezing 113 inserting 110 selecting 109 rulers Draw 167 S save as web page 300 save AutoRecovery information 41 save original Basic code 42 save relative URLs 42 saving files 21 scaling factor user interface 31 scanner 281 screen font antialiasing 32 security 21 security options 37 selecting nonconsecutive items 77 vertical block of text 78 selecting objects 180 selection clipboard 33 selection lists Calc 120 selection modes 179 selection in Calc cells 108 columns 109 rows 109 sheets 110 send backward 181 send document as e mail 271 sequence of styles automatic 70 setup options 28 shadows 185 shapes Draw 178 shared extension 342 sheet tabs Calc 102 sheets in Calc deleting 112 inserting 111 renaming 112 selecting 110 shortcut keys 346 size optimization 42 slanting an object 183 Slide Design dialog 159 slide elements modifying 150 slide master 157 adding text 161 apply 159 author information 162 Creating 159 description 157 loading additional 159 modifying 161 slide show automatically advance 164 See presentation 138 transitions 164 slide show modifying 151 Slide Sorter view Impress 144 slides adding charts 157 adding comments 16
283. ing toolbar showing icons for paragraph formatting Formatting characters You can apply many formats to characters using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 76 shows the Formatting toolbar customized to include only the icon for character formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools Options LibreOffice View EP perut ne Times New Roman he e B 7 u eRe YB AL W ai d 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 1142 43 44 45 1 Open Styles and Formatting 6 Italic 12 Font Color Window 7 Underline 13 Highlighting 2 Apply Style 8 Superscript 14 Background Color 3 Font Name 9 Subscript 15 Open Character Format 4 Font Size 10 Increase Font Dialog 5 Bold 11 Reduce Font Figure 76 Formatting toolbar showing icons for character formatting Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 85 To remove manual formatting select the text and choose Format Default Formatting or right click and choose Default Formatting Autoformatting You can set Writer to automatically format parts of a document according to the choices made on the Options page of the AutoCorrect dialog Tools AutoCorrect Options If you notice unexpected formatting changes occurring in your document this is the first place to look for the cause Some common unwanted or unexpected formatting changes include e Horizontal lines If you type three or more hyphens undersco
284. inished click Next Each field has a Field Type which must be specified Types include text integer date and decimal If the field is going to have general information in it for example a name or a description use text If the field will always contain a number for example a price the type should be decimal or another numerical field The wizard picks the right field type so to get an idea of how this works see what the wizard has chosen for different fields Step 3 Set primary key 1 2 3 4 5 Create a primary key should be checked Select option Use an existing field as a primary key In the Fieldname dropdown list select CollectionID Check Auto value if it is not already checked Click Next A primary key uniquely identifies an item or record in the table For example you might know two people called Randy Herring or three people living at the same address and the database needs to distinguish between them The simplest method is to assign a unique number to each one number the first person 1 the second 2 and so on Each entry has one number and every number is different so it is easy to say record ID 172 This is the option chosen here CollectionID is just a number assigned automatically by Base to each record of this table Step 4 Create the table 1 2 3 If desired rename the table at this point If you rename it make the name meaningful to you For this example mak
285. inks necessary 4 Click the Apply icon S to apply the settings 284 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 El 5 When done click the Save icon i upper right corner to close the dialog to save the imagemap to a file then click the X in the lt q ImageMap Editor TAUOLLE TARA Espanol Portugues f Francais THOUGHT Italiano g ay Hosted By P r Romana AAS Nederlands http www oooauthors org english 0 00 cm 0 00 cm 15 31 cm x 7 28 cm Figure 286 The dialog to create or edit an image map The main part of the dialog shows the image on which the hotspots are defined A hotspot is identified by a line indicating its shape The toolbar at the top of the dialog contains the following tools e Apply button click this button to apply the changes e Load Save and Select icons e Tools for drawing a hotspot shape these tools work in exactly the same way as the corresponding tools in the Drawing toolbar e Edit Move Insert Delete Points advanced editing tools to manipulate the shape ofa polygon hotspot Choose the Edit Points tool to activate the other tools e Active icon toggles the status of a selected hotspot between active and inactive e Macro associates a macro with the hotspot instead of just associating an hyperlink e Properties sets the hyperlink properties and adds the Name attribute to the hyperlink Below the toolbar specify for the selected hotspot e Address the address pointed by the hyp
286. int range can be a powerful tool it may sometimes be necessary to manually adjust Calc s printout To do this you can use a manual break A manual break helps to ensure that your data prints properly You can insert a horizontal page break above or a vertical page break to the left of the active cell Inserting a page break To insert a page break 1 Navigate to the cell where the page break will begin 2 Select Insert Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now set Row break Selecting Row Break creates a page break above the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between rows 14 and 15 Column break Selecting Column Break creates a page break to the left of the selected cell For example if the active cell is H15 then the break is created between columns G and H To see page break lines more easily on screen you can change their color Choose Tools Options LibreOffice Appearance and scroll down to the Spreadsheet section Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 133 Deleting a page break To remove a page break 1 Navigate to a cell that is next to the break you want to remove 2 Select Edit Delete Manual Break 3 Select Row Break or Column Break depending on your need The break is now removed Multiple manual row and column breaks can exist on the same page When you want to remove them you have to remove ea
287. int two pages per sheet in facing pages book layout style print from Print Preview instead See page 264 Writer Printing an individual page 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the page to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence number of the page you want to print The preview box changes to show the selected page If you have restarted page numbering within the document the sequence number is not the same as the page number 3 Click the Print button Printing a range of pages 1 Choose File Print from the menu bar 2 On the Print dialog select the range of pages to print a Inthe Ranges and copies section of the General page select the Pages option b Enter the sequence numbers of the pages to print for example 1 4 or 1 3 7 11 3 Click the Print button Printing a selection of text 1 Inthe document select the material text and graphics to print 2 Choose File Print from the menu bar 3 The Ranges and copies section of the Print dialog now includes a Selection option and the preview box shows the selected material See Figure 267 4 Click the Print button Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 259 What is OpenOffice org q OpenOitice org OOo is both a software product and a communtiy of volunteers who produce and support the sofbware 7 Because someone els
288. ion within the text using the arrow buttons on the Text Formatting toolbar See Adding and formatting text on page 151 for more information Modifying the appearance of all slides To change the background and other characteristics of all slides in the presentation it is best to modify the slide master or choose a different slide master as explained in the section Working with slide masters and styles on page 157 If all you need to do is to change the background you can take a shortcut 1 Select Format Page and go to the Background tab 2 Select the desired background between solid color gradient hatching and bitmap 3 Click OK to apply it A dialog box will open asking if the background should be applied to all the slides If you click yes Impress will automatically modify the slide master for you Inserting and correctly formatting a background is beyond the scope of this chapter but you can find all the information you need in Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide or in Chapter 6 of the Impress Guide Modifying the slide show By default the slide show will display all the slides in the same order as they appear in the slide sorter without any transition between slides and you need some keyboard or mouse interaction to move from one slide to the next You can use the Slide Show menu to change the order of the slides choose which ones are shown automate moving from one slide to the next and other settings To change the
289. ionally apply some basic formatting to parts of the text by selecting it right clicking and choosing from the pop up menu From this menu you can also delete the current comment all the comments from the same author or all the comments in the document You can move the small comment markers to anywhere you wish on the page Typically you might place it on or near an object you refer to in the comment To show or hide the comment markers choose View Comments Select Tools Options User Data to configure the name you want to appear in the Author field of the comment or to change it If more than one person edits the document each author is automatically allocated a different background color Setting up the slide show As mentioned in Modifying the slide show on page 151 Impress allocates reasonable default settings for slide shows while at the same time allowing for customizing many aspects of the slide show experience This section covers only some aspects advanced techniques are explained in Chapter 9 Slide Shows in the mpress Guide Most of the tasks are best done in Slide Sorter view where you can see most of the slides simultaneously Choose View Slide Sorter from the menu bar or click the Slide Sorter tab at the top of the workspace One slide set multiple presentations In many situations you may find that you have more slides than the time available to present them or you may want to provide a
290. is a bulleted list Methods for changing the appearance of the list are explained on page 154 Creating a new outline level 1 If necessary press Enter to begin a new line 2 Press Tab Each time you press Tab the line indents to the next outline level Pressing Enter creates a new line at the same level as the previous one To return to the previous level press Shift Tab In the AutoLayout text boxes promoting or demoting an item in the list corresponds to applying a different outline style so the second outline level corresponds to Outline 2 style the third to Outline 3 style and so on Do not try to change the outline level by selecting the text and then clicking the desired outline style as you would in Writer Due to the way that presentation styles work it is not possible to apply them in this way Changing the appearance of the list You can fully customize the appearance of a list changing the bullet type or numbering for the entire list or for single entry All of the changes can be made using the Bullets and Numbering 154 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 dialog which is accessed by selecting Format Bullets and Numbering or by clicking on the Bullets and Numbering icon on the text formatting toolbar For the entire list 1 Select the entire list or click on the gray border of the text box so that the green resizing handles are displayed 2 Select Format Bullets and Numbering or click on the Bullet
291. isk If LibreOffice finds one or more JREs it will display them there You can then select the Usea Java runtime environment option and if necessary choose one of the JREs listed Java options Use a Java runtime environment Java runtime environments JRE already installed Sun stems Inc 1 6 0 21 Es Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_18 Parameters Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0_07 a Sun Microsystems Inc 1 6 0 oem Class Path rT j Location C Program Files Java jre6 Figure 33 Choosing a Java runtime environment Choosing options for loading and saving documents You can set the Load Save options to suit the way you work If the Options dialog is not already open click Tools Options Click the expansion symbol or triangle to the left of Load Save r Options Load Save LibreOffice General et Load Save VBA Properties Microsoft Office HTML C ompatibility This amp where you define general settings Figure 34 Load Save options 40 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 General Load Save options Most of the choices on the Load Save General page are familiar to users of other office suites Some items of interest are described below Load Load user specific settings with the document Load printer settings with the document Save Edit document properties before saving Always create backup copy ss Save AutoRecovery information every 15 Minutes E Save UR
292. k pages are exported to the PDF This is best if you are printing the PDF double sided For example books usually have chapters set to always start on an odd numbered right hand page When the previous chapter ends on an odd page LibreOffice inserts a blank page between the two odd pages This option controls whether to export that blank page Embed standard fonts In previous versions of LibreOffice the standard fonts Times Helvetica Courier Symbol and ZapfDingbats were only embedded into the PDF when the resulting file was of the PDF A type since the PDF A standards requires this In version 3 3 you can choose to embed these fonts in all PDF documents created by LibreOffice to enhance display accuracy in PDF viewers Initial View page of PDF Options dialog On the Initial View page you can choose how the PDF opens by default in a PDF viewer The selections should be self explanatory Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 267 General Initial View User Interface Links Security Panes Thumbnails and page Open on page 1 a Magnification Fit visible Zoom factor 100 Page layout Default Single page O Continuous Continuous facing Figure 272 Initial View page of PDF Options dialog User Interface page of PDF Options dialog On the User Interface page you can choose more settings to control how a PDF viewer displays the file Some of these choices are particularly useful whe
293. ked The top docked toolbar default position is called the Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is consistent across the LibreOffice applications The second toolbar across the top default location is the Formatting toolbar It is a context sensitive bar that shows the relevant tools in response to the cursor s current position or selection For example when the cursor is on a graphic the Formatting bar provides tools for formatting graphics when the cursor is in text the tools are for formatting text Displaying or hiding toolbars To display or hide toolbars choose View Toolbars then click on the name of a toolbar in the list An active toolbar shows a checkmark beside its name Tear off toolbars are not listed in the View menu Submenus and tear off toolbars Toolbar icons with a small triangle to the right will display submenus tear off toolbars and other ways of selecting things depending on the icon Figure 2 shows a tear off toolbar from the Drawing toolbar Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 15 The tear off toolbars can be floating or docked along an edge of the screen or in one of the existing toolbar areas To move a floating tear off toolbar drag it by the title bar See Moving toolbars below Flowchart x z E E 2 Eg p p g T p g a T EELEE m a Xo ayap 4ver asae ecus e m P R le B S w gt aR Click here and drag Toolbar tears off and floats Figure 2 Ex
294. l as the rest of the presentation 1 Paste the text in the desired position Do not worry if it does not look right it will in a minute 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select Format Default formatting from the menu bar 4 Use the four arrow buttons in the Text Formatting toolbar St to move the text to the appropriate position and give it the appropriate outline level The button with the arrow pointing left promotes the list entry by one level for example from Outline 3 to Outline 2 the right arrow button demotes the list entry by one level the up and down arrow buttons move the list entry 5 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text to change font attributes tabs and so on If you are pasting text in a text box you can still use styles to quickly format the text Note that one and only one graphic style can be applied to the copied text To do that 1 Paste the text in the desired position 2 Select the text you have just pasted 3 Select the desired graphic style 4 Apply manual formatting as required to sections of the text Creating bulleted and numbered lists The procedure to create a bulleted or numbered list is quite different depending on the type of text box used although the tools to manage the list and customize the appearance are the same Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 153 In text boxes created automatically by Impress called AutoLayout the outline styles ava
295. l enter a simple formula 5X4 On the Elements window 1 Select the top left button of the categories top section 2 Click on the multiplication symbol Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 243 Elements Unary binary operators Multiplication Figure 248 Selecting the multiplication symbol When you select the multiplication symbol on the Elements window two things happen e The equation editor shows the markup lt gt times lt gt e The body of the document shows a gray box like this Ux rs Of Gt Figure 249 Result of selecting the multiplication symbol The lt gt symbols shown in Figure 249 are placeholders that you can replace by other text for example 5 and 4 The equation will update automatically and the result should resemble Figure 250 To keep the equation from updating automatically choose View AutoUpdate display from the menu bar To update a formula manually press F9 or choose View Update 244 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 ED E3 Dee e Figure 250 Result of entering 5 and 4 next to the times operator Right click menu Another way to access mathematical symbols is to right click on the equation editor This pops up the menu shown in Figure 251 The items in this menu correspond exactly to those in the Elements window Unary Binary Operators Relations Set Operations Functions Operators Attributes
296. l gt click it to select it e The types of Presentation Backgrounds are shown in Figure 139 By clicking an item you will see a preview of the slide design in the Preview window Impress contains three choices under Presentations lt Original gt Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy e lt Original gt is for a blank presentation slide design Both ntroducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy have their own prepackaged slide designs Each design appears in the Preview window when its name is clicked Introducing a New Product and Recommendation of a Strategy can also be used to create a presentation by choosing From template in the first step Figure 138 4 Select how the presentation will be used under Select an output medium Most often presentations are created for computer screen display Select Screen You can change the page format at any time The Screen page is optimized for a 4 3 display 28cm x 21cm so it is not suitable for modern widescreen displays You can change the slide size at any time switching to Normal view and selecting Format Page Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 147 5 Click Next The Presentation Wizard step 3 appears Presentation Wizard Select a slide transition Effect No Effect Speed Medium Select the presentation type Default gt Automatic Duration of page 00 00 10 Duration of pause 00 00 10 Preview
297. laneous Since these purchases are made by one of two bank cards or with cash want a field to state which payment type was used for each item What fields fit into the food category Breakfast lunch Supper and snacks seem to fit Do list all the snacks individually or list the total cost for snacks for the day chose to divide snacks into two fields number of snacks and total cost of snacks also need a payment type for each of these breakfast lunch Supper and total cost of snacks What are the fields that are common to more than one area Date appears in all of the areas as does odometer reading and payment type How will use this information about these three fields While on vacation want the expenses for each day to be listed together The date fields suggest a relationship between the vacation table and the dates in each of these tables fuel and food This means that the date fields in these tables will be linked as we create the database The type of payment includes two bank cards and cash So we will create a table with a field for the type of payment and use it in list boxes in the forms While we have listed fields we will create in the tables of the database there is one more field that may be needed in a table the field for the primary key In some tables the field for the primary key has already been listed In other tables such as the payment type an additional field for the primary key must be created
298. ld 2 Move the cursor over the middle green handle on the right The cursor becomes a double headed arrow 3 Drag the cursor to the left until the field is 2 5 cm wide 1 inch If you have the Snap to Grid and Guides when moving icons selected in the Design Format toolbar you will see how wide the field is as you shorten it 4 Repeat these steps to shorten these fields Lpayment SPayment SnPayment Mpayment and MiscPayment Step 3 Move the controls to group them by category We want to move the controls so that they look like Figure 196 ment Miscellaneous MiscPayment WIT UPS COIL Tt id a ITI ores k E m Ti m m be fc DO pmm ee g g ii m Tat j BA SIL i Mer u H i a 7 1 i Figure 196 Positioning of controls 1 Click the first control you want to move A border appears around the control with eight green handles 2 Move the cursor over the label or field of the control It change shape to a drag icon 3 Drag and drop the control to where you want it Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 209 Do not use Control click when moving a field It moves either the field or the label A but not both To move both use a mouse click and drag to the desired spot 4 Use the same steps to move the rest of the controls to where they belong Step 4 Change the label wording Field names have been single words for some time However the labels for the fields in a form can be more than one wor
299. le is affected the changed margins apply to all pages using that style To change margins using the rulers 1 The gray sections of the rulers are the margins Put the mouse cursor over the line between the gray and white sections The pointer turns into a double headed arrow 2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse to move the margin Figure 82 Moving the margins The small arrows on the ruler are used for indenting paragraphs They are often in the same place as the page margins so you need to be careful to move the margin marker not the arrows Place the mouse pointer between the arrows and when the pointer turns into a double headed arrow you can move the margin the indent arrows will move with it To change margins using the Page Style dialog 1 Right click anywhere on the page and select Page from the pop up menu 2 On the Page tab of the dialog type the required distances in the Margins boxes Adding comments to a document Authors and reviewers often use comments formerly called notes to exchange ideas ask for Suggestions or mark items needing attention To insert a comment in the text place the cursor in the place the comment refers to and choose Insert Comment or press Ctr A t N The anchor point of the comment is connected by a dotted line to a box on the right hand side of the page where you can type the text of the comment Writer automatically adds at the bottom of
300. lete files within the LibreOffice dialogs just as you can in your usual file manager However you cannot copy or paste files within the dialogs Using the Open and Save As dialogs You can choose whether to use the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs or the ones provided by your operating system To view or change which type of dialog LibreOffice uses 1 Choose Tools Options LibreOffice General 2 Select the Use LibreOffice dialogs option This section discusses the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs Figure 12 shows the Save As dialog the Open dialog is similar 22 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Save as C Users Ron s Laptop Downloads LibreOtftice Documentation Drafts Date modified 10 26 2010 13 53 19 T 0101653 IntreducingLibO_d OpenDocument Text 389 0 KB T 0102G53 SettingUpLibO_dra OpenDocument Text 456 7 KB 10 26 2010 14 06 28 T 0103653 StylesTemplatesLO OpenDocument Text 261 5 KE 10 30 2010 13 36 39 T 0104G653 WriterLO_JHW_201 OpenDocument Text 707 6 KB 10 30 2010 13 36 56 TE 0105653 CalcLibO_draft_201 OpenDocument Text 921 9 KE 10 26 2010 14 01 48 T 0105653 CalcLibO_draft_ RV OpenDocument Text 952 7 KB 10 30 2010 01 40 21 T 0106653 GettingStartedWitk OpenDocument Text 7259 KB 10 30 2010 13 37 14 TEI 0108G55 BaseLO JHW_2010 OpenDocument Text 125 MB 10 30 2010 13 37 34 ka File name 0101653 IntroducingLibO_draft_RMF_20101031 j Save Filety
301. libreoffice org Contents arts cats tts tea sete I EN EIA EEE AA EA NESSE EEEE E E ET 2 POF A S E A A EOE EI E A AAA AE EIET E A 8 Chapter 1 E O GTE E A AEA eee eee eee Serer 9 E 18 5 a A A E E AE 10 TNE GGV aN ae SOF LIDIA MGC cerere ipine enrnnsr p ineno r eT T TOE DE TENOAREN 11 MmU TeQU OMEIN Sarisin eE n NEET T E eee eer enon mn eee eee er ee 11 HOw to gol ne SO WATO oispa a EN i aaa 12 How t0 install he SOWA aceite tg caer N NEEE E E AEE A AN 12 EXON ONS and Aa 0 fs ae een eae ee ee ee Tee CREE AE EEEE a eee 12 A T a A E E A 12 RE EE Fre E A cee 13 Nie Ait L T a eae ere eer eR emer etree gee ee eee eee ere eer re een eee eae 13 PS O E MA VN W aa os sss acti adios a a T eee ee 15 What are all these things CONCO Fcc wiachssmanteresanednnd oesbencenanden ted debenredestsaaeesidindendseubankencdeecdeceeeceet 19 ST ee esate cease tte att ace E EE EES an AAE E E EEEN 20 Opening an exis ng CN aie esegetesestrceerctneeceosg neve pease i a n i in iN TEARRE ran ninn ia 20 Re W018 T E E A E ene 21 Ronanig and dol NO TOS ae eee een Recess EE RE EEEE EEEREN 22 Usmo Ne Openrand Save AS UIO esseer nenn roie nann r Er erao aiani ria rikiai 22 ono Te N WON OE ssis E i O TE AEA 23 Undoing and redoing CS a sp ceestse cs ctaetie esses ew entered asca enw neadeeu endeaciveunielonwesieeqeadaceatca ates 25 BY 9151 5 EEEE T E AAT E AIEA E EN E EET E eee E T A E AE EEN E TE 26 eon L E a EE E EEEE EEEE ee rae 26 Jono le ga iii saa ON a MAC eino Eae aaa ene re
302. lide171 Default O 53 Figure 149 Initial Draw window Rulers You should see rulers bars with numbers on the upper and left hand side of the workspace The rulers show the size of a selected object on the page see the gray double lines highlighted in Figure 150 When no object is selected they show the location of the mouse pointer which helps to accurately position drawing objects more accurately Figure 150 Rulers show the size of the You can also use the rulers to manage object selected object handles and guide lines making it easier to Ho Sears L position objects The page margins in the drawing area are also represented on the rulers B You can change the margins directly on the rulers by dragging them with the mouse To modify the unit of measurement of a ruler right click on the ruler and select one of the measurement units The two rulers can have different units Miles Point Pica Figure 151 Ruler units Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 167 Status bar The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen in all LibreOffice components it includes several Draw specific fields For details on the contents and use of these fields see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book and Chapter 1 Introducing Draw in the Draw Guide The sizes are given in the current measurement unit not to be confused with the ruler units This unit is defined in Too
303. ll You can do this in two ways Using the keyboard After selecting the appropriate cell press the F2 key and the cursor is placed at the end of the cell Then use the keyboard arrow keys to move the cursor through the text in the cell Using the mouse Using the mouse either double click on the appropriate cell to select it and place the cursor in it for editing or single click to select the cell and then move the mouse pointer up to the input line and click into it to place the cursor for editing Formatting data The data in Calc can be formatted in several ways It can either be edited as part of a cell style so that it is automatically applied or it can be applied manually to the cell Some manual formatting can be applied using toolbar icons For more control and extra options select the appropriate cell or cells right click on it and select Format Cells All of the format options are discussed below All the settings discussed in this section can also be set as a part of the cell style See Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in Calc in the Calc Guide for more information Formatting multiple lines of text Multiple lines of text can be entered into a single cell using automatic wrapping or manual line breaks Each method is useful for different situations Using automatic wrapping To set text to wrap at the end of the cell right click on the cell and select Format Cells or choose Format Cells from the menu bar o
304. ll information into a form including check boxes option buttons text boxes pull down lists and spinners See Chapter 15 Using Forms in Writer in the Writer Guide 98 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc Using Spreadsheets in LibreOffice What is Calc Calc is the spreadsheet component of LibreOffice You can enter data usually numerical ina spreadsheet and then manipulate this data to produce certain results Alternatively you can enter data and then use Calc in a What if manner by changing some of the data and observing the results without having to retype the entire spreadsheet Other features provided by Calc include e Functions which can be used to create formulas to perform complex calculations on data e Database functions to arrange store and filter data e Dynamic charts a wide range of 2D and 3D charts e Macros for recording and executing repetitive tasks e Ability to open edit and save Microsoft Excel spreadsheets e Import and export of spreadsheets in multiple formats including HTML CSV PDF and PostScript If you want to use macros written in Microsoft Excel using the VBA macro code in LibreOffice you must first edit the code in the LibreOffice Basic IDE editor See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros in this book and Chapter 12 in the Calc Guide Spreadsheets sheets and cells Calc works with docum
305. ll of the following 2 We are looking for a particular artist so select CD Collection Artist in the Fields list and is equal to as the Condition 3 Type the name of the artist in the Value box Click Next Step 4 Select type of query We want simple information so the default setting Detailed query is what we want Click Next at the bottom of the window Step 7 Assign aliases if desired Since we have a simple query the Grouping and Grouping conditions are not needed Steps 5 and 6 of the wizard are skipped in our query We want the default settings Click Next 226 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Step 8 Overview Name the query Suggestion Query_Artists To the right of this are two choices Select Display Query Click Finish Using the Design View to create a query Creating a query using Design View is not as difficult as it may first seem It may take multiple steps but each step is fairly simple What fuel economy is our vehicle getting miles per gallon in the USA This question requires creating two queries with the first query used as part of the second query Step 1 Open the first query in Design View Click Create Query in Design View Step 2 Add tables Add Table or erat Tables C Queries CD Collection Fuel Maintenance Vacations Figure 220 Add Tables or Query window 1 Click Fuel to highlight it 2 Click Add Click Close Move the cursor over the bottom
306. ll print on more than one page you can set the order in which pages print This is especially useful in a large document for example controlling the print order can save time if you have to collate the document a certain way The two available options are shown below Top to bottom then right Left to right then down Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 131 Details You can specify which details to print These details include e Row and column headers e Sheet grid prints the borders of the cells as a grid e Comments prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet on a separate page along with the corresponding cell reference e Objects and graphics e Charts e Drawing objects e Formulas prints the formulas contained in the cells instead of the results e Zero Values prints cells with a zero value Remember that since the print detail options are a part of the page s properties they are also a part of the page style s properties Therefore different page styles can be set up to quickly change the print properties of the sheets in the spreadsheet Scale Use the scale features to control the number of pages the data will print on This can be useful if a large amount of data needs to be printed compactly or if you want the text enlarged to make it easier to read e Reduce Enlarge printout scales the data in the printout either larger or smaller For example if a sheet would normally print out as four pa
307. lling and hyphenation dictionaries and thesaurus 2010 05 16 Language lool Open source language checker 1 0 0 LanguageTool MySQL Connector 1 0 1 Oracle i The MySQL Connector for OpenOffice org installs a native MySQL database driver It ts faster seam PDF Import 1 0 3 Oracle The PDF Import Extension allows you to import and modify PDF documents Best results with 100 Report Builder 1 2 1 Oracle Create with the Report Builder stylish smart looking database reports The flexible report editor ca Get more extensions online Help Add Check for Updates Close e Figure 57 Newly added package of templates Setting a default template If you create a document by choosing File New Text Document or Spreadsheet Presentation or Drawing from the main menu LibreOffice creates the document from the Default template for that type of document You can however set a custom template to be the default You can reset the default later if you choose Setting a custom template as the default You can set any template to be the default as long as it is in one of the folders displayed in the Template Management dialog To set a custom template as the default 1 From the main menu choose File Templates Organize The Template Management dialog opens 2 In the box on the left select the folder containing the template that you want to set as the default then select the template 3 Click the Comman
308. llowing presentation formats Microsoft PowerPoint 97 2000 XP ppt and pot Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 pptx pptm potx potm StarDraw and Starlmpress sda sdd sdp and vor Unified Office Format presentation uop uof CGM Computer Graphics Metafile cgm Portable Document Format pdf Opening graphic files In addition to OpenDocument formats odg and otg Draw 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x Sxd and std and the following graphic formats BMP JPEG JPG PCX PSD SGV WMF DXF MET PGM RAS SVM XBM EMF PBM PLT SDA TGA XPM EPS PCD PNG SDD TIF TIFF GIF PCT PPM SGF VOR Opening formula files In addition to OpenDocument Formula odf files Math 3 can open the format used by OOo 1 x sxm StarMath smf and MathML mml files When opening a Word document that contains an embedded equation editor object if the option for it MathType to LibreOffice Math or reverse is checked in Tools Options Load Save Microsoft Office the object will be automatically converted to an LibreOffice Math object 356 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 File formats LibreOffice can save to Saving in an OpenDocument format guarantees the correct rendering of the file when it is transferred to another person or when the file is re opened with a later version of LibreOffice It is strongly recommended that you use ODF as default file format However you can save files in other formats if you wish Wh
309. llustrations Document status Printing sets document modified status If this option is selected then the next time you close the document after printing the print date is recorded in the document properties as a change and you will be prompted to save the document again even if you did not make any other changes Document status Allow to save document even when the document is not modified Normally when a document has not been modified the File gt Save menu option and the Save icon on the Standard toolbar are disabled and the keyboard shortcut Ctril S has no effect Select this option to allow documents to be saved even when they have not been modified Year two digits Specifies how two digit years are interpreted For example if the two digit year is set to 1930 and you enter a date of 1 1 30 or later into your document the date is interpreted as 1 1 1930 or later An earlier date is interpreted as being in the following century that is 1 1 20 is interpreted as 1 1 2020 Enable experimental unstable features To try out two experimental features in LibreOffice in line formula editing and macro recording select this option 30 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Memory options In the Options dialog click LibreOffice Memory These options control how LibreOffice uses your computer s memory and how much memory it requires Before changing them you may wish to consider the following points e Mor
310. ls Options LibreOffice Draw General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected Ti 1S674 63 495x290 M I Information Position Unsaved Digital changes signature Figure 152 Left end of the Draw status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default O e8 75 i Slide Page Zoom slider zoom number style percent Figure 153 Right end of Draw status bar Toolbars To display or hide the various Draw toolbars choose View Toolbars On the menu that appears select which toolbars you want to display For more about working with toolbars see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice in this book The tools available in the Draw toolbars are explained in the following sections The appearance of the toolbar icons may vary depending on your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools Options LibreOffice View Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is the same for all LibreOffice components and is not described in detail in this chapter D Boe i Ged oe me 24 0 Line and Filling toolbar The Line and Filling toolbar lets you modify the main properties of a drawing object See page 183 for details a amp r h poom E ack v amp color pemes b BY Text Formatting toolbar If the selected object is text the toolbar changes to the Text Formatting tool
311. ly For example hte will be changed to the Choose Tools AutoCorrect Options to open the AutoCorrect dialog There you can define which strings of text are corrected and how In most cases the defaults are fine AutoCorrect is turned on when Writer is installed To turn it off uncheck Format AutoCorrect While Typing To stop Writer replacing a specific spelling go to the Replace tab highlight the word pair and click Delete To add a new spelling to the list type it into the Replace and With boxes on the Replace tab and click New See the different tabs of the dialog for the wide variety of other options available to fine tune AutoCorrect AutoCorrect can be used as a quick way to insert special characters For example c will be autocorrected to You can add your own special characters Using word completion If Word Completion is enabled Writer tries to guess which word you are typing and offers to complete the word for you To accept the suggestion press Enter Otherwise continue typing To turn off Word Completion select Tools AutoCorrect Options Word Completion and deselect Enable word completion Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 83 You can customize word completion from the Word Completion page of the AutoCorrect dialog e Add append a space automatically after an accepted word e Show the suggested word as a tip hovering over the word rather than completing the text as
312. ly custom quotes and starting cell content with an uppercase capital letter are controlled by Tools AutoCorrect Options Go to the Custom Quotes Options or Replace tabs to deactivate any of the features that you do not want On the Replace tab you can also delete unwanted word pairs and add new ones as required Autolnput When you are typing in a cell Calc automatically suggests matching input found in the same column To turn the Autolnput on and off set or remove the check mark in front of Tools Cell Contents Autolnput Automatic date conversion Calc automatically converts certain entries to dates To ensure that an entry that looks like a date is interpreted as text type an apostrophe at the beginning of the entry The apostrophe is not displayed in the cell Speeding up data entry Entering data into a spreadsheet can be very labor intensive but Calc provides several tools for removing some of the drudgery from input The most basic ability is to drag and drop the contents of one cell to another with a mouse Calc also includes several other tools for automating input especially of repetitive material They include the Fill tool selection lists and the ability to input information into multiple sheets of the same document Using the Fill tool on cells At its simplest the Fill tool is a way to duplicate existing content Start by selecting the cell to copy then drag the mouse in any direction or hold down the
313. ly a set of cell formats to a sheet or a selected cell range 1 Select the cells including the column and row headers that you want to format 2 Choose Format AutoFormat The AutoFormat feature can only be applied if the selected set of cells consist of at least 3 columns and 3 rows and includes the column and row headers 3 To select which properties number format font alignment borders pattern autofit width and height to include in an AutoFormat click More Select or deselect the required options 4 Click OK If you do not see any change in color of the cell contents choose View Value Highlighting from the menu bar Black 1 Black 2 Blue Brown Currency Currency 3D Currency Gray Currency Lavender Currency Turquoise Formatting Number format Font Alignment Borders Pattern AutoFit width and height Figure 119 Choosing an AutoFormat Defining a new AutoFormat You can define a new AutoFormat that is available to all soreadsheets 1 Format a sheet in the style for the new AutoFormat 2 Choose Edit Select All 3 Choose Format AutoFormat The Add button is now active 4 Click Add 5 Inthe Name box of the Add AutoFormat dialog type a meaningful name for the new format 6 Click OK to save The new format is now available in the Format list in the AutoFormat dialog 126 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Formatting spreadsheets using themes Calc come
314. m or create new styles as described in this chapter Table 1 Styles available in LibreOffice components Style Type Writer Calc Draw Impress Page X X Paragraph Character X Frame X Numbering X Cell X Presentation Graphics included in X X Frame styles Applying styles LibreOffice provides several ways for you to select styles to apply Using the Styles and Formatting window 1 Click the Styles and Formatting icon E located at the left hand end of the object bar or click Format Styles and Formatting or press F11 The Styles and Formatting window shows the types of styles available for the LibreOffice component you are using Figure 46 shows the window for Writer with Page Styles visible You can move this window to a convenient position on the screen or dock it to an edge hold down the Ctrl key and drag it by the title bar to where you want it docked 2 Click on one of the icons at the top left of the Styles and Formatting window to display a list of styles in a particular category 3 To apply an existing style except for character styles position the insertion point in the paragraph frame or page and then double click on the name of the style in one of these lists To apply a character style select the characters first At the bottom of the Styles and Formatting window is a dropdown list In Figure 46 the window shows Automatic meaning the list includes only styles applie
315. make sure the recipient Knows where to put them on another machine so the document can find them For example you might keep images in a subfolder named Images under the folder containing the document the recipient of the file needs to put the images in a subfolder with the same name under the folder containing the document When inserting the same image several times in the document it would appear beneficial to create links however this is not necessary as LibreOffice embeds in the document only one copy of the image file Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 279 Embedding linked images If you originally linked the images you can easily embed one or more of them later if you wish To do so 1 Open the document in LibreOffice and choose Edit Links 2 The Edit Links dialog Figure 283 shows all the linked files In the Source file list select the files you want to change from linked to embedded 3 Click the Break Link button 4 Save the document Going the other way from embedded to linked is not so easy you must delete and reinsert each image one at a time selecting the Link option when you do so Edit Links Source file Element Type Status calc autoformat bmp lt All formats gt Graphic calc delete bmp lt All formats gt Graphic sort lists 1 bmp lt All formats gt Graphic Break Link Source file file D aaaa calc autoformat bmp Element
316. ment unit for rulers in the current document by right clicking on the ruler to open a list of units Click on one of them to change the ruler to that unit The selected setting applies only to that ruler Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 81 Millimeter Centimeter Inch Point Pica Figure 74 Changing the measurement unit for a ruler Checking spelling and grammar Writer provides a spelling checker which can be used in two ways ABT AutoSpellcheck checks each word as it is typed and displays a wavy red line under any misspelled words When the word is corrected the line disappears ce To perform a separate spelling check on the document or a text selection click the Spelling and Grammar button This checks the document or selection and opens the Spelling and Grammar dialog if any misspelled words are found Here are some more features of the spelling checker e You can right click on a word with a wavy underline to open a context menu If you select from the suggested words on the menu the selection will replace the misspelled word in your text Other menu options are discussed below e You can change the dictionary language for example Spanish French or German on the Spelling and Grammar dialog e You can add a word to the dictionary Click Add in the Spelling and Grammar dialog and pick the dictionary to add it to e Click the Options button on the Spelling and Grammar dialog to open a dialog similar to
317. mething must always be put in that field By default Entry required is set to No e CollectionID Change AutoValue from No to Yes e AlbumTitle Entry required Leave Entry required as No unless all of your music is in albums Length Unless you have an album title that exceeds 100 characters counting the Spaces do not change the length 196 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 In Base the maximum length of each field must be specified on creation It is not easy to change this later so if in doubt specify a greater length Base uses VCHAR as the field format for text fields This format only uses the actual number of characters in a field up to the limit set So a field containing 20 characters will only use space for 20 characters even if the limit is set at 100 Two album titles containing 25 and 32 characters respectively will use space for 25 and 32 characters and not 100 characters Artist Use the Default setting And since music has artists set Entry Required to Yes Date Purchased Field type default date setting Entry required should be No You may not know the date Format Only change the Entry Required setting from No to Yes Notes No changes are required NumberofTracks Change the Field Type to Tiny Integer TINYINT Your allowable number of tracks will be 999 Small Integer SMALLINT would allow 99999 tracks if you needed more than 999 tracks Photo Use the default settings When you have f
318. mma gt y GAMMA gt T psi gt yY PSI gt Y phi gt PHI gt theta gt THETA gt Note A complete table of Greek characters is provided in the Math Guide Another way to enter Greek characters is by using the Symbols catalog window Choose Tools Catalog Under Symbol set select Greek and double click on a Greek letter from the list The markup name of the character is shown below the list window 246 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 lt q Symbols Symbol set Figure 252 Symbols catalog used for entering Greek characters and some special symbols Example 2 x 3 14159 For this example we will suppose that e We want to enter the above formula the value of pi rounded to 5 decimal places e We know the name of the Greek character pi e But we do not know the markup associated with the symbol Step 1 Type followed by the text pi This displays the Greek character m Step 2 Open the Elements window View Elements Step 3 The symbol is a relation so we click on the Relations button If you hover the mouse over this button you see the tooltip Relations Figure 253 Figure 254 shows the Elements window after clicking the Relations button The symbol we want is circled Elements Ed Malo aeA P x da d FRetations t 82 4 t 4 74 Elements azb deb alb afb a b a b axb a b aab ab b alb Alle a b a b a b avo azb a b azb aob asb asb axb
319. multiple contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first desired sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the sheet tab for the last desired sheet 3 Hold down the Shift key and click on the sheet tab All the tabs between these two sheets will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets Multiple non contiguous sheets To select multiple non contiguous sheets 1 Click on the sheet tab for the first sheet 2 Move the mouse pointer over the second sheet tab 3 Hold down the Control key and click on the sheet tab 4 Repeat as necessary The selected tabs will turn white Any actions that you perform will now affect all highlighted sheets All sheets Right click any one of the sheet tabs and choose Select All Sheets from the pop up menu Working with columns and rows Inserting columns and rows Columns and rows can be inserted individually or in groups When you insert a single new column it is inserted to the eft of the highlighted column When you insert a single new row it is inserted above the highlighted row Cells in the new columns or rows are formatted like the corresponding cells in the column or row before or to the left of which the new column or row is inserted Single column or row Using the Insert menu 1 Select the cell column or row where you want the new column or row inserted 2 Choose either Insert Columns or Insert Rows Using the mouse 1
320. n will not be overridden by subsequent changes to the slide master There are cases however where it is desirable to revert a manually modified element of the slide to the style defined in the slide master to do that select that element and choose Format Default Formatting from the menu bar Using a slide master to add text to all slides Some of the supplied slide masters have text objects in the footer You can add other text objects to the master page for your slides to act as a header or a footer 1 Choose View Master Slide Master from the menu bar 2 On the Drawing toolbar select the Text icon 3 Click once and drag in the master page to draw a text object and then type or paste your text into the object or add fields as described below 4 Choose View Normal when you are finished The Impress slide master comes with three pre configured areas for date footer and page number Object Area for AutoLayouts Select Insert Page Number or Insert Date and Time to open a dialog box where you can configure these three areas Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 161 Header and Footer Notes and Handouts Include on slide X H AAA MMHAaoO Apply to All Date and time Fixed Variable Language English USA Footer Footer text E Slide number E De not show on first slide Figure 147 Configuring the slide footer areas To change the number format 1 2 3
321. n 0 Preview 4 Chose the information to be listed and the screen resolution Click Next 302 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Web Wizard Steps Customize the selected layout Introduction Include the Following information For each document in the table of contents Documents File name _ File format Main layout Description File Format icon _ Author Number of pages Creation date Size in KB Last change date Web site information Optimize the layout For screen resolution o Preview O 640x480 800x600 O 1024x768 5 Select a style for the page Use the drop down list to choose different styles and color combinations You can browse to a background image and icon set from the Gallery Click Next Web Wizard Steps Select a style for the table of contents page Introduction Style Water Documents Background image ano background image gt Choose Main layout Icon set an0 icon seb gt Choose Layout details The icon set is used For presentations in HTML Format Web site information Preview Site title Document Creation Date Last Change Date Filename 6 Enter general information such as Title and HTML Metadata information Click Next Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 303 Web Wizard x Steps Enter general information for your web site Introduction Title Test Website Documents Main layout HTML Metadata Layout details Des
322. n object is selected text is written in the center of the object and remains within the object Nearly any kind of object contains such an additional text element These texts have slight differences to those in text frames concerning position and hyphenation For more about text see Chapter 2 Drawing Basic Shapes and Chapter 10 Advanced Draw Techniques in the Draw Guide Gluepoints and connectors All Draw objects have associated invisible giuepoints which become visible when you choose any of the connectors under the Connector icon onthe Drawing toolbar and then move the mouse pointer over the object Most objects have four gluepoints as shown in Figure 166 You can add more gluepoints and customize gluepoints using the toolbar under the Gluepoint icon Ed on the Drawing toolbar Figure 166 Four gluepoints Gluepoints are different from handles the small blue or green squares around an object The handles are for moving or resizing an object The gluepoints attach connectors to an object Connectors are lines or arrows whose ends automatically dock to gluepoints on an object When you move the other object the connector moves with it Connectors are particularly useful for making organizational charts You can reorganize the blocks of your chart and all the connected objects stay connected Figure 167 shows two Draw objects and a connector Figure 167 A connector between two objects Draw offers a range of differe
323. n eee ner eee ener Ee eee ee eee 65 Associating a document with a different teMmplate cccccccccccncecnescnescnescnesenescsunsaunseussanesesanes 66 organe mo enD NO eae ee ene ee eee E nee ee eee eae eer ene eer eer 67 Examples Or SMVO USO Ace are eee E ne Ce ae enone cee E meee oe eee Seer eee eer eer eee 68 Chapter 4 Gelling Stared Gm si a acer ea een ene ee nae ener eee te ares Senet oan cee ee E eer rcen cere eer enter 71 UV N a E E E E pct een es ae eee ee 72 Pe T dt 6 ne nee ae eee nee eee nena E ee mentee enn ee aera eee a 72 Changing documen lo cee Renee teens eee er eee een ee ee cre renee Met recent etsy eee Mone ee Ree eee ee ee ere 74 Movngguieky roug a dOCUMEN aan een ern ere tena EERE vee ren er 75 Working with OCU CII i crane otto raiteoadinct Sena edoetediodestadisineeseiowesiedasierendsnasaxnucncwebucsenedededdacsecdecSeheneees 76 OCs hg a eee ce ne eee ee nee ee keener eee ee ern ee fe eee eee een ae nee Tr ELA T EE IE A IAE E E S A A INE ANEAN OE VENEA ET 85 FOT T E erea E E EEEE SEE EEE E 88 Adding commen O a documen ae tn ee een EEEREN ere eee eter 92 ceang a TADIS OF CONT CIN Saasen ner E a E TT arcs a 93 Creating indexes and DIDN COTA DINOS sessed deca scscescncstninacusndeiscnnnsiveencrecsvebscsonddauseeaccesntelaenaauacceneteen 94 WONO WiN 6 icc 1 21g 6 Senne ae eee ee eee nee eee nrc ncn nee E rt creer 94 PTI ace nc tate ipa ANEI EE ag rin a sent cata das any E E P AE E NEA A N A 94 U a e Mire Biel 2
324. n you are creating a PDF to be used as a presentation or a kiosk type display General Window options _ Center window on screen _ Open in full screen mode Display document title User interface options _ Hide menubar _ Hide toolbar Hide window controls Transitions Bookmarks All bookmark levels Visible bookmark levels Figure 273 User Interface page of PDF Options dialog 268 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Window options section e Resize window to initial page Causes the PDF viewer window to resize to fit the first page of the PDF e Center window on screen Causes the PDF viewer window to be centered on the computer screen e Open in full screen mode Causes the PDF viewer to open full screen instead of in a smaller window e Display document title Causes the PDF viewer to display the document s title in the title bar User interface options section e Hide menubar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the menu bar e Hide toolbar Causes the PDF viewer to hide the toolbar e Hide window controls Causes the PDF viewer to hide other window controls Transitions In Impress displays slide transition effects as their respective PDF effects Bookmarks Select how many heading levels are displayed as bookmarks if Export bookmarks is selected on the General page Links page of PDF Options dialog On the Links page you can choose how links are exported to PDF General Initial
325. names for the prepackaged layouts position the cursor on an icon in the Layout section and its name will be displayed in a small rectangle The small rectangle is called tooltip If the tooltips are not enabled select Tools Options LibreOffice General Help and mark the Tips checkbox If the Extended tips checkbox is also marked you will get more detailed tooltip information but the tooltip names themselves will not be provided Several layouts contain one or more content boxes Each of these boxes can be configured to contain one of the following elements Text Media clip Picture Chart or Table You can choose the type of contents by clicking on the corresponding icon that is displayed in the middle of the contents box as shown in Figure 142 If instead you intend to use the contents box for text just click anywhere on the box to get a cursor Click to add title e Click to add text Insert Table Insert Chart Insert Picture Insert Media clip Figure 142 Selecting the desired contents type for a contents box To select or change the layout place the slide in the work area and select the desired layout from the layout drawer in the Task Pane If you have selected a layout with one or more contents boxes this is a good time to decide what type of contents you want to insert Modifying the slide elements At present each slide will contain only the elements that are present in the slide master you are using s
326. nd Cash being the Name entries A The corresponding ID entries are 0 1 2 When the Name field is listed first in the table one of the three names will appear in the payment field of the Fuel table If the ID field is listed first O 1 or 2 appear in the payment field instead 1 Follow the directions in Creating tables in Design View on page 198 In the table the two fields can be Type and PaymentiD In the Field Properties set AutoValue to Yes for the PaymentiD field Set the PaymentiD field as the primary key See Figure 182 2 Save the table using the name Payment Type Field Name Field Type ype Text VARCHAR PaymentiD Integer INTEGER Figure 182 Table in Design View If you have several tables to create with the same fields design one table and produce the other tables by cutting and pasting See Creating a table by copying an existing table on page 198 Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 201 Adding data to the list table List tables do not require a form Instead add their data directly to the table In this example use the names of the two people with a bank card and Cash for cash purchases 1 Inthe main database window click on the Tables icon Figure 175 In the list of tables right click on Payment Type and select Open from the pop up menu a Enter Dan in the Type column in the first row Press the Tab key to move to the second row Notice that the PaymentID value for this
327. nd the scope of this chapter Here is a Summary of the most common choices For an Internet hyperlink choose the type of hyperlink Web FTP or Telnet and enter the required web address URL For a Mail and News hyperlink specify whether it is a mail or news link the receiver s address and for email also the subject For a Document hyperlink specify the document path the Open File button opens a file browser or leave this blank if you want to link to a target in the same document Optionally specify the target in the document for example a specific slide Click on the Target in Document icon to open the Navigator where you can select the target or if you Know the name of the target you can type it into the box 298 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 For a New Document hyperlink specify whether to edit the newly created document immediately Edit now or just create it Edit later enter the file name and select the type of document to create text soreadsheet and so on Click the Select Path button to open a file browser and choose where to store the file The Further settings section in the bottom right part of the dialog is common to all the hyperlink categories although some choices are more relevant to some types of links e Set the value of Frame to determine how the hyperlink will open This applies to documents that open in a Web browser e Form specifies if the link is to be presented as text or as a bu
328. ne Filled 7 Polygon 45 2 Polygon filled 5 Curve 8 Freeform line 3 Polygon 45 filled 6 Polygon Figure 165 Curves toolbar incorrectly titled Lines Writing text Use the Text tool T to write text and select the font color size and other attributes Click at the location where you want to position the text or click and drag to create a larger text frame Press Enter to move the cursor to the next line When you have finished typing text click outside the text frame Double click on the text at any time to edit it When you use the Text tool the Text formatting toolbar is visible it includes the usual paragraph attributes indents first line and tab stops You can create Graphics styles that you can reuse for other text frames Select Format Styles and Formatting or press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window Graphics styles affect all of the text within a text frame To style parts of the text use direct formatting with the toolbar Text frames can also have fill colors shadows and other attributes just like any other Draw object You can rotate the frame and write the text at any angle These options are available by right clicking on the object Use the Callout tool 5 located on the Drawing toolbar to create callouts also known as captions or figure labels 176 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 If you double click on an object or press F2 or the Text icon in the Drawing toolbar when a
329. nerally use the method you prefer Going to a particular cell Using the mouse Place the mouse pointer over the cell and click Using a cell reference Click on the little inverted black triangle just to the right of the Name Box Figure 89 The existing cell reference will be highlighted Type the cell reference of the cell you want to go to and press Enter Or just click into the Name box backspace over the existing cell reference and type in the cell reference you want and press Enter Using the Navigator To open the Navigator click its icon int on the Standard toolbar or press F5 or choose View gt Navigator on the Menu bar or double click on the Sheet Sequence Number Sheet1 3 in the Status Bar Type the cell reference into the top two fields labeled Column and Row and press Enter In Figure 94 the Navigator would select cell A7 You can dock the Navigator to either side of the main Calc window or leave it floating To dock or float the Navigator hold down the Control key and double click in an empty area near the icons in the Navigator dialog The Navigator displays lists of all the objects in a document grouped into categories If an indicator plus sign or arrow appears next to a category at least one object of this kind exists To open a category and see the list of items click on the indicator To hide the list of categories and show only the icons at the top click the Contents icon Click this icon again t
330. ng a label or field selects the entire control A border appears around the control with eight green handles You can then drag and drop it where you want Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 207 Figure 191 A selected control e Control click a label or field selects only the label or the field You can press the Tab key to change the selection from the field to the label or the label to the field Talls o Figure 192 Selecting a field of a control e Moving a group of controls is almost as easy as moving one of them 1 Click the field of the top left control to be moved to select it 2 Move the cursor to just above and to the left of the selected control 3 Drag the cursor to the bottom right of the group of controls and release the mouse button As you drag the cursor a dashed box appears showing what is contained in your selection Make sure it is big enough to include the entire length of all the controls When you release the mouse button a border with its green handles appears around the controls you selected Lu nch Tolls Le Figure 193 Selecting multiple controls Move the cursor over one of the fields It changes to a drag icon Drag the group of controls to where you want them When either changing size or moving a control two properties of the Form Design toolbar should be selected Snap to Grid and Guides when Moving Your controls will line up better and an outline of what you are moving moves as t
331. ng a new style from a selection You can create a new style by copying an existing manual format This new style applies only to this document it will not be saved in the template 1 Open the Styles and Formatting window and choose the type of style you want to create 2 Inthe document select the item you want to save as a style 3 Inthe Styles and Formatting window click on the New Style from Selection icon 4 Inthe Create Style dialog type a name for the new style The list shows the names of existing custom styles of the selected type Click OK to save the new style Create Style Style name NewStyle Figure 49 Naming a new style created from a selection Dragging and dropping to create a style You can drag and drop a text selection into the Styles and Formatting window to create a new Style Writer Select some text and drag it to the Styles and Formatting window If Paragraph Styles are active the paragraph style will be added to the list If Character Styles are active the character style will be added to the list Calc Drag a cell selection to the Styles and Formatting window to create cell styles Draw impress Select and drag drawing objects to the Styles and Formatting window to create graphics styles Copying and moving styles You can copy or move styles from one template or document into another template or document in two ways e Using the Template Management dialog e Loading styles from a templat
332. ng spaces If you want to have extra spaces in your HTML file or web page you need to insert non breaking spaces in LibreOffice To do this press Control Spacebar instead of just Spacebar Saving a document as a series of web pages Writer can save a large document as a series of web pages HTML files with a table of contents page To do this 1 Decide which headings in the document should start on a new page and make sure all those headings have the same style for example Heading 1 2 Choose File Send Create HTML Document 3 Inthe Name and Path dialog type the file name to save the pages under Also specify which style indicates a new page as decided in step 1 4 Click Save to create the multi page HTML document For those who may be interested the resulting HTML files conform to the HTML 4 Transitional 300 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 FS Name and Path of the HTML Document Save in 001 9 100 testdocs webpage html ik My Recent Documents Lu Desktop biy Network PI H File name webpage hi Save az type HTML Document Cancel styles Heading 1 Default Figure Heading 1 Figure 299 Creating a series of web pages from one document Creating web pages using a Wizard LibreOffice s Web wizard allows you to create several types of standard web pages To use it 1 Choose File Wizards Web Page On the first page of the Wizard ch
333. ng the menu font described in Chapter 2 you can add and rearrange items on the menu bar add items to menus and make other changes To customize menus 1 Choose Tools Customize 2 On the Customize dialog pick the Menus page Customize OX LibreOffice Writer Menus Men Menu Content Entries j a Open Recent Documents Save All gH Reload Save In LibreOffice Writer Description Figure 314 The Menus page of the Customize dialog 332 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 4 5 6 In the Save In drop down list choose whether to save this changed menu for the application for example LibreOffice Writer or for a selected document for example SampleDocument odt In the section LibreOffice name of the program example Writer Menus select from the Menu drop down list the menu that you want to customize The list includes all the main menus as well as submenus menus that are contained under another menu For example in addition to File Edit View and so on there is File Send and File Templates The commands available for the selected menu are shown in the central part of the dialog To customize the selected menu click on the Menu or Modify buttons You can also add commands to a menu by clicking on the Add button These actions are described in the following sections Use the up and down arrows next to the Entries list to move the s
334. nges 1 Provide a dropdown capability for the Date field in the main form and lengthen the field to show the day of the week month day and year 2 Shorten the length of the payment fields all fields containing the word Payment 3 Move the controls into groups food fuel subform and miscellaneous 4 Change the wording of some of the labels Some single words should be two words Some abbreviations should be used if possible Misc for miscellaneous 5 Change the lengths of several fields and labels Only Lunch Supper Motel and Tolls have acceptable lengths But for a better appearance changes will be made to these as well 6 Replace all the fields whose label ends in Payment with a list box containing the entries from the Payment Type table 7 Lengthen the Note field vertically add a scroll bar and move it 8 Make changes in the Date and PaymentType columns of the subform that are similar to the changes in the main form 9 Add headings for each group in the main form 10 Change the background to a picture then modify some of the labels so that they can be read clearly Change the font color of the headings Here are some methods that we will be using in these steps The controls in the main form consists of a label and its field Sometimes we want to work with the entire control other times we want to work with only the label or the field and there are times when we want to work with a group of controls e Clicki
335. ning and saving files Help system LibreOffice comes with an extensive Help system This is your first line of Support for using LibreOffice To display the full Help system press F1 or select LibreOffice Help from the Help menu In addition you can choose whether to activate Tips Extended tips and the Help Agent using Tools Options LibreOffice General If Tips are enabled place the mouse pointer over any of the icons to see a small box tooltip with a brief explanation of the icon s function For a more detailed explanation select Help What s This and hold the pointer over the icon Free online support The LibreOffice community not only develops software but provides free volunteer based support Users of LibreOffice can get comprehensive online support from the community through mailing lists or forums There are also other websites run by users that offer free tips and tutorials 12 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Free LibreOffice support Answers to Frequently Asked Questions FAQs http www libreoffice org get help fag Documentaien User guides how tos and other documentation http www libreoffice org get help documentation B l Free community support is provided by a network of experienced users Mailing Lists http www libreoffice org get help mailing lists The LibreOffice website in your language l http www libreoffice org international sites Intern
336. ns use a table to keep items lined up and so you can type in both columns This is a borderless table Each pair of words is in a Separate row and each word is ina perepere tu oi Pe ee rr amsa a az ae arm ae a mra CET ae i aa aT ara mra e Aaro er innar An Anere je Aaj oe A i Amm daf dnw Creating headers and footers A header is an area that appears at the top of a page A footer appears at the bottom of the page Information such as page numbers inserted into a header or footer displays on every page of the document with that page style To insert a header choose Insert Header Default or the page style if not Default Other information such as document titles and chapter titles is often put into the header or footer These items are best added as fields That way if something changes the headers and footers are updated automatically Here is one common example To insert the document title into the header 1 Choose File Properties Description and type a title for your document 2 Add a header Insert Header Default 3 Place the cursor in the header part of the page 4 Choose Insert Fields Title The title should appear on a gray background which does not show when printed and can be turned off 5 To change the title for the whole document go back to File Properties Description Fields are covered in detail in Chap
337. ns can be restricted See Figure 275 After you set a password for permissions the other choices on the Security page become available e With both the open password and permission password set the PDF can only be opened with the correct password and its permissions can be restricted Note Permissions settings are effective only if the user s PDF viewer respects the settings Figure 276 shows the pop up dialog displayed when you click the Set open password button on the Security page of the PDF Options dialog General Initial view User Interface Links Security Set open password Mo open password set POF document will not be encrypted Permission password set POF document will be restricted Printing Not permitted Low resolution 150 dpi High resolution Changes Not permitted Inserting deleting and rotating pages Filling in Form Fields Commenting filling in form Fields O Any except extracting pages Enable copying of content Enable text access For accessibility tools Figure 275 Security page of PDF Options dialog 270 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 General Initial view User InterFace Links Security Set open password Mo open password set POF document will not be encrypted Set permission password Set Open Password Password dekh Cancel Confirm kkkh Figure 276 Setting a password to encrypt a PDF Exporting to other fo
338. nt connectors and connector functions Open the floating Connector toolbar by clicking on the arrow next to the Connector icon ls 7 For more about connectors and gluepoints see Chapter 9 Organization Charts Flow Diagrams and More in the Draw Guide Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 177 Drawing geometric shapes Geometric shapes include basic shapes symbol shapes block arrows flowcharts callouts and Stars Figure 168 shows part of the Drawing toolbar with the icons referred to in the following sections Clicking on the arrow next to the icon opens a floating toolbar with the relevant work tools The use of all these tools is similar to that of the Rectangle tool even though they produce different geometric shapes e B P x Figure 168 Part of the main Drawing toolbar Basic shapes The Basic Shapes icon g makes available the range of tools for Basic Shapes Tx drawing basic shapes including a rectangular tool identical to the T one on the main toolbar The only differences you will see are in the information field in the G kh TF F status bar in this case shape selected rather than Rectangle selected amp ar ra a m Symbol shapes The Symbol Shapes icon provides an array of tools for Symbol Shapes TX drawing the various symbols Qe J OB or Uil Egs Block arrows The Block Arrows icon 7 opens the Block Arrows toolbar Block Arrows Tx
339. ntime Environment JRE 1 6 x or higher be installed on your computer Although LibreOffice will work without Java support some features will not be available If you have an older PC and do not need the features requiring the JRE you can disable it to speed up the loading of the program For a more detailed listing of requirements see the LibreOffice website http www libreoftice org get help system requirements How to get the software The software can be downloaded from http www libreoffice org You can also download the software by using a Peer to Peer client such as BitTorrent at the same address Linux users will find LibreOffice included in many of the latest Linux distributions Ubuntu is just one example How to install the software Information on installing and setting up LibreOffice on the various supported operating systems is given here http www libreoffice org get help installation Extensions and add ons Extensions and add ons are available to enhance LibreOffice Several extensions are installed with the program and others are available from the official extensions repository http extensions libreoffice org See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for more information on installing them How to get help This book the other LibreOffice user guides the built in Help system and user support systems assume that you are familiar with your computer and basic functions such as starting a program Ope
340. o this is covered in Macro organization on page 319 Use these steps to create a library to contain your macro 1 Use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the Macro dialog see Figure 300 and Figure 305 2 Click Organizer to open the Basic Macro Organizer dialog See Figure 306 3 Select the Libraries tab 4 Set the Location to My Macros amp Dialogs which is the default 5 Click New to open the New Library dialog Enter a library name such as TestLibrary and click OK 6 Select the Modules tab 7 Inthe Module list expand My Macros and select TestLibrary A module named Module1 already exists and can contain your macro You can click New to create another module in TestLibrary 8 Select the Module1 or the new module that you created and click Edit to open the Integrated Debugging Environment IDE 9 The IDE is a text editor for macros that allows you to edit and create macros Copy the macro into the IDE When a new module is created it contains a comment and an empty macro named Main that does nothing Listing 2 Contents of Module after it is created Sub Main 310 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 End Sub Add the new macro either before Sub Main or after End Sub In Listing 3 the new macro has been added before Sub Main Listing 3 Module1 after adding the new macro Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub Sub Main End Sub Click on the Run
341. o Is to have a landscape page in the middle of a document whereas the other pages are in a portrait orientation This can also be done with page breaks and page styles Different headers on right and left pages Page styles can be set up to have the facing left and right pages mirrored or only right first pages of chapters are often defined to be right page only or only left When you insert a header ona page style set up for mirrored pages or right and left pages you can have the contents of the header be the same on all pages or be different on the right and left pages For example you can put the page number on the left hand edge of the left pages and on the right hand edge of the right pages put the document title on the right hand page only or make other changes Controlling page breaks automatically Writer automatically flows text from one page to the next If you do not like the default settings you can change them For example you can require a paragraph to start on a new page or column and specify the style of the new page A typical use is for chapter titles to always start on a new right hand odd numbered page Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 69 Compiling an automatic table of contents To compile an automatic table of contents first apply styles to the headings you want to appear in the contents list then use Tools Outline Numbering to tell Writer which styles go with which level in the table of contents Se
342. o be edited Removing data from a cell Data can be removed deleted from a cell in several ways Removing data only The data alone can be removed from a cell without removing any of the formatting of the cell Click in the cell to select it and then press the Delete key Removing data and formatting The data and the formatting can be removed from a cell at the same time Press the Backspace key or right click and choose Delete Contents or use Edit Delete Contents to open the Delete Contents dialog From this dialog the different aspects of the cell can be deleted To delete everything in a cell contents and format check Delete all Delete Contents ka selection OK _ _ sS Te Cancel Numbers Date amp time Formulas Notes E Formats Objects Figure 112 Delete Contents dialog Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 121 Replacing all the data in a cell To remove data and insert new data simply type over the old data The new data will retain the Original formatting Changing part of the data in a cell Sometimes it is necessary to change the contents of cell without removing all of the contents for example if the phrase Sales in Qtr 2 is in a cell and it needs to be changed to Sales rose in Qtr 2 It is often useful to do this without deleting the old cell contents first The process is the similar to the one described above but you need to place the cursor inside the ce
343. o from the menu bar The Edit menu shows the latest change that can be undone see below for an example from Writer File i d View Insert Format Table Tools Wir amp Undo Delete fox Ctri Z fa Redo Delete rabbit Ctri Figure 15 Edit Undo last action Click the small triangle to the right of the Undo icon to get a list of all the changes that can be undone You can select multiple changes and undo them at the same time Undo 1 action Figure 16 List of actions that can be undone After changes have been undone Redo becomes active To redo a change select Edit Redo or press Control Y or click on the Redo icon As with Undo click on the triangle to the right of the arrow to get a list of the changes that can be reapplied To modify the number of changes LibreOffice org remembers choose Tools Options LibreOffice Memory and in the Undo section change Number of steps Be aware that asking LibreOffice to remember more changes consumes more computer memory Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 25 Closing a document To close a document choose File Close You can also close a document by clicking on the Close icon on the document window This button looks like the X shown in Figure 17 It may be in a different location on your operating system Figure 17 Close icons If more than one LibreOffice window is open each window looks like the sample shown on
344. o show the list Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 105 eq Navigator Column Row 7 Fo Sheets Sheetl Sheet2 Sheet3 Range names gt amp Database Ranges P Linked areas my Graphics Graphics 1 ib OLE objects j Comments sample mw Drawing objects Untitled1 active w Figure 94 The Navigator in Calc Moving from cell to cell In the spreadsheet one cell normally has a black border This black border indicates where the focus is see Figure 95 If a group of cells is selected they are highlighted in a light blue color with the focus cell having a black border Using the mouse To move the focus using the mouse simply move the mouse pointer to the cell where you want the focus to be and click the left mouse button This changes the focus to the new cell This method is most useful when the two cells are a large distance apart rl A E s gt ee Figure 95 Left One selected cell and right a group of selected cells Using the Tab and Enter keys e Pressing Enter or Shift Enter moves the focus down or up respectively e Pressing Tab or Shift Tab moves the focus to the right or to the left respectively 106 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Using the arrow keys Pressing the arrow keys on the keyboard moves the focus in the direction of the arrows Using Home End Page Up and Page Down e Home moves the focus to the start of a row e End moves the focus to the column furthest to the
345. o to open the Macro Selector dialog see Error Reference source not found Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name kW ClearFormulasOnSheetOne Run CopyCells dimpleSump ee El DumbTester extract _1st HyperlinkURL t Help ExtractSelected FindComponentWithURL FindLastSpace GetCalcLangquageData GetCellAl l GetCellByName GetDocURL getLastUsedRow HHaa e fe fe Figure 309 Use the Macro Selector dialog to run macros Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 323 2 Select the library and module in the Library list left hand side 3 Select the macro in the Macro name list right hand side 4 Click Run to run the macro Although you can use Tools Macros Run Macro to run all macros this is not efficient for frequently run macros A more common technique is to assign a macro to a toolbar button menu item keyboard shortcut or a button embedded in a document While choosing a method it is also good to ask questions such as e Should the macro be available for only one document or globally for all documents e Does the macro pertain to a specific document type such as a Calc document e How frequently will the macro be used The answers will determine where to store the macro and how to make it available For example you will probably not add a rarely used macro to a toolbar To help determine your choices see T
346. of our first decade encourage wide participation in the Community and co ordinate activity across the Community Some of our corporate supporters include Canonical The GNOME Foundation Google Novell and Red Hat Additonally over 450 000 people from nearly every part of the globe have joined this project with the idea of creating the best possible office suite that all can use This is the essence of an open source community With its open source software licence LibreOffice is key in the drive to provide an office suite that is available to anyone anywhere for commercial or personal use The software has been translated into many languages and runs on all major operating systems New functionality can be added in the form of extensions The LibreOffice community invites contributors in all areas including translators software developers graphic artists technical writers editors donors and end user support Whatever you do best you can make a difference in LibreOffice The Community operates internationally in all time zones and in many languages linked through the internet at www libreoffice org and www documentfoundation org 352 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 How is LibreOffice licensed LibreOffice is distributed under the Open Source Initiative OSI approved Lesser General Public License LGPL The LGPL license is available at The Document Foundation s website at http www documentfoundation org lgpl
347. ofessional desktop publishing applications that use special fonts and complex vector graphics are not suitable for the PDF Import Extension Similarly importing large documents may cause performance issues 342 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Presenter Console Provides extra control over Impress presentations for example the presenter has ability to see the upcoming slide the slide notes and a presentation timer while the audience sees only the current slide The Presenter Console displays the elements in three easily changeable views e The first view displays the current slide including the effects and the upcoming slide e The second view shows the speaker s notes in large clear and scalable type plus the current and upcoming slide e The third view is a slide sorter view with the slide thumbnails Note The Presenter Console works only on operating systems that support multiple displays Report Builder Creates professional database reports from Base You can define group and page headers group and page footers and calculation fields Export your reports to PDF or OpenDocument formats or send them as email attachments Professional Template Pack II Provides more than 120 templates for Writer Calc and Impress Available in several languages After you have installed this extension you will find the templates under File New Templates and Documents Template Changer for Writer Adds two new items to
348. olbar commands Toolbar buttons usually have icons not words on them but not all of the commands have associated icons To choose an icon for a command select the command and click Modify Change icon On the Change Icon dialog you can scroll through the available icons select one and click OK to assign it to the command Change Icon e The size of an icon should be 16x16 pixel to achieve best quality Different sized icons will be scaled automatically OK cancel Help Figure 318 Change Icon dialog To use a custom icon create it in a graphics program and import it into LibreOffice by clicking the Import button on the Change Icon dialog Custom icons should be 16 x 16 pixels in size to achive the best quality and should not contain more than 256 colors Example Adding a Fax icon to a toolbar You can customize LibreOffice so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax 1 Be sure the fax driver is installed Consult the documentation for your fax modem for more information 2 Choose Tools Options LibreOffice Writer Print The dialog shown in Figure 319 opens 3 Select the fax driver from the Fax list and click OK Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 337 Options LibreOffice Writer Print LibreOffice Loadl Save Contents Pages Comments Language Settings Fictures and objects Left pages None LibreOffice Write a
349. om the Gallery The Gallery provides a convenient way to group reusable objects such as graphics and sounds that you can insert into your documents The Gallery is available in all components of LibreOffice See Managing the LibreOffice Gallery on page 282 You can copy or link an object from the Gallery into a document To insert an object 1 Choose Tools Gallery or click the Gallery icon E on the Standard toolbar in Writer and Calc or the Drawing toolbar in Impress and Draw 2 Select a theme 3 Select an object with a single click 4 Drag and drop the image into the document See Figure 284 You can also right click on the object and choose Insert Copy File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Window Help b x ees 7 i aae a a E amp Bullets i Homepage My Theme Rulers E Sounds al Ahlm eT v a Oro MDT AA wie Cr B Boy rr 11 947 3 22 f 0 00x 0 00 Slide 1 1 Defaut e 100 Figure 284 Copying a Tah object from the Gallery into a document Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 281 To insert an object as a link 1 Choose Tools Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click then while pressing the Shift and Control keys drag and drop the object into the document Inserting an image as a background To insert an image as the background to a page or paragraph 1 Cho
350. ools Options LibreOffice Draw General where you can also change the scale of the page Another way to change the scale is to double click on the number shown in the status bar Rectangle selected tT 156 463 22 455x250 M I Information Position Unsaved Digital changes signature Figure 129 Left end of the Impress status bar Slide 1 1 Layout Default O e amp 75 i Slide Page Zoom slider Zoom number style percent Figure 130 Right end of Impress status bar Navigator The Navigator displays all objects contained in a document It provides another convenient way to move around a document and find items in it To display the Navigator click its icon on the Standard toolbar choose View Navigator on the menu bar or press Ctr l Shift F5 The Navigator is more useful if you give your slides and objects pictures soreadsheets and so on meaningful names instead of leaving them as the default Slide 1 and Slide 2 shown in Figure Figure 131 Figure 131 Navigator Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 141 Workspace views Each of the workspace views is designed to ease the completion of certain tasks it is therefore useful to familiarize yourself with them in order to quickly accomplish those tasks Normal view Normal view is the main view for working with individual slides Use this view to format and design and to add text graphics and animation effects
351. oose settings and click Next If this is your first web page the only choice is lt default gt Web Wizard Introduction This Web Wizard is to aid you in publishing documents on the Internet Documents It will convert the documents so that they can be viewed by a web browser In addition it Will generate a Table of Contents page with links For easy access bo the documents The Web Wizard will also allow you bo customize the design and lawout of your web site You Will be able to keep the documents you have published on the web up to date and add or remove documents at any time Choose settings For the Web Wizard default gt m Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 301 2 Choose or browse to the document you would like to format The Title Summary and Author information is picked up from the document s properties if necessary edit it Click Next Tee Wizard Steps Select the documents you want to publish o Introduction Web site content Export to File Format Documents 011765 CreatingwebPages sxw HTML o Main layout Document information Title Style Creating Web Pages Layouk details Web site information Summary Preview Fields ko edit Chapter Title Description tab gt Title Chanter Sobkikle leer Defined Author Steps Choose a layout for the table of contents of your web site Introduction Layouts Documents Main layout Layout details Style Web site informatio
352. or a b c or i li ili etc for the page number field choose Format Page and then select a format from the list in the Layout Settings area To change the paragraph style modify the Background Objects Presentation style To add a other information such as the Author of the presentation or the name of the file choose Insert Fields and select the required field from the submenu If you want to edit a field in your slide select it and choose Edit Fields The fields you can use in Impress are e Date fixed e Date variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Time fixed e Time variable updates automatically when you reload the file e Author First and last names listed in the LibreOffice user data e Page number slide number e File name To change the author information go to Tools Options LibreOffice User Data 162 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Adding comments to a presentation Impress supports comments similar to those in Writer and Calc In Normal View choose Insert Comment from the menu bar A small box containing your initials appears in the upper left hand corner of the slide with a larger text box beside it Impress automatically adds your name and the current date at the bottom of the text box Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter his is a comment Figure 148 A comment Type or paste your comment into the text box You can opt
353. or the inside of an object is Area fill The area fill of an object can bea uniform color a gradient a hatching or an image It can be made partly or fully transparent and can throw a shadow 184 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 In most cases you will choose one of the standard fill options which are all available from the Line and Filling toolbar You can also define your own area fills see Chapter 4 of the Draw Guide for details Adding a shadow In Draw shadows are considered as an area property Click on the Shadow Ly icon on the Line and Filling toolbar You can customize the position distance color and transparency of Shadows by using Format Area Shadow or by right clicking on the selected object and choosing Area Shadow Adding transparency You can make objects partly or fully transparent or even with a varying degree of transparency as a gradient Using styles Suppose that you want to apply the same area fill line thickness and border to a set of objects This repetitive process can be greatly simplified by the use of styles Styles allow you to define a formatting template a style and then to apply that style to multiple objects For more information about styles see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book Special effects With Draw you can apply many special effects to objects and groups of objects This section describes a few of these effects More effects include
354. or the printer The available choices vary from one printer to another but you should find options for the Color settings See your printer s help or user manual for more information 3 The choices for color might include black and white or grayscale Choose the required setting 4 Click OK to confirm your choice and return to the Print dialog 5 Click the Print button to print the document Tip Grayscale is best if you have any graphics in the document Change the LibreOffice settings to print all color text and graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools Options LibreOffice Print 2 Select the Convert colors to grayscale option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Change the LibreOffice Writer or Calc Impress Draw settings to print all color text as black and all graphics as grayscale 1 Choose Tools Options LibreOffice Writer Print 2 Under Contents select the Print text in black option Click OK to save the change 3 Open the Print dialog File Print 4 Click the Print button to print the document Previewing pages sheets before printing You can use the previewing options in Writer and Calc to view the document as it will be printed Different viewing options are available Writer The normal page view in Writer shows you what each page will look like when printed and you can edit the pages in that
355. ose Tools Gallery and select a theme 2 Select an object with a single click right click on the object and choose Insert Background Page or Paragraph Modifying and positioning graphics LibreOffice provides many tools for resizing modifying filtering and positioning graphics wrapping text around graphics and using graphics as backgrounds and watermarks These tools are described in relevant chapters of the other guides Some sophisticated adjustments of the graphics are best done in an image manipulation program and the results brought into LibreOffice rather than using LibreOffice s inbuilt tools Managing the LibreOffice Gallery Graphics in the Gallery are grouped by themes such as Bullets Rulers and Backgrounds You can create other groups or themes and add your own pictures or find extensions containing more graphics The box on the left of the gallery window lists the available themes Click on a theme to see its contents displayed in the Gallery window You can display the Gallery in Icon View Figure 285 or Detailed View and you can hide or show the Gallery by clicking on the Hide button similar to the Hide button for the Navigator and the Styles and Formatting window when they are docked k E Backgrounds E m Bullets B Homepage a My Theme o Rulers O Sounds E T Bat kgrounds confetti C Program Files OpenUffice org 3 Basis share gallery www back
356. osing tag an HTML_OFF will be created These fields will be converted to tags in the HTML export Import Ignore font settings Select this option to have LibreOffice ignore all font settings when importing The fonts that were defined in the HTML Page Style will be used Export To optimize the HTML export select a browser or HTML standard from the Export box If LibreOffice Writer is selected specific LibreOffice Writer instructions are exported Export LibreOffice Basic Select this option to include LibreOffice Basic macros scripts when exporting to HTML format You must activate this option before you create the LibreOffice Basic macro otherwise the script will not be inserted LibreOffice Basic macros must be located in the header of the HTML document Once you have created the macro in the LibreOffice Basic IDE it appears in the source text of the HTML document in the header If you want the macro to run automatically when the HTML document is opened choose Tools Customize Events See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information 44 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Export Display warning When the LibreOffice Basic option See above is not selected the Display warning option becomes available If the Display warning option is selected then when exporting to HTMLa warning is shown that LibreOffice Basic macros will be lost Export Print layout Select this option to export the print layout of
357. other The four choices from left to right are Columnar left Columnar Labels on top As Data Sheet and In Blocks Labels Above Arrangement of the main form 1 Arrangement of the main form Click the z second icon Columnar Labels on top The Columnar Labels on Top labels will be placed above their field 2 Arrangement of the subform Click the third icon As Data Sheet The labels are column headings and the field entries are in spreadsheet format Click Next As Data Sheet 206 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Step 6 Set data entry Unless you have a need for any of these entries to be checked accept the default settings Click Next Step 7 Apply styles 1 Select the color you want in the Apply Styles list I chose the beige which is Orange 4 in the Color table 2 Select the Field border you want I prefer the 3 D look You might want to experiment with the different possible settings 3 Click Next Step 8 Set name 1 Enter the name for the form In this case it is Fuel 2 Click Modify the form 3 Click Finish The form opens in Edit mode Modifying a form We will be moving the controls to different places in the form and changing the background to a picture We will also modify the label for the PaymentType field as well as change the field to a list Dox First we must decide what we want to change The discussion will follow this ten step outline of our planned cha
358. ow Set them to suit your personal preferences User Interface Scaling If the text in the help files or on the menus of the LibreOffice user interface is too small or too large you can change it by specifying a scaling factor Sometimes a change here can have unexpected results depending on the screen fonts available on your system However it does not affect the actual font size of the text in your documents User Interface Icon size and style The first box specifies the display size of toolbar icons Automatic Small or Large The Automatic icon size option uses the setting for your operating system The second box specifies the icon style theme here the Automatic option uses an icon set compatible with your operating system and choice of desktop for example KDE or Gnome on Linux Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 31 User Interface Graphics output Scaling 100 Use hardware acceleration Icon size and style Use Anti Aliasing Small Galaxy defautt Mouse Use system font for user interface Mouse positioning No automatic positioning Menu l Middle mouse button Icons in menus Automatic scrolling Automatic Font Lists Selection Show preview of fonts W Transparency 75 E W Show font history Figure 22 Choosing View options for LibreOffice applications User Interface Use system font for user interface If you prefer to use the system font the default font for your computer and ope
359. p with drawing objects Using Fontwork With Fontwork you can create graphical text art objects for making your work more attractive There are many different settings for text art objects line area position size and more so you have a large choice You will surely find one that fits your document Fontwork is available with each component of LibreOffice but you will notice small differences in the way that each component displays it The Fontwork toolbars You can use two different toolbars for creating and editing a Fontwork object e Go to View Toolbars Fontwork Fontwork TX a y aa ee Figure 289 The floating Fontwork toolbar e If you click on an existing Fontwork object the Formatting toolbar changes to display the Fontwork options as shown in Figure 294 The contents of this toolbar vary depending on the LibreOffice component with which it is being used Creating a Fontwork object 1 On the Drawing or Fontwork toolbar click the Fontwork Gallery icon toolbar is not visible go to View Toolbars Drawing to display it If the Drawing 288 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Fontwork Gallery Select a Fontwork style FOR FON Fonok Cantal owo A Full pen Figure 290 The Fontwork Gallery 2 In the Fontwork Gallery select a Fontwork style then click OK The Fontwork object will appear in your document Notice the blue squares around the edge indicating that the obj
360. pand the Tools library in the LibreOffice library container Inspect the Debug module some good examples include WritedbgInfo document and printdbgInfo sheet 328 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Online resources The following links and references contain information regarding macro programming http www pitonyak org oo php Andrew Pitonyak s macro page http www pitonyak org AndrewMacro oadt numerous examples of working macros http www pitonyak org book Andrew Pitonyak s book on macros http www pitonyak org database numerous macro examples using Base http docs sun com app docs doc 819 0439 StarOffice 8 Programming Guide for BASIC Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 329 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice Introduction This chapter describes some common customizations that you may wish to do You can customize menus toolbars and keyboard shortcuts in LibreOffice add new menus and toolbars and assign macros to events However you cannot customize context right click menus Other customizations are made easy by extensions that you can install from the LibreOffice website or from other providers Customizations to menus and toolbars can be saved in a template To do so first save them in a document and then save the document as a template as described in Chapter 3 Styles and Templates Customizing menu content In addition to changi
361. pane Impress 140 tear off toolbars 15 template associate with document 66 create document from 60 create from document 61 create using wizard 62 deleting 67 description 52 editing 63 exporting 68 Extension Manager 64 folders 67 update document styles from 63 Template Changer extension 343 Template Management dialog 58 templates importing 68 text bulleted or numbered list 153 default formatting 153 formatting pasted text 153 outline level 154 pasting 153 text boundaries Show hide 38 text box AutoLayout 152 154 creating 152 moving 164 vertical alignment of text 152 text box tool 152 text documents Opening 355 Text Formatting toolbar 153 text in Draw 176 theme deleting 284 themes 282 themes Gallery 284 toolbar icons macros 324 toolbars 140 adding commands 336 choosing icons for commands 337 Color Bar 169 creating 336 customizing 17 displaying or hiding 15 Draw 168 Drawing 169 Fontwork 288 Line and Filling toolbar 168 moving 16 Options Bar Draw 169 overview 15 show or hide icons 17 tooltips 29 150 track changes 95 transparency 185 186 two digit years 30 typing errors autocorrect 117 U undo change 25 undoing groups 188 unformatted text pasting 153 ungrouping 188 unit of measurement 167 unsaved changes flag 73 URL Recognition 297 user data options 28 User guides 13 366 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 user interface options 31 user interface part
362. pe maaa ODF Text Document odt ODF Text Document Template ott OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document sxw wo OpenOffice org 1 0 Text Document Template stw ce Microsoft Word 97 2000 4P doc Edit filter Settings Microsoft Word 95 doc Microsoft Word 6 0 doc Rich Text Format rtf Text ct Text Encoded txt mI Figure 12 The LibreOffice Save as dialog The three buttons in the top right of the LibreOffice Open and Save As dialogs are from left to right Go Up One Level in the folder directory hierarchy Click and hold this button for a second to drop down a list of higher level folders to go to one of the folders on the list move the mouse pointer over its name and release the mouse button Create New Folder Default Directory For LibreOffice documents that have been saved with more than one version use the Version drop down to select which version you wish to open in read only mode For Microsoft Office documents only the current version can be opened Use the File type field to specify the type of file to be opened or the format of the file to be saved The Read only option on the Open dialog opens the file for reading and printing only Consequently most of the toolbars disappear and most menu options are disabled An Edit File button is displayed on the Standard toolbar to open the file for editing You can open files from the Web by typing a URL in the File name field on the Open
363. plate 65 deleting files 22 derivative markup Math 251 Design View Base creating a new table 198 creating forms 217 creating queries 227 dictionaries installing 45 dictionary 82 different first page 68 digital rights management DRM 270 digital signature 274 DIM 314 dispatch framework 318 dispatch helper 314 distorting an image 186 divide document into chapters 69 dockable window 17 document closing 26 create from template 60 creating 20 opening 20 starting new 20 document status option 30 document views 74 Documentation 13 drag and drop 278 Draw 189 Draw features 166 status bar 168 toolbars 168 workspace 166 drawing circle or ellipse 174 duplication 186 Flash export 189 HTML export 189 inserting pictures 189 line 173 rectangle 174 save in a foreign format 189 Drawing Object Properties toolbar 287 drawing objects 3D objects 189 grouping 288 grouping and combining 188 360 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 positioning 188 properties 287 Drawing toolbar 169 286 drawing tools 286 duplication 186 dynamic gradients 186 E E mail options 47 e mailing Mail Merge Wizard 272 several recipients 272 Writer document as attachment 271 edit document properties before saving 41 editing data Calc 121 ellipse drawing 174 en dash and em dash 81 envelope printing 263 envelope printing 263 EPS images in PDF 267 equation inserting 242 numbering 252 equation editor 242 brackets 250 derivative markup 25
364. ppears running across the page Drag the mouse downwards and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen splits into two views each with its own vertical scroll bar You can scroll the upper and lower parts independently Notice in Figure 102 the Beta and the AO values are in the upper part of the window and other calculations are in the lower part Thus you can make changes to the Beta and AO values and watch their affects on the calculations in the lower half of the window You can also split the screen using a menu command Click in a cell immediately below and to the right of where you wish the screen to be split and choose Window Split Splitting the screen vertically To split the screen vertically 1 Move the mouse pointer into the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen and place it over the small button on the right with the black triangle Immediately to the right of this button is a thick black line ye Split screen bar Figure 105 Split bar on horizontal scroll bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 3 Hold down the left mouse button and a gray line appears running up the page Drag the mouse to the left and this line follows 4 Release the mouse button and the screen is split into two views each with its own horizontal scroll bar You can scroll the left and right parts of the window independently Removing split vie
365. pply them Sorting records Sorting arranges the visible cells on the sheet In Calc you can sort by up to three criteria which are applied one after another Sorts are handy when you are searching for a particular item and become even more powerful after you have filtered data In addition sorting is often useful when you add new information When a list is long it is usually easier to add new information at the bottom of the sheet rather than adding rows in the proper places After you have added information you can then sort it to update the sheet Highlight the cells to be sorted then select Data Sort to open the Sort dialog or click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending toolbar buttons Using the dialog you can sort the selected cells using up to three columns in either ascending A Z 1 9 or descending Z A 9 1 order On the Options tab of the Sort dialog you can choose the following options Case sensitive If two entries are otherwise identical one with an upper case letter is placed before one witha lower case letter in the same position Range contains column labels Does not include the column heading in the sort Include formats A cell s formatting is moved with its contents If formatting is used to distinguish different types of cells then use this option Copy sort results to Sets a spreadsheet address to which to copy the sort results If a range is specified that does not have the necessary number of
366. programming language snippets that you do not want to check for spelling Specifying the language in character and paragraph styles is the preferred method because styles allow a greater level of control and make changing the language much faster On the Font tab of the Paragraph Styles dialog you can specify that certain paragraphs be checked in a language that is different from the language of the rest of the document See Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide for information on how to manage the language settings of a style You can set the language for the whole document for individual paragraphs or even for individual words and characters all from Tools Language on the menu bar Another way to change the language of a whole document is to use Tools Options Language Settings Languages In the Default languages for documents section of the Options dialog you can choose a different language for all the text ia The spelling checker works only for those languages in the list that have the symbol next to them If you do not see the symbol next to your preferred language you can install the additional dictionary using Tools Languages More dictionaries online The language used for checking spelling is also shown in the status bar next to the page style in use Using AutoCorrect Writer s AutoCorrect function has a long list of common misspellings and typing errors which it corrects automatical
367. r Writer and other features In addition you might prefer to use colors that are different from LibreOffice s defaults for such items as note indicators or field shadings On the LibreOffice Appearance page you can specify which items are visible and the colors used to display various items e To show or hide items such as text boundaries select or deselect the options next to the names of the items e To change the default colors for items click the down arrow in the Color Setting column by the name of the item and select a color from the pop up box e To save your color changes as a color scheme click Save type a name in the Scheme box then click OK 38 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Color scheme Scheme LibreOffice Delete Custom colors On User interface elements Color setting Preview General a Document background _ Automatic Text boundaries C Automatic Is Application background _ Automatic Object boundaries _ Automatic Table boundaries _ Automatic Font color C Automatic a C Unvisited links _ Automatic i Mi 4 CEE i Figure 31 Showing or hiding text object and table boundaries Accessibility options Accessibility options include whether to allow animated graphics or text how long help tips remain showing some options for high contrast display and a way to change the font for the user interface of the LibreOffice program
368. r both You can therefore have up to four portions of the spreadsheet in view at any one time Why would you want to do this Imagine you have a large spreadsheet and one of the cells has a number in it which is used by three formulas in other cells Using the split screen technique you can position the cell containing the number in one section and each of the cells with formulas in the other sections Then you can change the number in the cell and watch how it affects each of the formulas E Beta 3 2000 A0 0 1000 Beta A0 1 AD 0 2880 Beta tA1 1 A1 0 6562 BetatA2 1 A2 0 7219 Heta As t1 As 0 6424 BetatA4r AH 0 7351 Beta tAS 1 A5 0 6231 Beta tAS 1 A6 0 7515 BetatAr gi A7 0 5975 Heta Ae t1 Agi 0 7696 Beta tAg 1 A9 0 5675 Beta 10 1 A10 0 7854 Figure 102 Split screen example Splitting the screen horizontally To split the screen horizontally 1 Move the mouse pointer into the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side of the screen and place it over the small button at the top with the black triangle Immediately above this button you will see a thick black line m Figure 103 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar Split screen bar 2 Move the mouse pointer over this line and it turns into a line with two arrows 114 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Eii Figure 104 Split screen bar on vertical scroll bar with cursor 3 Hold down the left mouse button A gray line a
369. r e mail program with the file attached Similarly if you choose E mail as PDF LibreOffice first creates a PDF using your default PDF settings as when using the Export Directly as PDF toolbar button and then opens your email program with the PDF file attached E mailing a document to several recipients To e mail a document to several recipients you can use the features in your e mail program or you can use LibreOffice s mail merge facilities to extract email addresses from an address book You can use LibreOffice s mail merge to send e mail in two ways e Use the Mail Merge Wizard to create the document and send it See Chapter 11 Using Mail Merge of the Writer Guide for details e Create the document in Writer without using the Wizard then use the Wizard to send it This method is described here To use the Mail Merge Wizard to send a previously created Writer document 1 Click Tools Mail Merge Wizard On the first page of the wizard select Use the current document and click Next Mail Merge Wizard Steps Select starting document for the mail merge 1 Select starting document Select the document upon which to base the mail merge document 2 Select document type Use the current document 3 Insert address block _ Create a new document Start from existing document Start from a template pO Figure 277 Select starting document 2 On the second page select E mail message and click Next
370. r press Ctrl 1 On the Alignment tab Figure 113 under Properties select Wrap text automatically and click OK The results are shown in Figure 114 122 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Text alignment Horizontal Indent Vertical Opt Text orientation kh Degrees Vertically stacked al i S F a F 7 0 Ea ABCD F Reference edge Ar Wee Figure 113 Format Cells Alignment dialog This cell is not set to wrap text automatically So they text will just keep going and goir This cell is set to wrap text automatically The cell will fit more text without getting wider Figure 114 Automatic text wrap Using manual line breaks To insert a manual line break while typing in a cell press Ctrl Enter This method does not work with the cursor in the input line When editing text first double click the cell then single click at the position where you want the line break When a manual line break is entered the cell width does not change Figure 115 shows the results of using two manual line breaks after the first line of text This line contains manual line breaks Lines can be spaced out this way Also the cell width doesnt change but the text can go on C Figure 115 Cell with manual line breaks Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 123 Shrinking text to fit
371. r s name and choose from the Save In drop down list where to save this changed menu for the application for example Writer or for a selected document Click OK Toolbar Name New Toolbar 1 Save In LibreOffice Writer The new toolbar now appears on the list of toolbars in the Customize dialog After creating a new toolbar you need to add some commands to it as described below Adding a command to a toolbar If the list of available buttons for a toolbar does not include all the commands you want on that toolbar you can add commands When you create a new toolbar you need to add commands to it 1 On the Toolbars page of the Customize dialog select the toolbar in the Toolbar list and click the Add button in the Toolbar Content section of the dialog 336 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 The Add Commands dialog is the same as for adding commands to menus Figure 316 Select a category and then the command and click Add The dialog remains open so you can select several commands When you have finished adding commands click Close If you insert an item which does not have an associated icon the toolbar will display the full name of the item the next section describes how to choose an icon for a toolbar command 3 Back on the Customize dialog you can use the up and down arrow buttons to arrange the commands in your preferred sequence 4 When you are done making changes click OK to save Choosing icons for to
372. r the first report from the Vacations table are Date Motel Toll Breakfast Lunch Supper SnackCost and Miscellaneous This report will not require an additional query The second report involves the Fuel table Since this table includes fuel purchases at times other than during the vacation we need to create a query that contains only the fuel purchased during the vacation Vacations table report To create a new report 1 Click the Reports icon in the Database list in the Automobile LibreOffice Base window Figure 175 2 Inthe Tasks list click Use Wizard to Create Report The Report Wizard opens Step 1 Field selection 1 Select Table Vacations in the Tables or Queries dropdown list 2 Use the gt to move these fields from the Available fields list to the Fields in report list Date Motel Tolls Miscellaneous Breakfast Lunch Supper and SnackCost Click Next Tables or queries Table Vacations a Available fields Fields in report Odometer BPayment LPayment oPayment onackNo Breakfast onPayment Lunch Supper MiscNotes onackCost A y MiscPayment Figure 236 Adding fields to a report Step 2 Labeling fields Change any field labels you wish We will shorten Miscellaneous to Misc Click Next Step 3 Grouping Since we are grouping by the date use the gt button to move the Date field to the Grouping list Click Next Fields Groupings Motel Date C
373. rapid overview without dwelling on the details Rather than having to create a new presentation you can use two tools that Impress offers hiding slides and custom slide shows Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 163 To hide a slide right click on the slide thumbnail either in the Slide pane or in the work area if you are using the Slide Sorter view and choose Hide Slide from the pop up menu Hidden slides are marked by a slashed slide number If you want to reorder the presentation choose Slide Show Custom Slide Show Click on the New button to create a new sequence of slides and save it You can have as many slide shows as you want from a single slide set Slide transitions Slide transition is the animation that is played when a slide is changed You can configure the slide transition from the Slide Transition drawer in the Tasks pane Select the desired transition the speed of the animation and whether the transition should happen when you click the mouse preferred or automatically after a certain number of seconds Click Apply to all slides unless you prefer to have different transitions in the presentation The Slide transition section has a very useful choice Automatic preview Select its checkbox Then when you make any changes in a slide transition the new slide is previewed in the Slide Design area including its transition effect Automatic slides advance You can set the presentation to automatically advanc
374. rating system instead of the font provided by LibreOffice for the user interface select this option User interface Screen font anti aliasing Not available in Windows not shown in Figure 22 Select this option to smooth the screen appearance of text Enter the smallest font size to apply anti aliasing Menu icons in menus Causes icons as well as words to be visible in menus Font Lists Show preview of fonts Causes the font list to look like Figure 23 Left with the font names shown as an example of the font with the option deselected the font list shows only the font names not their formatting Figure 23 Right The fonts you will see listed are those that are installed on your system i B 7 U g 11 A Liberation Mono Liberation Mono Liberation Sans Liberation Sans Narrow 2 Liberation Sans Ag Liberation Sans Narrow Liberation Serif Ai Liberation Serif LilyUPC Pat LUPC Linux Biolinum G Ag Linux Biolinum G a vale Linux Libertine AY Linux Biolinum O Linux Libertine G Figure 23 Font list Left With preview Right Without preview Font Lists Show font history Causes the last five fonts you have assigned to the current document to be displayed at the top of the font list Otherwise fonts are shown in alphabetical order Graphics output Use hardware acceleration Directly accesses hardware features of the graphical display adapter to improve the screen display Not supported on all operating
375. rd Select starting documen ent should contain a salutation z Select document type 3 Select address list Dear Mrs lt Last Mame gt Dear Mr lt Last Mame 6 Edit document Gender 7 Personalize document a Save print or send Figure 280 Deselecting a salutation 5 Inthe left hand list click 8 Save print or send LibreOffice displays a Creating documents message and then displays the Save print or send page of the Wizard 6 Select Send merged document as E Mail The lower part of the page changes to show e mail settings choices Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 273 Mail Merge Wizard Steps Save print or send the document 1 Select starting document Select one of the options below 2 Select document type C Save starting document 3 Select address list C Save merged document Print merged document 4 Create salutation E Mail settings 6 Edit document To E mail Address wt Copy to 7 Personalize document Subject 6 Save print or send Send as HTML Message x best ermail message odt Send all documents C From 1 5 Send documents Figure 281 Sending a document as an email message 7 Type a subject for your email and click Send documents LibreOffice sends the e mails Digital signing of documents To sign a document digitally you need a personal key also known as a certificate A personal key is
376. re 185 Update options and Delete options section Creating a database form Databases are used to store data But how is the data put into the database Forms are used to do this In the language of databases a form is a front end for data entry and editing FueliO Thursday April 12 2007 H fifo Thursday April 12 2007 Fuel Purchases Fuel Cost FuelQuanity Odometer PaymentT ype Figure 186 Fields of a simple form Figure 187 Simple form with additions A simple form consists of the fields from a table Figure 186 More complex forms can contain much more including additional text graphics selection boxes and many other elements Figure 187 is made from the same table with a text label Fuel Purchases a list box placed in PaymentType and a graphic background Using the Wizard to create a form We will use the Form Wizard to create a Vacations form which will contain a form and a subform In the main database window Figure 175 click the Forms icon in the left column In the Tasks list double click Use Wizard to Create Form to open the Form Wizard Figure 188 Simple forms require only some of these steps while more complex forms may use all of them Step 1 Select fields 1 Under Tables or queries select Table Vacations Available fields lists the fields for the Vacations table 2 Click the right double arrow to move all of these fields to the Fields in the form list Click Next 204 Getting Started
377. reakfast Lunch Supper Odometer Snack No Tolls Snack Cost Motel and Misc All of the payment fields were changed in step 2 but Misc Payment needs to be changed to 3 cm 1 2 inches 1 Right click Breakfast and choose Position and Size On the Position and Size dialog change Width to 2 cm 2 Repeat for the other listed controls using 3 cm for Misc Payment When changing the position or size of an entire control use the Position and Size dialog or the drag and drop method When working with either the label or the field but not both at the same time you can use the Properties dialog to make these changes when you want to be exact However you need to be careful not to accidentally select the entire control for use with the Properties dialog or you will apply the exact same values to both the label and field For example if you enter the values for a new position both the field and the label moves to the same position and the field is positioned on top of the label Then you have to move each of them to where you want them 210 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 To open the Properties window right click a control and select Control from the pop up menu Or you can click the Control icon in the Form Controls toolbar Just be careful and use Contro Z to undo any mistakes you may make Detailed instructions on how to use the Properties window will be in the Base Guide Step 6 Replace fields with other fields
378. red zero Pulling the macro together The following details are very complete it is not important to understand all of the details The first line defines the start of the macro sub EnterMyName Declare two variables dim document as object dim dispatcher as object ThisComponent refers to the current document The CurrentController property of a document refers to a service that controls the document For example when you type it is the current controller that notices The current controller then dispatches the changes to the document s frame The Frame property of a controller returns a main frame for a document Therefore the variable named document refers to a document s frame which receives dispatched commands document ThisComponent CurrentController Frame Most tasks in LibreOffice are accomplished by dispatching a command LibreOffice includes a dispatch helper service which does most of the work to use dispatches in macros The method CreateUnoService accepts the name of a Service and it tries to create an instance of that service On completion the dispatcher variable contains a reference to a DispatchHelper dispatcher createUnoService com sun star frame DispatchHelper Declare an array of properties Each property has a name and a value In other words it is a name value pair The created array has one property at index zero dim args1 0 as new com sun star beans PropertyVaLlue Give the property the name
379. rently This is explained in more detail in Chapter 3 of the Draw Guide g for selecting objects click on ed in to be Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 179 Selections for rotating objects are indicated by small red circles and a symbol representing the center of rotation To choose these selections Cy click on the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar Changing the selection mode To go from one mode to another you can do one of the following e Choose the Points button Z from the Drawing toolbar to switch from the simple selection mode to Points mode You can also use the keyboard shortcut F8 Points e Choose the Effects drop down button from the Drawing toolbar 7 to activate the Rotation mode for a selected object e If you often work in Rotation mode you can choose the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button from the Options bar you can cycle through normal and rotation modes just by clicking on the object This can be more convenient than repeatedly clicking on the object then clicking the Rotate button from the Drawing Toolbar e To stop working in Rotation mode click the Rotation Mode after Clicking Object button amp again Selecting objects Direct selection To easiest way to select an object is to click directly on it For objects that are not filled click directly on the object s outline to select it Selection by framing You can select several obj
380. res ____ or equal signs on a line and then press Enter the paragraph is replaced by a horizontal line as wide as the page The line is actually the lower border of the preceding paragraph e Bulleted and numbered lists A bulleted list is created when you type a hyphen star or plus sign followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph A numbered list is created when you type a number followed by a period followed by a space or tab at the beginning of a paragraph Automatic numbering is only applied to paragraphs formatted with the Default Text body or Text body indent paragraph styles To turn autoformatting on or off choose Format AutoCorrect and select or deselect the items on the list Creating numbered or bulleted lists There are several ways to create numbered or bulleted lists e Use autoformatting as described above e Use list numbering styles as described in Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles and Chapter 7 Working with Styles in the Writer Guide e Use the Numbering and Bullets icons on the paragraph formatting toolbar see Figure 75 select the paragraphs in the list and then click the appropriate icon on the toolbar It is a matter of personal preference whether you type your information first then apply Numbering Bullets or apply them as you type Using the Bullets and Numbering toolbar You can create nested lists where one or more list items has a sub list under it as in
381. rk with slides in the Slide Sorter view just as you can in the Slide pane To make changes right click a slide and choose any of the following from the pop up menu e Add anew slide after the selected slide e Rename or delete the selected slide e Change the slide layout e Change the slide transition For one slide click the slide to select it Then add the desired transition For more than one slide select the group of slides and add the desired transition e Mark a slide as hidden Hidden slides will not be shown in the slide show e Copy or cut and paste a slide Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 145 Renaming slides Right click on a thumbnail in the Slides pane or the Slide Sorter and choose Rename Slide from the pop up menu In the Name field delete the old name of the slide and type the new name Click OK Creating a new presentation This section describes how to start a new presentation using the Presentation Wizard When you start Impress the Presentation Wizard appears If you do not want the wizard to start every time you launch Impress select the Do not show this wizard again option You can enable the wizard again later under Tools Options LibreOffice Impress General Wizard and select the Start with wizard option Leave the Preview option selected so templates slide designs and slide transitions appear in the preview box as you choose them Presentation Wizard Type Empty pres
382. rl Shift R Refreshes redraws the document view Ctrl Shift Shows or hides the cursor in read only text Stopping macros Shortcut Keys Result Shift Ctrl Q Stops a running macro Defining keyboard shortcuts In addition to using the built in keyboard shortcuts listed in this Appendix you can define your own See Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice for instructions Further reading For help with LibreOffice s keyboard shortcuts or using LibreOffice with a keyboard only search the application Help using the shortcut keys or accessibility keywords Appendix A Keyboard Shortcuts 349 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument Introduction LibreOffice is a productivity suite that is compatible with other major office suites and available on a variety of platforms It is open source software and therefore free to download use and distribute If you are new to LibreOffice this appendix will provide some information regarding it s history it s community and some of it s technical specifications A short history of LibreOffice The OpenOffice org project began when Sun Microsystems released the source code blueprints for its StarOffice software to the open source community on October 13 2000 OpenOffice org 1 0 the product was released on April 30 2002 On January 26 2010 Oracle Corporation acquired Sun Microsystems On September
383. rmats LibreOffice uses the term export for some file operations involving a change of file type If you cannot find what you want under File Save As look under File Export as well LibreOffice can export files to XHTML In addition LibreOffice Draw and LibreOffice Impress can export to Adobe Flash swf and a range of image formats To export to one of these formats choose File Export On the Export dialog specify a file name for the exported document then select the required format in the File format list and click the Export button E mailing documents LibreOffice provides several ways to quickly and easily send documents as an e mail attachment in one of three formats OpenDocument LibreOffice s default format Microsoft Office formats or PDF Note Documents can only be sent from the LibreOffice menu if a mail profile has been set up To send the current document in OpenDocument format 1 Choose File Send Document as E mail LibreOffice opens your default e mail program The document is attached 2 In your e mail program enter the recipient subject and any text you want to add then send the e mail File Send E mail as OpenDocument Text or Spreadsheet or Presentation has the same effect Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 271 If you choose E mail as Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint LibreOffice first creates a file in one of those formats and then opens you
384. rom Templa gt Open Save e Save As a9g9797109I707 Save In OpenOffice org Writer Description Loads a document specified by a URL You can type a new URL or select one that Is already registered _ ox Cancel Help Reset Figure 310 LibreOffice Customize dialog Event In LibreOffice when something happens we say that an event occurred For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved LibreOffice allows events to cause a macro to be called the macro is then called an event handler Full coverage of event handlers is well beyond the scope of this document but a little knowledge can accomplish much Be careful when you configure an event handler For example assume that you write an event handler that is called every time that a key is pressed but you make a mistake so the event is not properly handled One possible result is that your event handler will consume all key presses forcing you to forcibly terminate LibreOffice A Use Tools Customize to open the Customize dialog and select the Events tab see Figure 311 The events in the Customize dialog are related to the entire application and specific documents Use the Save In box to choose LibreOffice or a specific document Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 325 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Start Application Close Application Create Document Open Document Save Doc
385. rotation and slant and corner radius properties of the drawing object 1 Right click on the drawing object and then choose Position and Size from the pop up menu The Position and Size dialog is displayed 2 Choose any properties as required Resizing a drawing object The same considerations for resizing an image apply also to resizing an object Select the object click on one of the eight handles around it and drag it to its new position For a scaled resizing select one of the corner handles and keep the Shift key pressed while dragging the handle to its new position For more sophisticated control of the size of the object choose Format Object Position and Size from the menu bar Use the Position and Size dialog to set the width and height independently If the Keep ratio option is selected then the two dimensions change so that the proportion is maintained allowing for a scaled resizing Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 287 Grouping drawing objects To group drawing objects 1 Select one object then hold down the Shift key and select the others you want to include in the group The bounding box expands to include all the selected objects 2 With the objects selected hover the mouse pointer over one of the objects and choose Format Group Group from the menu bar or right click and choose Group Group from the pop up menu Note You cannot include an embedded or linked graphic in a grou
386. rtical scrollbar for additional text space if desired 1 Control click the Misc Notes field The green handles should surround the field but not its label 2 Click the Control icon to open the Properties window Figure 202 3 Scroll down to the Scrollbars setting Change the selection from None to Vertical in this dropdown list General Data Events Background color C 0x00DDDDDD C 0x00DDDDDD ii A Bord r aaneane00000000n0nne 3D look a a None Horizontal Password character Hide selection Additional information Help TON ccctcsessseeees Hee UAL ae Figure 202 Scrollbar selections in the Properties window 4 Close the Properties window 5 Lengthen the Misc Notes field by moving the cursor over the middle green handle at the bottom of the field and dragging down until the length is 6 cm 2 4 inches Step 8 Change labels and fields in the subform The subform is located at the bottom of the form We want to widen the Date column change the field in the PaymentType column to a list box and change the label for the PaymentType column to two words Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 213 To widen the Date column move the mouse pointer over the dividing line between the Date and FuelCost columns When the pointer changes shape click and drag to move the divider to the right To change the PaymentType column 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 Right click
387. s 142 Notes view Impress 142 numbered list 153 numbering equations 252 numbering pages 90 O OASIS 11 objects adjusting size 181 arranging 181 dynamic movement 181 dynamic size modification 182 Index 363 framing 180 hidden 180 moving 181 rotating 182 selecting several 181 ODF format version saving 42 ODF plugin Sun 76 Office Assistant Microsoft 29 OOo Macro Organizer dialog 311 Open and Save As dialogs 22 Open Source Initiative OSI 353 Open Save dialogs 30 OpenDocument Format 11 42 Opening a document 20 Options Bar Draw 169 orientation of page 69 outline group controls Calc 128 outline level 154 Outline view Impress 142 OXT extension 64 P page break Calc 133 page layout different first page 68 landscape page 69 orientation 69 page layouts 88 page margins 92 167 page numbering 90 parts of the main window 15 password protection 21 password protect PDF 270 paste text 78 pasting unformatted text 153 path options 34 PDF blank page export 267 digital rights management DRM 270 embed standard fonts 267 encrypt 270 EPS image 267 export documents to 265 form 267 image compression and resolution 266 initial view selection 267 pages to export 266 password protect 270 security settings 270 tagged 267 user interface settings 268 PDF import 342 PDF Options dialog 265 PDF A 1a 267 personal data removing 275 pictures add to slides 155 pixels 166 polygons Draw 175 positioning obj
388. s It is similar to a page style in Writer it controls the basic formatting of all slides based on it A slide show can have more than one slide master LibreOffice uses three terms for a slide that is used to create other slides master Slide slide master and master page This book uses the term slide master except when describing the user interface A slide master has a defined set of characteristics including the background color graphic or gradient objects Such as logos decorative lines and other graphics in the background headers and footers placement and size of text frames and the formatting of text Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 157 Styles All of the characteristics of slide masters are controlled by styles The styles of any new slide you create are inherited from the slide master from which it was created In other words the styles of the slide master are available and applied to all slides created from that slide master Changing a style in a slide master results in changes to all the slides based on that slide master but you can modify individual slides without affecting the slide master Slide masters have two types of styles associated with them presentation styles and graphic styles The prepackaged presentation styles can be modified but new presentation styles cannot be created In the case of graphic styles you can modify the prepackaged ones and also create new ones Presentation styles af
389. s and Numbering icon ol 3 The Bullets and Numbering dialog contains five tabs Bullets Numbering type Graphics Position and Customize If a bullet list is needed select the desired bullet style from the default styles available on the Bullets page If a graphics style is needed select one from those available on the Graphics page If a numbered list is needed select one of the default numbering styles on the Numbering type page For a single line in the list 1 Click anywhere in the line to place the cursor in it 2 Follow steps 2 4 of the previous instruction set If the list was created in an AutoLayout text box then an alternative way to change the entire list is to modify the Outline styles Changes made to the outline style will apply to all the slides using them Sometimes this is what you want sometimes it is not so some care must be taken Adding pictures tables charts and media As we have seen besides text a contents box can contain also pictures tables charts or media clips This section provides a quick overview of how to work with these objects however for a more detailed description you are invited to consult the Impress Guide Adding pictures E lah To add a picture to a contents box mj e Click the Insert Picture icon e Use the file browser to select the picture file you want to include To see a preview of the picture check Preview at the bottom of the Insert picture dialog e Click Open
390. s bar In Web Layout view most of the choices are not available 74 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Zoom amp View Layout oom factor View layout O Optimal Automatic Fit width and height Single page Fit width O Columns 100 Book mode C Variable Figure 64 Choosing Zoom and View Layout options Moving quickly through a document In addition to the navigation features of the Status bar described above you can use the main Navigator window and the Navigation toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice In Writer you can also display the Navigation toolbar by clicking on the small Navigation icon near the lower right hand corner of the window below the vertical scroll bar as shown in Figure 65 k Previous Next imal B OG EG o 78s 100 ae Navigatio il Figure 65 Navigation icons The Navigation toolbar Figure 66 shows icons for all the object types shown in the Navigator plus some extras for example the results of a Find command Navigation z Repeat search Figure 66 Navigation toolbar Click an icon to select that object type Now all the Previous and Next icons in the Navigator itself in the Navigation Toolbar and on the scroll bar will jump to the next object of the selected type This is particularly helpful for finding items like index entries which can be difficult to see in the text The names of the icons
391. s for a given letter by repeatedly pressing that key 198 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 c Change the Field Properties in the bottom section Change AutoValue from No to Yes d Set FuellD as the Primary key Right click on the green triangle to the left of Fuel D Figure 178 and choose Primary Key from the menu This places a key icon in front of Fuel D Field Name Field Type Description og FuellD Integer INTEGER Delete Insert Rows v Primary Key Field Properties AutoValue Yes Auto increment state IDENTITY Length 10 Format example 0 m Figure 178 Defining the primary key field The primary key serves only one purpose to uniquely identify the record Any name can be used for this field We have used FuellD for convenience so we know to which table it belongs 3 All other fields Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType Type the next field name in the Field Name column Select the Field Type for each field For Date use Date DATE Press the D key to select it PaymentType uses Text VARCHAR the default setting All other fields use Number NUMERIC Press the N key once to select it e FuelCost Fue Quantity and Odometer need changes in the Field Properties section Figure 179 FuelQuantity Change Length to 6 and Decimal places to 3 Many fuel pumps measure fuel to thousands of a gallon in the USA where live Odomet
392. s how far above or below the sheet the header or footer will print So if spacing is set to 1 00 then there will be 1 inch between the header or footer and the sheet Height Height affects how big the header or footer will be 134 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Organizer Page Borders Background Header Footer Sheet Header Same content left right Left margin 0 00cm a Right margin 0 00cm Le Spacing 0 25cem fs Height o 50cm 2S AutoFit height Figure 124 Header dialog Header or footer appearance To change the appearance of the header or footer click the More button in the header dialog This opens the Border Background dialog Figure 125 From this dialog you can set the background and border of the header or footer For more information see Chapter 4 Using Styles and Templates in the Calc Guide Line arrangement __ Line Spacing to contents Default Style Left 000cm i oom E 0 05 pt User defined 0 50 pt Top 0 00cm S 1 00 pt ee 5 pt Bottom 0 00cm ee 00 pt E Synchronize E 5 00 ot Shadow style Position Distance Color E Y 0 18cm Figure 125 Header Footer Border Background Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 13
393. s of 19 user specific settings 41 V validating cell contents Calc 121 variables in macros 314 VBA properties load save options 42 vector graphics 166 vertical alignment of text 152 vertical block of text select 78 view options 31 W Web Layout 300 web page export Calc spreadsheets 304 Impress presentations 305 Web wizard Writer 301 Writer documents 300 301 wildcards 79 windows dockable floating 17 wizard form database 204 presentation 146 query database 224 report database 233 table database 195 web 301 workspace Draw 166 workspace views Impress 142 Writer document views 74 features 72 Navigation icons 75 Navigation toolbar 75 status bar 72 workspace 72 zoom 74 X XML 42 Y year two digits 30 Z zoom 74 Index 367
394. s of the same names in the document you are copying them into 5 Click OK to copy the styles You will not see any change on screen To copy the styles from another document click the From File button to open a window from which you can select the required document Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 59 If your document has a table of contents and if you have used custom styles for headings the heading levels associated with outline levels in Tools Outline Numbering will revert to the defaults of Heading 1 Heading 2 and so on when you A load styles this way You will need to change these back to your custom heading styles Deleting styles You cannot remove delete any of LibreOffice s predefined styles from a document or template even if they are not in use You can remove any user defined custom styles but before you do you should make sure the styles are not in use If an unwanted style is in use you will want to replace it with a substitute style To delete unwanted styles right click on them one at a time in the Styles and Formatting window and click Delete on the pop up menu If the style is in use you receive a warning message Make sure the style is not in use before deletion Otherwise all objects with that A style will return to the default style and retain their formatting as manual formatting If the style is not in use you receive a confirmation message click Yes to delet
395. s the Data to Text icon as we did to make a table in a Writer document But differences exist in these two situations The steps are straightforward 1 Click the cell of the spreadsheet which you want to be the top left of your data including the column names 2 Use F4 to open the database source window and select the table whose data you want to use 3 Select the rows of data you want to add to the spreadsheet Click the gray box to the left of the row you want to select if only selecting one row That row is highlighted Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 221 e To select multiple rows hold down the Control key while clicking the gray box of the rows you need Those rows are highlighted e To select all the rows click the gray box in the upper left corner All rows are highlighted 4 Click the Data to text icon to insert the data into the spreadsheet cells 5 Save the spreadsheet Adding records to a spreadsheet is fairly easy You need to have the Data Source window open your spreadsheet open and the table you want to use selected 1 Click the gray box above the field name for the table s ID field 2 Drop and drag the gray box for the table s ID field to where you want the record to appear in the spreadsheet 3 Repeat until you have moved all of the fields you need to where you want them 4 Name and save the spreadsheet 5 Click a row of the table in the Data Source window 6 Drag the data in the ID
396. s to appear on the Area tab e Hatching tab Modify the available hatching patterns or add new ones to appear on the Area tab e Bitmaps tab Create simple bitmap patterns and import bitmaps to make them available on the Area tab Area Style Filling boxes Select the type of the fill of the selected object For more detailed settings use the Area icon Positioning options Rotate icon Rotate the selected object manually using the mouse to drag the object To Foreground icon Move the selected object in front of the text To Background icon Move the selected object behind the text Alignment icon Modify the alignment of the selected objects Bring to front icon Move the selected object in front of the others Send to back icon Move the selected object behind the others Change Anchor icon Choose between anchoring options e To Page The object keeps the same position in relation to the page margins It does not move as you add or delete text e To Paragraph The object is associated with a paragraph and moves with the paragraph It may be placed in the margin or another location e To Character The object is associated with a character but is not in the text sequence It moves with the paragraph but may be placed in the margin or another location This method is similar to anchoring to a paragraph e As Character The object is placed in the document like any character and moves with the paragraph as you add or delete text b
397. s with a predefined set of formatting themes that you can apply to your spreadsheets It is not possible to add themes to Calc and they cannot be modified However you can modify their styles after you apply them to a spreadsheet To apply a theme to a spreadsheet 1 Click the Choose Themes icon in the Tools toolbar If this toolbar is not visible you can show it using View Toolbars Tools The Theme Selection dialog appears This dialog lists the available themes for the whole spreadsheet Tools x b ga ala 2 In the Theme Selection dialog select the theme that you want to apply to the spreadsheet As soon as you select a theme some of the properties of the custom styles are applied to the open spreadsheet and are immediately visible 3 Click OK If you wish you can now go to the Styles and Formatting window to modify specific styles These modifications do not change the theme they only change the appearance of this specific spreadsheet document Using conditional formatting You can set up cell formats to change depending on conditions that you specify For example in a table of numbers you can show all the values above the average in green and all those below the average in red Conditional formatting depends upon the use of styles and the AutoCalculate feature Tools Cell Contents AutoCalculate must be enabled See Chapter 2 Entering Editing and Formatting Data in the Calc Guide for deta
398. s19 0 Name Count args19 0 Value 1 args19 1 Name Select args19 1 Value false dispatcher executeDispatch document uno GoDown 0 args19 end sub Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros 317 Cursor movements are used for all operations as opposed to searching If run on the DONTKNOW line the word weight is moved to the front of the line and the first The is changed to She This is not perfect but should not have run the macro on the lines that did not have the proper format need to do these manually Running the macro quickly It is tedious to repeatedly run the macro using Tools Macros Run Macro see Figure 302 The macro can be run from the IDE Use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the Basic Macro dialog Select your macro and click Edit to open the macro in the IDE The IDE has a Run Basic icon in the toolbar that runs the first macro in the IDE Unless you change the first macro it is the empty macro named Main Modify Main so that it reads as shown in Listing 6 Listing 6 Modify Main to call CopyNumToCo 1 Sub Main CopyNumToCol1 End Sub Now you can run CopyNumToColl1 by repeatedly clicking the Run Basic icon in the toolbar of the IDE This is very fast and easy especially for temporary macros that will be used a few times and then discarded Sometimes the macro recorder fails Understanding the LibreOffice internals helps to un
399. selecting fields click on the field name in the Selected fields list and use the lt button to move it from the Selected fields list back to the Available fields list 6 If you make a mistake in the order of the selected fields click on the field name that is in the wrong order and use the Up or Down arrow on the right side of the Selected fields list to move the field name to the correct position 7 Click Next Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 195 Category Business Personal Sample tables Employees ve Available fields Selected fields City CollectionID Notes Album Title Photo Artist Title DatePurchased EER Notes LastName NumberofTracks Birthdate Figure 176 Selecting fields for the table Step 2 Set field types and formats In this step you give the fields their properties When you click a field the information on the right changes See Figure 177 You can then make changes to meet your needs Click each field one at a time and make the changes listed below Selected fields Field information CollectionID Field name Collection D AlbumTitle Artist Field type Integer INTEGE w DatePurchased Notes Numberoftracks Entry required Photo Length 10 Figure 177 Changing field types If any of these fields requires an entry set Entry required to Yes An entry with that field blank will then not be allowed In general only set Entry required to Yes if so
400. sending the file to someone else to view using Adobe Reader or other PDF viewers The process and dialogs are the same for Writer Calc Impress and Draw with a few minor differences mentioned in this section Quick export to PDF 6 Click the Export Directly as PDF icon to export the entire document using your default PDF settings You are asked to enter the file name and location for the PDF file but you do not get a chance to choose a page range the image compression or other options Controlling PDF content and quality For more control over the content and quality of the resulting PDF use File Export as PDF The PDF Options dialog opens This dialog has five pages General Initial View User Interface Links and Security Select the appropriate settings and then click Export Then you are asked to enter the location and file name of the PDF to be created and click Save to export the file General page of PDF Options dialog On the General page you can choose which pages to include in the PDF the type of compression to use for images which affects the quality of images in the PDF and other options Chapter 10 Printing Exporting and E mailing 265 i PDF Options General Initial View User Interface Lossless compression JPEG compression Quality Reduce Image resolution General E PDF A la E Tagged PDF Create PDF form Submit format E Allow duplicate field names Export bookmarks
401. sentations in LibreOffice What is Impress Impress is LibreOffice s presentations slide show program You can create slides that contain many different elements including text bulleted and numbered lists tables charts clip art anda wide range of graphic objects Impress also includes a spelling checker a thesaurus prepackaged text styles and attractive background styles This chapter includes instructions screenshots and hints to guide you through the Impress environment while designing your presentations Although more difficult designs are mentioned throughout this chapter explanations for creating them are in the Impress Guide If you have a working knowledge of how to create slide shows we recommend you use the Impress Guide for your source of information To use Impress for more than very simple slide shows requires some knowledge of the elements which the slides contain Slides containing text use styles to determine the appearance of that text Graphic objects are created the same way that drawings are created in Draw For this reason we recommend that you also see Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates and Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw in this book You may also wish to consult the Draw Guide for details Starting Impress You can start Impress in several ways e From the LibreOffice Start Center if no component is open e From the system menu or the LibreOffice Quickstarter Details vary with your operating
402. sgl vor DocBook xml Unified Office Format text uot uof Ichitaro 8 9 10 11 jtd and jtt Hangul WP 97 hwp T602 Document 602 txt AportisDoc Palm pdb Pocket Word psw HTML Document htm html Most of these file types are automatically detected by LibreOffice so they can be opened without explicitly selecting the document type in the file picker When opening htm or html files used for web pages LibreOffice customizes Writer for working with these files Appendix B Open Source Open Standards OpenDocument 355 Opening spreadsheets In addition to OpenDocument formats ods and ots Calc 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxc and stc and the following spreadsheet formats Microsoft Excel 97 2000 XP xls xlw and xit Microsoft Excel 4 x 5 0 95 xls xlw and xlt Microsoft Excel 2003 XML xml Microsoft Excel 2007 XML xlsx xlsm xlts xltm Microsoft Excel 2007 binary xlsb Lotus 1 2 3 wk1 wks and 123 Data Interchange Format dif Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarCalc formats sdc and vor dBASE dbf SYLK slk Unified Office Format spreadsheet uos uof HTML Document htm and html files including Web page queries Pocket Excel pxl Quattro Pro 6 0 wb2 Opening presentations In addition to OpenDocument formats odp odg and otp Impress 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxi and sti and the fo
403. should be very limited Fields can be added or deleted but adding a field requires taking the time to enter the data for that one field for every record having an entry for that field Deleting a field deletes all the data once contained in that field Changing the field A type of a field can lead to data being lost either partially or completely When creating a new table it pays to create the fields with the correct names length and format before you add any data Deleting a table removes all of the data contained in every field of the table Unless you are sure do not delete a table Creating tables in Design View Design View is a more advanced method for creating a new table in which you directly enter information about each field in the table We will use this method for the tables of our database The first table to be created is Fuel Its fields are Fue D Date FuelCost FuelQuantity Odometer and PaymentType While the Field type and formatting are different in Design View the concepts are the same as in the Wizard 1 Click Create Table in Design View 2 FuellD field a Type FuellD as the first Field Name Press the Tab key to move to the Field Type column b Select Integer INTEGER as the Field Type from the dropdown list The default setting is Text VARCHAR A shortcut for selecting from the Field Type dropdown list press the key for the first letter of the choice You can cycle through the choice
404. signed to fields See Chapter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for more information Inserting AutoText To insert AutoText type the shortcut and press F3 84 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Formatting text Using styles is recommended Styles are central to using Writer Styles enable you to easily format your document consistently and to change the format with minimal effort A style is a named set of formatting options Writer defines several types of styles for different types of elements characters paragraphs pages frames and lists See Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates in this book and Chapters 6 and 7 in the Writer Guide Formatting paragraphs You can apply many formats to paragraphs using the buttons on the Formatting toolbar Figure 75 shows the Formatting toolbar as a floating toolbar customized to show only the icons for paragraph formatting The appearance of the icons may vary with your operating system and the selection of icon size and style in Tools Options LibreOffice View Formatting T xX E Default y 32 E E i cS eap PTET TTT EE ty 1 2 3 4 5 6 7T amp 9 40 11 12 13 144 1 Open Styles and 5 Align Right 10 Numbering On Off Formatting Window 6 Justified 11 Bullets On Off 2 Apply Style 7 Line Spacing 1 12 Decrease Indent 3 Align Left 8 Line Spacing 1 5 13 Increase Indent 4 Centered 9 Line Spacing 2 14 Paragraph format dialog Figure 75 Formatt
405. sis or a long report or when different people are writing different chapters or other parts of the full document so you don t need to share files A master document joins separate text documents into one larger document and unifies the formatting table of contents TOC bibliography index and other tables or lists Yes master documents do work in Writer However until you become familiar with them you may think that master documents are unreliable or difficult to use See Chapter 13 Working with Master Documents in the Writer Guide Creating fill in forms A standard text document displays information a letter report or brochure for example Typically the reader may edit everything or nothing in any way A form has sections that are not to be edited and other sections that are designed for the reader to make changes For example a questionnaire has an introduction and questions which do not change and spaces for the reader to enter answers Forms are used in three ways e To create a simple document for the recipient to complete such as a questionnaire sent out to a group of people who fill it in and return it e To link into a database or data source and allow the user to enter information Someone taking orders might enter the information for each order into a database using a form e To view information held in a database or data source A librarian might call up information about books Writer offers several ways to fi
406. slide transition animate slides add a soundtrack to the presentation and make other enhancements you need to use functions in the Task pane See the Impress Guide for details on how to use all of these features Adding and formatting text Many of your slides are likely to contain some text This section gives you some guidelines on how to add text and how to change its appearance Text in slides is contained in text boxes Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 151 There are two types of text boxes that you can add to a slide e Choose a predefined layout from the Layouts section of the Tasks pane and do not select any special contents type These text boxes are called AutoLayout text boxes e Create a text box using the text tool in the Drawing toolbar Using text boxes created from the Layout pane In Normal view 1 Click in the text box that reads Click to add text Click to add an outline or a similar notation 2 Type or paste your text in the text box Using text boxes created from the text box tool In Normal view 1 Click on the Text icon T onthe Drawing toolbar If the toolbar with the text icon is not visible choose View Toolbars Drawing 2 Click and drag to draw a box for the text on the slide Do not worry about the vertical size and position the text box will expand if needed as you type 3 Release the mouse button when finished The cursor appears in the text box which is now in edit mode gra
407. slide masters and SUVICS vvccaccedctnssasscnisosvevandbecenanuced anid gencnnnabenaethentaleebieosdaeainarealeen 157 Adding comme nts to a pr esentatiON ssssssresassisisiamarda isinira iaa NEn aE AARNE 163 SE a E E EA E A E E N AE A EE E A eee aren eer eee ne 163 BETTI POESIE NON oreina TETEE 164 Chapter 7 Getting Started with Dc ee a ee ee cr aoe eee ene en eae nen ee mean ae meee mens Mer ee ete Pet menee 165 TS N ies eas aise ct een ec tet secession anaes seme ese E tae 166 Tne Draw WON PACO ain ane een ee ten ae vee Pe ear ee eee tee a oe eRe Tee oe ee ener cet ee 166 Bi glaleccigie ANO OETNING COI eee eee ee cee tre Na eek ee ee One eee 169 Positioning objects with snap cache ected eee 170 Positioning objects with guiding liN S ssssissiisiicrrsorsisirsriisicuinisnersessioienrinsdni dead dew ie inini 172 The nast arawin aD a e ene On ae Penne ee eee rece eee en 172 IRI ales 1610 o goa gio 6 lt A a oe acer ne ee a eae eee E ENEE E SAAE RREA ee 178 I arrest acest eae EEE A AE E OEA EENE E N E 179 SEPE E E a ANAIEI T AOA A AAA OOE IOE EE IEEE A EA O INE 180 Moving and dynamically adjusting an objec S SIZ Ciao odecesccsdiececeehedsaunseberionectenacssdeeseceiaeeedeverbas 181 E Re 8 oe a E EE E E EEEE A AE 183 PE 5 ok N EAA E EEEE E AE EE A EEE EE E E E ETE E T 185 oE E 10 ee ec E AEI AE A AA E A EE A E E A E AE eee 185 comONNO MUP OD COIS rasaae EE EE 188 Aids TO POSIUONING ODOC S Aaa eee eee ene sete mene meee cette aaa ariari
408. slide using Slide Sorter To move a slide in a presentation in the Slide Sorter 1 Click the slide A thick black border is drawn around tt 2 Drag and drop it to the location you want e As you move the slide a black vertical line appears to one side of the slide Drag the slide until this black vertical line is located where you want the slide to be moved Selecting and moving groups of slides To select a group of slides use one of these methods e Use the Control Ctrl key Click on the first slide and while keeping the Control key pressed select the other desired slides e Use the Shift key Click on the first slide and while pressing the Shift key click on the final Slide in the group This selects all of the other slides in between the first and the last e Use the mouse Click slightly to the left of the first slide to be selected Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse pointer to a spot slightly to the right of the last slide to be included You can also do this right to left A dashed outline of a rectangle forms as you drag the cursor through the slide thumbnails and a thick border is drawn around each of the selected slides Make sure the rectangle includes all the slides you want to select To move a group of slides 1 Select the group 2 Drag and drop the group to their new location A vertical black line appears to show you where the group of slides will go Working in Slide Sorter view You can wo
409. sor over the black line circled it becomes a double headed arrow Drag it toa lower position Fuel End Reading FuellD Date FuelCost m jeld Date FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading Alias Quanity Begin End Distance Table Fuel End Reading Fuel End Reading sort Visible De De De De De unction Jriterion gt 0 Figure 239 Appearance of query when opened for editing 1 Add the FuelCost field to the End Reading query a Right click the End Reading query and select Edit from the pop up menu b Inthe Fuel table list double click to add Fue Cost to the bottom table Figure 240 c Save and close the query Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 235 FuellD Odometer FuelQuantity FuelCost Fuel Fuel Fuel Fuel x x x x gt 0 Figure 240 Adding an additional field to the query 2 Add the FuelCost field from the End Reading query to the Fuel Economy query Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Edit from the pop up menu Double click the FuelCost field in the End Reading query list to add it to the query table at the bottom 3 Add a calculation field to the right of the FuelCost field Type the following in a Field cell in the table at the bottom End Reading FuelCost End Reading Odometer Fuel Odometer e Type the following in its Alias cell cost per mile Note If you use the metric system cost per km is the appropriate alias 4 Save and close
410. ss fade attributes and Same orientation both checked The end result is shown in Figure 174 Cross fading Settings o Increments Cross fade attributes Cancel Same orientation Figure 174 Cross fading example Chapter 7 Getting Started with Draw 187 Combining multiple objects Using Draw you can combine drawing objects together in two distinct ways grouping and combining These two methods allow you to treat multiple objects as one unit or to merge objects to form a new shape Grouping is like putting objects in a container You can move them as a group and apply global changes to them A group can always be undone and the objects that make up the group can always be manipulated separately A combination is a permanent fusion of objects leading to a new object The original objects are no longer available as individual entities and the operation is not reversible Grouping by common selection When several objects are selected any operations you carry out are applied to all of the objects For example you can rotate a group of objects in its entirety Groups obtained through common selection of several objects are undone as soon as you click outside the group However you can group objects and keep those selected objects grouped together Maintaining groups and undoing groups To group objects first select the objects then right click and choose Group from the pop up menu You can also use the keyboard shortcut
411. ssible to perform the following operations although there are more efficient methods than using the Slides pane e Change the slide transition following the selected slide or after each slide in a group of slides e Change the sequence of slides in the presentation e Change the slide design e Change slide layout for a group of slides simultaneously Tasks pane The Tasks pane has five sections To expand the section you wish to use click on the right pointing triangle to the left of the caption Only one section at a time can be expanded Master Pages Here you define the page style for your presentation Impress contains prepackaged Master Pages slide masters One of them Default is blank and the rest have a background Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window where you can modify the styles used in any slide master to suit your purpose This can be done at any time Layout The prepackaged layouts are shown here You can choose the one you want use it as it is or modify it to your own requirements At present it is not possible to create custom layouts Table Design The standard table styles are provided in this pane You can further modify the appearance of a table with the selections to show or hide specific rows and columns or to apply a banded appearance to the rows and columns Custom Animation A variety of animations for selected elements of a slide are listed Animation can be added to a slide and it
412. ssign different keys to these shortcuts by reconfiguring either LibreOffice see Chapter 14 or your operating system See system documentation Tip for Macintosh users Some keystrokes are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The following table gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this book For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows Linux Mac equivalent Effect Right click Control click Opens a context menu Ctrl Control 3 Command Used with other keys F5 Shift 6 F5 Opens the Navigator F11 T Opens the Styles amp Formatting window 346 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 General keyboard shortcuts Opening menus and menu items Shortcut Keys Result Opens a menu where lt gt is the underlined character of the menu Alt lt gt you want to open For example Alt T opens the menu Tools Opens a menu item where lt gt Is the underlined character of the Alt lt gt lt gt menu you want to open and lt gt is the item within that menu For example A ttT G opens the Gallery menu item in the menu Tools Esc Closes an open menu Controlling dialogs When you open any dialog one element Such as a button an option field an entry in a list box or a checkbox is highlighted or indicated by a dotted box around the field or button name This element is said to have the focus on it Shortcut Keys Result Enter
413. st security related options and define warnings for hidden information in documents Options Passwords for web connections Persistenthy save passwords for web connections Lonnections Protected by a master password recommended Passwords are protected by a master password You willbe asked to Master Password enter it once per session If LibreOffice retrieves a password from the protected password list Macro security Adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted Macro Security macro developers Figure 29 Choosing security options for opening and saving documents Security options and warnings If you record changes save multiple versions or include hidden information or notes in your documents and you do not want some of the recipients to see that information you can set warnings to remind you to remove it or you can have LibreOffice remove some of it automatically Note that unless removed much of this information is retained in a file whether the file is in LibreOffice s default OpenDocument format or has been saved to other formats including PDF Click the Options button to open a separate dialog with specific choices Figure 30 Macro security Click the Macro Security button to open the Macro Security dialog not shown here where you can adjust the security level for executing macros and specify trusted sources Security options and warnings The following options are on the Sec
414. standard toolbar and the formatting toolbar at the top of the window and the status bar at the bottom Menu bar The Menu bar is located across the top of the LibreOffice window just below the Title bar When you choose one of the menus listed below a submenu drops down to show commands e File contains commands that apply to the entire document such as Open Save and Export as PDF e Edit contains commands for editing the document such as Undo xxx where xxx is the command to undo and Find amp Replace It also contains commands to cut copy and paste selected parts of your document e View contains commands for controlling the display of the document such as Zoom and Web Layout e Insert contains commands for inserting elements into your document such as Header Footer and Picture e Format contains commands such as Styles and Formatting and AutoCorrect for formatting the layout of your document e Table shows all commands to insert and edit a table in a text document e Tools contains functions such as Spelling and Grammar Customize and Options e Window contains commands for the display window e Help contains links to the LibreOffice Help file What s This and information about the program See How to get help on page 12 Toolbars LibreOffice has several types of toolbars docked floating and tear off Docked toolbars can be moved to different locations or made to float and floating toolbars can be doc
415. sting file from the list If you need to browse to find a file from another location 340 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 4 Click Save A confirmation dialog appears if you are about to overwrite an existing file otherwise there will be no feedback and the file will be saved Loading a saved keyboard configuration To load a saved keyboard configuration file and replace your existing configuration click the Load button at the right of the Customize dialog and then select the configuration file from the Load Keyboard Configuration dialog Resetting the shortcut keys To reset all of the keyboard shortcuts to their default values click the Reset button near the bottom right of the Customize dialog Use this feature with care as no confirmation dialog will be displayed the defaults will be set without any further notice or user input Assigning macros to events In LibreOffice when something happens we say that an event occured For example a document was opened a key was pressed or the mouse moved You can associate a macro with an event so the macro is run when the event occurs Acommon use is to assign the open document event to run a macro that performs certain setup tasks for the document To associate a macro with an event use the Events page of the Customize dialog For more information see Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros Adding functionality with extensions An extension is a package that can
416. system see Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice for more information e From any open component of LibreOffice Click the triangle to the right of the New icon on the main toolbar and select Presentation from the drop down menu or choose File New Presentation from the menu bar When you start Impress for the first time the Presentation Wizard is shown Here you can choose from the following options e Empty presentation which gives you a blank document e From template which is a presentation designed with a template of your choice e Open existing presentation If you prefer not to use the wizard in future you can select Do not show this wizard again Click Create to open the main Impress window For detailed instructions about how to use the wizard see Creating a new presentation on page 146 Parts of the main Impress window The main Impress window Figure 127 has three parts the Slides pane Workspace and Tasks pane Additionally several toolbars can be displayed or hidden during the creation ofa presentation 138 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 HE Untitled 1 LibreOffice Impress File Edit View Insert Format Tools SlideShow Window Help B BEBB VRAA A B D aar Ce ow e Mea e A o ee E a g x Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter Cikk fo add ite Click to add title Click to add text Table Design
417. systems and LibreOffice distributions 32 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Graphics output Use anti aliasing Enables and disables anti aliasing which makes the display of most graphical objects look smoother and with fewer artifacts Not supported on all operating systems and LibreOffice distributions Tip Press Shift Contro R to restore or refresh the view of the current document Mouse positioning Specifies if and how the mouse pointer will be positioned in newly opened dialogs Middle mouse button Defines the function of the middle mouse button e Automatic scrolling dragging while pressing the middle mouse button shifts the view e Paste clipboard pressing the middle mouse button inserts the contents of the Selection clipboard at the cursor position The Selection clipboard is independent of the normal clipboard that you use by Edit Copy Cut Paste or their respective keyboard shortcuts Clipboard and Selection clipboard can contain different contents at the same time Function Clipboard Selection clipboard Copy content Edit Copy Contro C Select text table or object Paste content Edit Paste Contro V pastes Clicking the middle mouse button at the cursor position pastes at the mouse pointer position Pasting into another No effect on the clipboard The last marked selection is the document contents content of the selection clipboard Selection Transparency
418. t Notes view Use the Notes view to add notes to a slide 1 Click the Notes tab in the Workspace 2 Select the slide to which you want to add notes Click the slide in the Slides pane or Double click the slide s name in the Navigator 142 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 3 Inthe text box below the slide click on the words Click to add notes and begin typing You can resize the Notes text box using the green resizing handles which appear when you click on the edge of the box You can also move the box by placing the pointer on the border then clicking and dragging To make changes in the text style press the F11 key to open the Styles and Formatting window Normal Outline Notes Handout Slide Sorter LibreOffice The Document Foundation LibreOffice Initial Presentation Template Libre Office Marketing Team 2010 10 26 i Click to add notes Figure 133 Notes view Handout view Handout view is for setting up the layout of your slide for a printed handout Click the Handout tab in the workspace then choose Layouts in the Tasks pane You can then choose to print 1 2 3 4 6 or 9 slides per page Layouts LJ QO B EE Figure 134 Handout layouts Use this view also to customize the information printed on the handout Refer to Chapter 10 of the Impress Guide for instructions on printing slides handouts and notes Select from the main menu Insert Page Number or Ins
419. t Selecting items that are not consecutive Insert reference to Name Page Working with documents Chapter Value Number no context Number full context Figure 85 The Cross references tab of the Fields dialog 3 Click on the required item in the Selection list which shows all the items of the selected type In the Format list choose the format required Usually this will be Reference to insert the full text of the heading or caption Category and Number to insert the word Figure or Table and its number but without the caption text Numbering to insert only the figure or table number without the word Figure or Table or Page to insert the number of the page the referenced text is on Click Insert Using bookmarks Bookmarks are listed in the Navigator and can be accessed directly from there with a single mouse click You can cross reference to bookmarks and create hyperlinks to bookmarks as described above 1 Select the text you want to bookmark Click Insert Bookmark 2 On the Insert Bookmark dialog the larger box lists any previously defined bookmarks Type a name for this bookmark in the top box and then click OK Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 97 Insert Bookmark Bookmarks insertpagenum usedocproperties Cancel Figure 86 Inserting a bookmark Using master documents Master documents are typically used for producing long documents such as a book a the
420. t files that contain the cell contents of a single sheet Each line in a CSV file represents a row ina spreadsheet Commas semicolons or other characters are used to separate the cells Text is entered in quotation marks numbers are entered without quotation marks Opening a CSV file To open a CSV file in Calc 1 2 3 4 5 6 Choose File Open Locate the CSV file that you want to open If the file has a csv extension select the file and click Open If the file has another extension for example txt select the file select Text CSV csv txt xls in the File type box scroll down into the spreadsheet section to find it and then click Open On the Text Import dialog Figure 92 select the Separator options to divide the text in the file into columns You can preview the layout of the imported data at the bottom of the dialog Right click a column in the preview to set the format or to hide the column If the CSV file uses a text delimiter character that is not in the Text delimiter list click in the box and type the character Click OK to open the file Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 103 Text Import sample csv Ea Import Character set Unicode UTF 8 Language Default English Australia From row Separator options Fixed width Separated by E Tab V Comma Oi Other Semicolon E Merge delimiters Text delimiter j Other options Quoted field as text E Detect spec
421. t 1 Bold Double Underline Centered Functions Category Function Frame Numbering Modify LibreOffice Macros Styles Character Frame Pages Numbering Figure 321 Defining keyboard shortcuts for applying styles 5 6 1 Choose the category of style This example uses a paragraph style but you can also choose character styles and others The Function list will display the names of the available styles for the selected category The example shows some of LibreOffice s predefined styles To assign Ctr 9 to be the shortcut key combination for the List 1 style select List 1 in the Function list and then click Modify Ctr 9 now appears in the Keys list on the right and List 1 appears next to Ctr 9 in the Shortcut keys box at the top Make any other required changes and then click OK to save these settings and close the dialog Saving changes to a file Changes to the shortcut key assignments can be saved in a keyboard configuration file for use at a later time thus permitting you to create and apply different configurations as the need arises To save keyboard shortcuts to a file 1 2 3 After making your keyboard shortcut assignments click the Save button at the right of the Customize dialog Figure 321 In the Save Keyboard Configuration dialog select All files from the Save as Type list Next enter a name for the keyboard configuration file in the File name box or select an exi
422. t comprise LibreOffice In other words you can directly manipulate a document Directly manipulating LibreOffice s internal objects is an advanced topic that is beyond the scope of this chapter A simple example however demonstrates how this works Listing 7 Append the text Hello to the current document Sub AppendHello Dim oDoc Dim sTextService Dim oCurs REM ThisComponent refers to the currently active document oDoc ThisComponent REM Verify that this 1s a text document sTextService com sun star text TextDocument If NOT oDoc supportsService sTextService Then MsgBox This macro only works with a text document Exit Sub End If REM Get the view cursor from the current controller oCurs oDoc currentController getViewCursor REM Move the cursor to the end of the document oCurs gotoEnd False REM Insert text Hello at the end of the document oCurs Text insertString oCurs Hello False End Sub Finding more information Numerous resources are available that provide help with writing macros Use Help LibreOffice Help to open the LibreOffice help pages The upper left corner of the LibreOffice help system contains a drop down list that determines which help set is displayed To view the help for Basic choose LibreOffice Basic from this list Included material Many excellent macros are included with LibreOffice Use Tools Macros Organize Macros LibreOffice Basic to open the Macro dialog Ex
423. te and rename libraries modules and dialogs Select the library container to use and then click the Import button to import macro libraries see Figure 307 Note You cannot import the library named Standard On Linux the LibreOffice specific files are stored in a directory whose name begins with a period Directories and files with names beginning with a period are not shown in a normal selection dialog To open the directory navigated to the parent directory entered the name LibreOffice 3 and then clicked Open This opened the directory which was not initially shown fandrewO home andy openoffice org 0 user basic MacroFormatterADP S cl 4B Se CS al dialog xlb XLB File 296 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 script xlb XLB File 357 Bytes 10 26 2006 22 53 06 Figure 307 Select a macro library to import Navigate to the directory containing the library to import There are usually two files from which to choose dialog xlb and script xlb It does not matter which of these two files you select both will be imported Select a file and click Open to continue File name script xlb MacroFormatterADP Options Insert as reference read only Replace existing libraries Figure 308 Choose library import options If the library already exists it will not be replaced unless Replace existing libraries is checked If Insert as reference is checked the library is referenced in its current location but you cannot
424. ted with LibreOffice 3 3 2 If you have not saved the document since the last change a message box appears Click Yes to save the file 3 After saving you see the Digital Signatures dialog Click Add to add a public key to the document 4 Inthe Select Certificate dialog select your certificate and click OK 5 You see again the Digital Signatures dialog where you can add more certificates if you want Click OK to add the public key to the saved file A signed document shows an icon in the status bar You can double click the icon to view the certificate Removing personal data You may wish to ensure that personal data versions notes hidden information or recorded changes are removed from files before you send them to other people or create PDFs from them In Tools Options LibreOffice Security Options you can set LibreOffice to remind warn you when files contain certain information and remove personal information automatically on Saving To remove personal and some other data from a file go to File Properties On the General tab uncheck Apply user data and then click the Reset button This removes any names in the created and modified fields deletes the modification and printing dates and resets the editing time to zero the creation date to the current date and time and the version number to 1 To remove version information either go to File Versions select the versions from the list and click
425. tems on the list B August p sequentially repeating from the top of the list when they g September i reach the end of the list 10 October 11 November I Figure 108 Result of fill series selection shown in Figure 109 118 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Fill Series Direction Series type Down Linear growth pa K AutoFill Start value January 1 Figure 109 Specifying the start of a fill series result is in Figure 108 You can also use Edit Fill Series to create a one time fill series for numbers by entering the start and end values and the increment For example if you entered start and end values of 1 and 7 with an increment of 2 you would get the sequence of 1 3 5 7 In all these cases the Fill tool creates only a momentary connection between the cells Once they are filled the cells have no further connection with one another Defining a fill series To define your own fill Series 1 Go to Tools Options LibreOffice Calc Sort Lists This dialog shows the previously defined series in the Lists box on the left and the contents of the highlighted list in the Entries box Lists Entries Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Pa Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesd Mon Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug S Tue January February March April May Wed Thu Fri Delete Sat Figure 110 Predefined fill series 2 Click New The Entri
426. ter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide For more about headers and footers see Chapter 4 Formatting Pages and Chapter 6 Introduction to Styles in the Writer Guide Numbering pages To automatically number pages 1 Insert a header or footer as described in Creating headers and footers on page 90 2 Place the cursor in the header or footer where you want the page number to appear and choose Insert Fields Page Number Including the total number of pages To include the total number of pages as in page 1 of 12 1 Type the word page and a space then insert the page number as above 2 Press the spacebar once type the word of and a space then choose Insert Fields Page Count 90 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 The Page Count field inserts the total number of pages in the document as shown on the Statistics tab of the document s Properties window File Properties If you restart page numbering anywhere in the document then the total page count may not be what you want See Chapter 4 Formatting Pages in the Writer Guide for more information Restarting page numbering Often you will want to restart the page numbering at 1 for example on the page following a title page or a table of contents In addition many documents have the front matter Such as the table of contents numbered with Roman numerals and the main body of the document numbered in Arabic num
427. ter 14 Working with Fields in the Writer Guide for details Linking to another part of a document If you type in cross references to other parts of a document those references can easily get out of date if you reorganize the order of topics add or remove material or reword a heading Writer provides two ways to ensure that your references are up to date by inserting links to other parts of the same document or to a different document e Hyperlinks e Cross references The two methods have the same result if you Contro click the link when the document is open in Writer you are taken directly to the cross referenced item However they also have major differences e The text in a hyperlink does not automatically update if you change the text of the linked item although you can change it manually but changed text does automatically update in a cross reference e When using a hyperlink you do not have a choice of the content of the link for example text or page number but when using a cross reference you have several choices including bookmarks Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 95 e To hyperlink to an object such as a graphic and have the hyperlink show useful text such as Figure 6 you need to either give such an object a useful name instead of leaving it as the default name Graphics6 or you need to use the Hyperlink dialog to modify the visible text In contrast cross references to figures with captions automatic
428. th LibreOffice 3 3 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice Choosing options to sult the way you work Choosing ptions for all of LibreOffice This section covers some of the settings that apply to all the components of LibreOffice For information on settings not discussed here see the online help Click Tools Options The list in the left hand box of the Options LibreOffice dialog varies depending on which component of LibreOffice is open The illustrations in this chapter show the list as it appears when a Writer document is open Click the marker or triangle by LibreOffice on the left hand side A list of pages drops down Selecting an item in the list causes the right hand side of the dialog to display the relevant page r Options LibreOffice User Data General Memory Colors Fonts Security Appearance Accessibility Java Figure 18 LibreOffice options The Back button has the same effect on all pages of the Options dialog It resets the options to the values that were in place when you opened LibreOffice User Data options Because LibreOffice uses the name or initials stored in the LibreOffice User Data page for several things including document properties created by and last edited by information and the name of the author of notes and changes you will want to ensure that the correct information appears here Fill in the form shown in Figure 19 or
429. the hard disk The Slide Design dialog makes this possible Access this dialog either from the menu bar Format gt Slide design or by right clicking on a slide in the Slides pane The main window in the dialog shows the slide masters already available for use To add more 1 Click the Load button 2 Select in the new dialog the template containing the slide master Click OK 3 Click OK again to close the slide design dialog The slide masters in the template you selected are now shown also in the Master Pages section of the Tasks pane in the Available for use subsection Chapter 6 Getting Started with Impress 159 slide Design Select a slide design Default Exchange background page F Delete unused backgrounds Load Slide Design Templates default LibO3_3_chapter_template MediaWiki Personal Checkbook Register Presentation Backgrounds Presentations Figure 146 Loading slide masters from a presentation template The slide masters you have loaded will also be available the next time you load the presentation If you want to delete the unused slide masters click the corresponding checkbox in the Slide Design dialog If the slide master was not used in the presentation it is removed from the list of available slide masters anyway To limit the size of the presentation file you may want to minimize the number of slide masters used 160 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Modifying a slide master
430. the label PaymentType and choose Replace with List box from the menu Again right click the label PaymentType to open the menu Select Column to open the Properties dialog Figure 203 In the Label box change PaymentType to Payment Type Click the Data tab From the Type of list contents dropdown list select Sql Type the following exactly as it is written SELECT Type Type FROM Payment Type Close the Properties dialog General Data Events NAMING occccccccccoccceccececese PaymentT ype Label ccccccccccccecsecsecess PaymentType 7 Enabled Yes Alignment ccccccce Default v Border color cc Default Figure 203 Properties window for control in a subform Step 9 Add headings to groups This step is easier to do if you have end of paragraph markers visible Choose View Nonprinting Characters to turn them on 1 2 3 4 Make sure the cursor in in the upper left corner If it is not click in that corner to move it there Press the Enter key to move the cursor down to the space between the Date field and the Breakfast field Change the Apply Styles dropdown list from Default to Heading 2 a Default Figure 204 Apply Styles list Use the spacebar to move the cursor to where you want the heading to start 214 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 5 6 1 8 9 10 Type the heading Meals Use the spacebar to move the cursor to th
431. the names of the authors and another field for the names of the books There is an obvious relationship between the authors and the books they have written The library may contain more than one book by the same author This is what is Known as a one to many relationship one author and more than one book Most if not all the relationships in such a database are one to many relationships Consider an employment database for the same library One of the fields contains the names of the employees while others contain the social security numbers and other personal data The relationship between the names and social security numbers is one to one only one social security number for each name If you are acquainted with mathematical sets a relational database can easily be explained in terms of sets elements subsets unions and intersections The fields of a database are the elements The tables are subsets Relationships are defined in terms of unions and intersections of the subsets tables To explain how to use a database we will create one for automobile expenses In the process we will be explaining how a database works 192 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Planning a database The first step in creating a database is to ask yourself many questions Write them down and leave some space between the questions to later write the answers At least some of the answers should seem obvious after you take some time to think You may
432. the query 5 Open anew report Right click the Fuel Economy query and select Report Wizard 6 Select fields Move all the fields from the Available fields to the Fields in report list Use the gt gt to do so Click Next 7 Label fields Change FuelCost to Fuel Cost by placing a space between the words Click Next 8 Group fields Use gt to move the Date field to the Groupings list Click Next 9 Sort options the wizard skipped this one 10 Choose layout accept the default Click Next 11 Create the report Change the report name to Fuel Statistics e The default setting is Dynamic report so no change is necessary Select Modify report layout Click Finish 236 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Modifying a report At the end of the last section we left the Fuel Statistics report open in the edit mode Figure 241 We will be working on that report These same steps can be used with any report that you open for editing ile Dis Fuel Fuel Cos tance Econ Cast pe omy miii Figure 241 A report in edit mode The Author is the name you listed in Tools Options LibreOffice User Data The date is not correct The columns need to be moved to the left to give a better appearance None of the numbers are correct but their only purpose is to show the number of decimal places Step 1 Change the date 1 Click to the right of the date 4 26 20 so that the cursor is next to the field
433. ting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Why do I need Java to run LibreOffice LibreOffice is not written in Java it is written in the C Is it written in Java language Java is one of several languages that can be used to extend the software The Java JDK JRE is only required for some features The most notable one is the HSQLDB relational database engine Note Java is available at no cost If you do not want to use Java you can still use nearly all of the features of LibreOffice How can contribute to LibreOffice You can help with the development of LibreOffice in many ways and you do not need to be a programmer To start check out this webpage http www documentfoundation org contribution What s the catch There really is none you can read the licenses here http www documentfoundation org lgpl File formats LibreOffice can open LibreOffice can open a wide variety of file formats in addition to the OpenDocument formats Opening text documents In addition to OpenDocument formats odt ott oth and odm Writer 3 can open the formats used by OOo 1 x sxw stw and sxg and the following text document formats Microsoft Word 6 0 95 97 2000 XP doc and dot Microsoft Word 2003 XML xml Microsoft Word 2007 XML docx docm dotx dotm Microsoft WinWord 5 doc WordPerfect Document wpd WPS 2000 Office 1 0 wps Rich Text Format rtf Text CSV csv and txt StarWriter formats sdw
434. tomatic filters add a drop down list to the top row of a column that contains commonly used filters They are quick and convenient and are useful with text and with numbers because the list includes every unique entry in the selected cells In addition to these unique entries automatic filters include the option to display all entries the ten highest numerical values and all cells that are empty or not empty as well as a standard filter The automatic filters are somewhat limited In particular they do not allow regular expressions So you cannot use them to display cell contents that are similar but not identical Standard filters are more complex than automatic filters You can set as many as three conditions as a filter combining them with the operators AND and OR Standard filters are mostly useful for numbers although a few of the conditional operators such as and lt gt can also be useful for text Other conditional operators for standard filters include options to display the largest or smallest values or a percentage of them Useful in themselves standard filters take on added value when used to further refine automatic filters Advanced filters are structured similarly to standard filters The differences are that advanced filters are not limited to three conditions and their criteria are not entered in a dialog Instead advanced filters are entered in a blank area of a sheet then referenced by the advanced filter tool to a
435. tting Started with Macros Using the Macro Recorder Your first macros A macro is a saved sequence of commands or keystrokes that are stored for later use An example of a simple macro is one that types your address The LibreOffice macro language is very flexible allowing automation of both simple and complex tasks Macros are especially useful to repeat a task the same way over and over again LibreOffice macros are usually written in a language called LibreOffice Basic or just abbreviated Basic Although you can learn Basic and write macros there is a steep learning curve to writing macros from scratch The usual methods for a beginner are to add macros that someone else has written and to use the built in macro recorder which records your keystrokes and saves them for use Most tasks in LibreOffice are accomplished by dispatching a command sending a command which is intercepted and used The macro recorder works by recording the commands that are dispatched see The dispatch framework on page 318 Adding an existing macro The first step in learning macro programming is to find and use existing macros This section assumes that you have a macro that you want to use the macro may be in an email on a web page or even in a book For this example use the macro in Listing 1 Listing 1 Simple macro that says hello Sub HelloMacro Print Hello End Sub You must create a library and module to contain your macr
436. tton Figure 298 shows a link formatted as a button A hyperlink button is a type of form control See Chapter 15 of the Writer Guide for more information OOo Authors Figure 298 LibreOffice Authors hyperlink as button e Text specifies the text that will be visible to the user If you do not enter anything here LibreOffice uses the full URL or path as the link text Note that if the link is relative and you move the file this text will not change though the target will e Name is applicable to HTML documents It specifies text that will be added as a NAME attribute in the HTML code behind the hyperlink G e Events button click this button to open the Assign Macro dialog and choose a macro to run when the link is clicked See Chapter 13 Getting Started with Macros for more information Editing hyperlinks To edit an existing link click anywhere in the link text and then click the Hyperlink icon B on the Standard toolbar or choose Edit Hyperlink from the menu bar The Hyperlink dialog opens Make your changes and click Apply If you need to edit several hyperlinks you can leave the Hyperlink dialog open until you have edited all of them Be sure to click Apply after each one When you are finished click Close The standard default behavior for activating hyperlinks within LibreOffice is to use Ctr click This behavior can be changed in Tools Options LibreOffice Security Options by deselecting th
437. twork object eight blue squares known as handles appear around the edge of the object as shown below You can drag these handles to resize the object A yellow dot also appears on the object This dot may be E along an edge of the object or it may be somewhere else see figure to right for an example If you hover the pointer over this yellow dot the pointer turns into a hand symbol You can drag the dot in different directions to distort the object Hovering the pointer over other parts of the object turns the pointer into the usual symbol for dragging the object to another part of the page For precise control of the location and size of the object use the Position and Size dialog Chapter 11 Graphics the Gallery and Fontwork 293 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages Saving Documents as HTML Files Introduction This chapter describes how to do the following in Writer Calc Draw and Impress e Create hyperlinks within a document and to other documents such as web pages PDFs and other files e Save documents as web pages HTML documents When creating a document that you plan to deliver as a web page you need to consider the following e In an HTML document hyperlinks are active clickable but other cross references inserted by LibreOffice are not active links e An object such as a image is saved as a separate file However if that object has been placed in a frame
438. uch as background images logos header footer and so on It is however unlikely that the predefined layouts will suit all your needs Although Impress does not have the functionality to create new layouts it allows you to resize and move the layout elements It is also possible to add slide elements without being limited to the size and position of the layout boxes To resize a contents box click on the outer frame so that the 8 resizing handles are displayed To move it place the mouse cursor on the frame so that the cursor changes shape You can now click the left mouse button and drag the contents box to its new position on the slide 150 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Changes to any of the pre packaged layouts can only be made using View Normal which is the default Attempting to do this by modifying a slide master although possible may result in unpredictable results and requires extra care as well as a certain amount of trial and error A At this step you may also want to remove unwanted frames To do this e Click the element to highlight it The green resizing handles show it is highlighted e Press the Delete key to remove it Adding text to a slide If the slide contains text click on Click to add an outline in the text frame and then type your text The Outline styles from 1 to 10 are automatically applied to the text as you insert it You can change the outline level of each paragraph as well as its posit
439. uence of entries on a menu or submenu you can add submenus rename or delete the entries and add group separators To begin select the menu or submenu in the Menu list near the top of the Customize page then select the entry in the Entries list under Menu Content Click the Modify button and choose the required action from the drop down list of actions Most of the actions should be self explanatory Begin a group adds a separator line after the highlighted entry 334 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Add Commands a8 To add a command to a toolbar select the category and then the command Then drag the command to the Commands list of the Toolbars tab page in the Customize dialog Category Commands Applicatio About LibreOffice Templates AutoPilot Address Data Sou View AutoPilot Presentation Edit Bibliography Database Options Create HTML Document BASIC 1 Create Master Document Insert Edit Macros Documents 5j Exit Format Navigate Controls Table Drawing Help on Help Graphic Tl Description Figure 316 Adding a command to a menu Customizing toolbars You can customize toolbars in several ways including choosing which icons are visible and locking the position of a docked toolbar as described in Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice This section describes how to create new toolbars and add other icons commands to the list of those available on a toolbar To get to the toolbar customization dialo
440. uer FuellD Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 hfe 704 2 1 f4 5 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 1 253 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 1 207 1 13 67 Figure 233 Query run with aliases We really do not need the column showing the difference between the FuellD fields from the table and query so we will hide it While it will not be visible it will still be used in the calculations 4 Hide a field that does not need to be seen Remove the check in the box of the Visible cell as in Figure 234 Field FuelQuantity Odometer Odometer End Reading FuellD Fuel FuellD Quanity Begin End End Reading End Reading Fuel able Figure 234 Making a field invisible in a query run 5 Rerun the query Figure 235 Quanity Begin End Distance Fuel Economy 6 430 isi 704 2 f45 11 59 19 570 1032 3 778 7 203 6 12 96 15 150 1239 4 1032 3 207 1 13 67 Figure 235 Query run with aliases Step 10 Close save and name the query My suggestion for a name is Fuel Economy There are obviously other calculations that can be made in this query such as cost per distance traveled and how much of the cost belongs to each of the payments types Chapter 8 Getting Started with Base 231 To fully use queries requires a knowledge of set operations unions intersections and or complements and any combinations of these Having a copy of the Hsq db User Guide available from http hsqidb org is also extremely useful
441. ument As Document has been saved as Save Document Document has been saved Close Document Document is closing Activate Document Deactivate Document Print Document Modified status was changed Print form letters Changing the page count Save In Assign Macro Remove OK Cancel Help Reset Figure 311 Assign macro to an application level event A common use is to assign the Open Document event to call a specific macro The macro then performs certain setup tasks for the document Select the desired event and click the Macro button to open the Macro Selector dialog see Figure 312 Select the desired macro and click OK to assign the macro to the event The Events tab shows that the event has been assigned to a macro see Figure 313 When the document opens the PrintHello macro is run Many objects in a document can be set to call macros when events occur The most common usage is to add a control such as a button into a document Even double clicking on a graphic opens a dialog with a Macros tab that allows you to assign a macro to an event 326 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Select the library that contains the macro you want Then select the macro under Macro name Library Macro name CopyNumToColl OK ie CopyNumToCol EnterMyName Cancel ExpormtPDF Main Help ModifyOPtions eee E amp My Macros a DBUtil faq MacroFormatterAL a
442. uments window Creating a template You can create your own templates in two ways from a document and using a wizard Creating a template from a document To create a template from a document 1 Open a new or existing document of the type you want to make into a template text document spreadsheet drawing presentation 2 Add the content and styles that you want 3 From the main menu choose File Templates Save The Templates dialog opens see Figure 54 4 In the New template field type a name for the new template 5 In the Categories list click the category to which you want to assign the template The category you choose has no effect on the template itself it is simply the folder in which you save the template Choosing an appropriate category makes it easier to find the template when you want to use it For example you might save Impress templates under the Presentations category To learn more about template folders see Organizing templates on page 67 6 Click OK to save the new template Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 61 Templates Mew kemplate Templates Cancel abteqories Templates Help My Templates Presentation Backgrounds Edit Presentations Organizer Figure 54 Saving a new template Any settings that can be added to or modified in a document can be saved in a template For example below are some of the settings although not a full list that can be includ
443. up Often the context menu is the fastest and an easier way to reach a function If you are not sure where a function is located in the menus or toolbars you can often find it by right clicking Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice 17 Status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the workspace It provides information about the document and convenient ways to quickly change some features It is similar in Writer Calc Impress and Draw although each component includes some component specific items Page 3 14 Default English USA INSRT STO Page number Page style Language Insert Selection Unsaved mode mode changes Figure 7 Left end of status bar in Writer Outline Numbering Level 2 B OG E O e e 120 Digital Object View Zoom Zoom signature Information lay out slider percent Figure 8 Right end of status bar in Writer Common status bar items are described below Page sheet or slide number Shows the current page sheet or slide number and the total number of pages sheets or slides in the document Double click on this field to open the Navigator Other uses of this field depend on the component Page style or slide design Shows the current page style or slide design To edit the current page style or slide design double click on this field Unsaved changes a An icon H appears here if changes to the document have not been saved Digital signature If the document has been digitally signe
444. urces available press F4 or select View gt Data Sources from the pull down menu This brings up a list of registered databases which will include Bibliography and any other database registered such as the Automobile database created earlier in this chapter To view each database click on the to the left of the database s name see Figure 210 This brings up Tables and Queries Click on the next to Tables to view the individual tables created Now click on a table to see all the records held in it 218 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 El 5 Automobile LE Queries Tables Figure 210 Databases Editing data sources Some data sources can be edited in the View Data Sources dialog A spreadsheet can not A record can be edited added or deleted The data is displayed on the right side of the screen Click in a field to edit the value Beneath the records are five tiny buttons The first four move backwards or forwards through the records or to the beginning or end The fifth button with a small star inserts a new record of 3 no oE Insert new record Figure 211 View Data Sources navigation buttons To delete a record right click on the gray box to the left of a row to highlight the entire row and select Delete Rows to remove the selected row Table Format o4 99 8 299 91354 7 Dan Row Height 27 50 12 557 91699 3 Cash 95 12 10 233 92213 5 Kevin Delete Rows r Record i Jot A t ff ei Figure 212
445. urity options and warnings dialog Figure 30 Chapter 2 Setting up LibreOffice 37 Remove personal information on saving Select this option to always remove user data from the file properties when saving the file To manually remove personal information from specific documents deselect this option and then use the Delete button under File Properties General Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks In older versions of LibreOffice clicking on a hyperlink in a document opened the linked document Now you can choose whether to keep this behavior by unchecking this box Many people find creation and editing of documents easier when accidental clicks on links do not activate the links The other options on this dialog should be self explanatory Secunty options and wamings Security warnings Warn if document contains recorded changes versions hidden information or notes C When saving or sending When signing When printing C When creating PDF files Security options Remove personal information on saving Recommend password protection on saving Y Ctrl click required to follow hyperlinks OK Cancel Help e Figure 30 Security options and warnings dialog Appearance options Writing editing and especially page layout are often easier when you can see the page margins text boundaries the boundaries of tables and sections in Writer documents page breaks in Calc grid lines in Draw o
446. ve defined a print range 1 Highlight the range of cells to be added to the print range 2 Choose Format Print Ranges Add This adds the extra cells to the print range The page break lines no longer display on the screen The additional print range will print as a separate page even if both ranges are on the same sheet Removing a print range It may become necessary to remove a defined print range for example if the whole sheet needs to be printed later Choose Format Print Ranges Remove This removes all defined print ranges on the sheet After the print range is removed the default page break lines will appear on the screen 130 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Editing a print range At any time you can directly edit the print range for example to remove or resize part of the print range Choose Format Print Ranges Edit Selecting the page order details and scale To select the page order details and scale to be printed 1 Choose Format Page from the main menu 2 Select the Sheet tab 3 Make your selections and then click OK Page Style Default X C Left to right then down First page number 1 Print C Column and row headers Charts LI Grid Drawing objects L Notes C Formulas Objects graphics Zero values Scale Scaling mode Reduce enlarge printout Scaling factor 100 4 Figure 122 The Sheet tab of the Page Style dialog Page Order When a sheet wi
447. vigate from one comment to another open the Navigator F5 expand the Comments section and click on the comment text to move the cursor to the anchor point of the comment in the document Right click on the comment to quickly edit or delete it You can also navigate through the comments using the keyboard Use Ctrl Alt Page Down to move to the next comment and Ctr A t Page Up to move to the previous comment Creating a table of contents Writer s table of contents feature lets you build an automated table of contents from the headings in your document Before you start make sure that the headings are styled consistently For example you can use the Heading 1 style for chapter titles and the Heading 2 and Heading 3 styles for chapter subheadings Although tables of contents can be customized extensively in Writer often the default settings are all you need Creating a quick table of contents is simple 1 When you create your document use the following paragraph styles for different heading levels Such as chapter and section headings Heading 1 Heading 2 Heading 3 and so on These are what will appear in your table of contents 2 Place the cursor where you want the table of contents to be inserted 3 Choose Insert Indexes and Tables Indexes and Tables 4 Change nothing in the Insert Index Table dialog Click OK If you add or delete text so that headings move to different pages or you add delete or change headings
448. was created from the changed template the following message appears LibreOffice 3 3 The template chapter template on which this document is based has been modified Do you want to update style based formattings according te the modified template Update Styles Keep Old Styles Figure 56 Update styles message Click Update Styles to apply the template s changed styles to the document Click Keep Old Styles if you do not want to apply the template s changed styles to the document but see Caution notice below Chapter 3 Using Styles and Templates 63 If you choose Keep Old Styles in the message box shown in Figure 56 that message will not appear again the next time you open the document after changing the template it is based on You will not get another chance to update the styles from the template although you can use the macro given in the Note below to re enable this feature If you are using Writer you can also use the Template Changer extension See page 66 to reassign the template To re enable updating from a template 1 Use Tools Macros Organize Macros gt LibreOffice Basic Select the document from the list click the expansion symbol or triangle and select Standard If Standard has an expansion symbol beside it click that and select a module 2 If the Edit button is active click it If the Edit button is not active click New 3 In the Basic window enter the following Sub
449. what kind of object to create or insert If an object is inserted from a file you cannot specify which file to insert 318 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 recorded a macro and used Tools Options to open and modify configuration items The generated macro does not record any configuration changes in fact the generated code is commented so it will not even be run rem dispatcher executeDispatch document uno OptionsTreeDialog 0 Array If a dialog is opened the command to open the dialog is likely to be generated Any work done inside the dialog is not usually recorded Examples include macro organization dialogs inserting special characters and similar types of dialogs Other possible problems using the macro recorder include things such as inserting a formula setting user data setting filters in Calc actions in database forms and exporting a document to an encrypted PDF file You never know for certain what will work unless you try it however The actions from the search dialog are properly captured for example Other options When the macro recorder is not able to solve a specific problem the usual solution is to write code using the LibreOffice objects Unfortunately there is a steep learning curve for the objects It is usually best to start with simple examples and then branch out slowly as you learn more Learning to read generated macros is a good place to start If you record Calc macros and the re
450. with either the letter d for a total derivative or the partial command for a partial derivative to achieve the effect of a derivative Note Notice that we have to use braces squiggly brackets to make the derivative Chapter 9 Getting Started with Math 251 Markup Result df over dx df dx partial f over partial y M4 l l o f partial 2 f over partial t 2 re How do align my equations at the equals sign Math does not have a command for aligning equations on a particular character but you can use a matrix to do this as shown below Markup Result matrix alignr x y alignl 2 xty 2 alignr x alignl 2 y x 2 y The empty braces around are necessary because is a binary operator and thus needs an expression on each side You can reduce the spacing around if you change the inter column spacing of the matrix 1 With the equation editor open choose Format Spacing from the menu bar 2 Inthe Spacing dialog Figure 261 click the Category button and select Matrices in the drop down menu 3 Enter 0 for Column spacing and click OK g Spacing Matrix Line spacing Column spacing Category Default Figure 261 Changing spacing in a matrix formula Numbering equations Equation numbering is one of Math s best hidden features The steps are simple 1 Start a new line 2 Type fn and then press F3 252 Getting Started wit
451. with the Refresh meta tag so a browser automatically cycles from one page to the next Chapter 12 Creating Web Pages 305 WebCast generates an ASP or Perl application to display the slides Unfortunately LibreOffice has no direct support for PHP yet HTML Export Publication type Standard HIML format O Standard HTML with frames CO Automatic WebCast Next gt gt 5 Decide how the images will be saved PNG GIF or JPG and what resolution to use When choosing a resolution consider what the majority of your viewers might be using If you specify a high resolution then a viewer with a medium resolution monitor will have to scroll sideways to see the entire slide which isprobably not desirable dq HTML Export Save graphics as Monitor resolution PNG Low resolution 640x480 pixels GIF Medium resolution 800x600 pixels PG High resolution 1024x768 pixels p Quality Effects Export sounds when slide advances 6 If Create title page was chosen in step 4 supply the information for it on the next page The title contains an author name e mail address and home page along with any additional information you want to include 306 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 This page of the Wizard does not display if Create title page was not chosen Information for the tite page Author E mail address Your homepage Additional information _ Link to a copy of the original
452. ws To remove a split view do any of the following e Double click on each split line e Click on and drag the split lines back to their places at the ends of the scroll bars e Choose Window Split to remove all split lines at the same time Chapter 5 Getting Started with Calc 115 Entering data using the keyboard Most data entry in Calc can be accomplished using the keyboard Entering numbers Click in the cell and type in the number using the number keys on either the main keyboard or the numeric keypad To enter a negative number either type a minus sign in front of it or enclose it in parentheses brackets like this 1234 By default numbers are right aligned and negative numbers have a leading minus symbol If a number beginning with O is entered in to a cell Calc will drop the O for example 01234 becomes 1234 To enter a number and retain the leading O right click on the cell and choose Format Cells Numbers In the Format Cells dialog under Options select the required number of Leading zeros The number selected for leading zeros needs to be one higher than the digits in a number For example if the number is 1234 the number entered for the leading zero will be 5 Format Cells 2S l Numbers Font Font Effects Alignment Borders Background Cell Protection Category Format Language All af 12341 Default English UK User defined Number Percent 01234 Options
453. y it indicates that the chosen key combination is free for use If it were not and you wanted to reassign a shortcut key combination that is already in use you must first delete the existing key Shortcut keys that are greyed out in the listing on the Customize dialog such as F1 and F10 are not available for reassignment Example Assigning styles to shortcut keys You can configure shortcut keys to quickly assign styles in your document Some shortcuts are predefined such as Ctr 0 for the Text body paragraph style Ctr 1 for the Heading 1 style and Ctrl 2 for Heading 2 You can modify these shortcuts and create your own 1 2 3 4 Click Tools Customize Keyboard The Keyboard page of the Customize dialog Figure 321 opens To have the shortcut key assignment available only with one component for example Writer select that component s name in the upper right corner of the page otherwise select LibreOffice button to make it available to every component Choose the shortcut keys you want to assign a style to In this example we have chosen Ctrl 9 In the Functions section at the bottom of the dialog scroll down in the Category list to Styles Click the expansion symbol usually a sign or triangle to expand the list of styles Chapter 14 Customizing LibreOffice 339 Menus Keyboard Toolbars Events Shortcut keys LibreOffice Heading 3 Heading 4 Heading 5 Writer Modify Lis
454. y a banded appearance to the rows and columns Having completed the table design entering data into the cells is similar to working with text box objects Click in the cell you wish to add data to and begin typing To move around cells quickly use the following key options e The arrow keys move the cursor to the next table cell if the cell is empty otherwise they move the cursor to the next character in the cell e The Tab key moves to the next cell skipping over the contents of the cell Shift Tab move backwards in this manner 156 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Adding charts To insert a chart in a slide you can either use the Insert Chart feature or select Chart as type for one of the contents box In both cases Impress will insert a default chart To modify the chart type insert your own data and change the formatting refer to the Impress Guide Adding media clips You can insert various types of music and movie clips into your slide by selecting the Insert Movie button in an empty contents box A media player will open at the bottom of the screen and you can preview the media In case of an audio file the contents box will be filled with a loudspeaker image In Linux based systems such as Ubuntu media do not work straight out of the box You need to download the Java Media Framework API JMF and add the path to jmf jar to the Class Path in Tools Options LibreOffice Java Adding graphics spreadshe
455. y hashed border with green resizing handles shown in Figure 143 4 Type or paste your text in the text box 5 Click outside the text box to deselect it DELILE IEEE ENGEL Al Click and drag to draw a box for the text on Tet x ethe slide Do not worry about the vertical size T Zand position the text box will expand if needed as you type To change the horizontal Xs au size see Resizing a text box to reposition the ext box to a different part of the slide see Moving a text box Release the mouse button when finished The ursor appears in the text box whichis nowin edit mode gray hashed border with green resizing handles 3 Type or paste your text in the text box pia ES PN 4 Click outside the text box to de select it Te B ESS Bi a Figure 143 Selected text box showing the green resizing handles and text toolbar You can move resize and delete text boxes For more information see Chapter 3 in the Impress Guide In addition to the normal text boxes where text is horizontally aligned it is possible to insert text boxes where the text is aligned vertically This choice is available only when Asian languages are enabled in Tools Options Language Settings Languages mj Click on the button in the drawing toolbar to create a vertical text box Note that when editing the contents the text is displayed horizontally 152 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 Quick
456. y person working on the document as it avoids the increase in file size and complexity caused by the other methods 2 Save versions that are stored as part of the original file However this method can cause problems with documents of non trivial size or complexity especially if you save a lot of versions Avoid this method if you can 3 Use Writer s change marks often called redlines or revision marks to show where you have added or deleted material or changed formatting Choose Edit Changes Record Later you or another person can review and accept or reject each change Right click on an individual change and choose Accept Change or Reject Change from the pop up menu or choose Edit Changes Accept or Reject to view the list of changes and accept or reject them Details are in the Writer Guide Not all changes are recorded For example changing a tab stop from align left to align right and changes in formulas equations or linked graphics are not recorded Using fields Fields are extremely useful features of Writer They are used for data that changes in a document such as the current date or the total number of pages and for inserting document properties such as name author and date of last update Fields are the basis of cross referencing see below automatic numbering of figures tables headings and other elements and a wide range of other functions far too many to describe here See Chap
457. y to go to the Odometer field 222 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 4 September 2008 p SMTWTFS 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 190 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Today None Figure 216 Calendar dropdown The Odometer Tolls and Motel fields are numerical fields Enter values directly into them or use the up and down arrows When the value is entered use the Tab key to go to the next field e Clicking the up arrow increases the value and the down arrow decreases the value one unit e These two arrows only change the numerals to the left of the decimal place e Numerals to the right of the decimal place must be changed by deleting them and typing the desired ones The Motel s Payment field is a dropdown list If as in my case all of the elements of the list start with different letters typing the first letter selects the desired entry e If two or more elements of the list have the same first letter repeated typing of the first letter will cycle through the elements with this same first letter e When the selection is correct use the Tab key to go to the Misc field The rest of the fields of the main form are either numerical fields or dropdown lists until we reach the Misc Notes field It is a text field Type anything you desire in this field just as you would any simple text editor Since the Tab key is used to move between fields it can not be used in a text field All spacing must be done by t
458. you need to update the table of contents Chapter 4 Getting Started with Writer 93 To do this 1 Place the cursor within the table of contents 2 Right click and choose Update Index Table from the pop up menu If you cannot place your cursor in the table of contents choose Tools Options LibreOffice Writer Formatting Aids and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section You can customize an existing table of contents at any time Right click anywhere in it and choose Edit Index Table from the pop up menu Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies of the Writer Guide describes in detail all the customizations you can choose Creating indexes and bibliographies Indexes and bibliographies work in a similar way to tables of contents Chapter 12 Creating Tables of Contents Indexes and Bibliographies in the Writer Guide describes the process in detail In addition to alphabetical indexes other types of indexes supplied with Writer include those for illustrations tables and objects and you can even create a user defined index For example you might want an index containing only the scientific names of species mentioned in the text and a separate index containing only the common names of species Before creating some types of indexes you first need to create index entries embedded in your Writer document Working with graphics Graphics in Writer are of three basic types
459. ype table and the fields of the other tables which use the entries of the Payment Type table That will be done when the forms are created The Fuel and Maintenance tables do not really have a relationship even though they share similar fields Date and Odometer As you create your own databases you need to also determine where tables are related and how 1 To begin defining relationships choose Tools Relationships The Automobile LibreOffice Base Relation Design window opens and the Add Tables dialog pops up You can also open it by clicking the Add Tables icon on the Relation Design window 2 On the Add Tables dialog use either of these ways to add a table to the Relation Design window Double click the name of the table In our case do this for both Vacations and Fuel Or click the name of the table and then click Add for each table 3 Click Close to close the Add Tables dialog when you have added the tables you want 202 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 4 You can define the relationship between the Vacations and Fuel tables in two ways Click and drag the Date field in the Fuel table to the Date field in the Vacations table When you release the mouse button a connecting line forms between the two date fields Vacations E Fuel 1 5 Date FuellD al Odometer i Breakfast FuelGost LJ Lunch FuelQuanity z Dinaar Piela maata had Figure 183 Designation for a
460. ystrokes and menu items are different on a Mac from those used in Windows and Linux The table below gives some common substitutions for the instructions in this chapter For a more detailed list see the application Help Windows Linux Mac equivalent Effect Tools Options menu LibreOffice Preferences Access setup options selection Right click Control click Opens a context menu Ctrl Control d Command Used with other keys F5 Shift d F5 Opens the Navigator F11 T Opens the Styles amp Formatting window 8 Getting Started with LibreOffice 3 3 2 LibreOffice The Document Foundation Chapter 1 Introducing LibreOffice What is LibreOffice LibreOffice is a freely available full featured office productivity suite Its native file format is OpenDocument an open standard format that is being adopted by governments worldwide as a required file format for publishing and accepting documents LibreOffice can also open and save documents in many other formats including those used by several versions of Microsoft Office LibreOffice includes the following components Writer word processor Writer is a feature rich tool for creating letters books reports newsletters brochures and other documents You can insert graphics and objects from other components into Writer documents Writer can export files to HTML XHTML XML Adobe s Portable Document Format PDF and several versions of Microsoft Word

Getting Started with LibreOffice 3.3

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents